Analyze your survey Archives | SnapSurveys Support documentation for Snap Surveys products Mon, 02 Dec 2024 11:23:06 +0000 en-GB hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.4.5 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/wp-content/uploads/2020/07/favicon-32x32-1.png Analyze your survey Archives | SnapSurveys 32 32 Changing the proportions or balance of a sample group https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/changing-the-proportions-or-balance-of-a-sample-group/ Wed, 27 Nov 2024 17:33:22 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=12658 Balancing the sample of data responses allows you to adjust the proportion of respondents in your sample to match more closely the proportion in the target population. This target may align the demographics of the respondents to those in a census or an industry benchmark. For example, you can also set the proportions to show […]

The post Changing the proportions or balance of a sample group appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Balancing the sample of data responses allows you to adjust the proportion of respondents in your sample to match more closely the proportion in the target population. This target may align the demographics of the respondents to those in a census or an industry benchmark. For example, you can also set the proportions to show an even distribution for each age range.

Calculate the weighting factors

In the example used, there are more female respondents than male respondents, and the instructions show how to change the sample proportions to represent half the respondents as female and half as male, without changing the current base.

  1. Click AnalysisTblIcon.png to display the Analysis Definition dialog for a table.
  2. In Analysis, enter the variable that you want to weight. Build the table and note the totals for each code.
Weights5.PNG
  1. Calculate the Weighting Factors for each code. To calculate the value, divide the target figure (384÷2=192) by the actual figure.
    • Code 1, Male = 192 ÷ 152 = 1.263
    • Code 2, Female = 192 ÷ 232 = 0.828

Create the weight

  1. Click WeightsIcon.png to display the Weights window.
  2. Click NewSurveyIcon.png to add a new weight and specify the Weight Details as follows:
    • Name: WT1
    • Label: Weight male/female
    • Decimal places: 3
    • Number of codes: 2
Weights6.PNG
  1. Click SaveIcon.png to save the weight.

Use the weight in an analysis

  1. Click VariablePropsIcon.png to redefine the table or AnalysisTblIcon.png to display a new Analysis Definition dialog.
  2. In Analysis, enter the variable that you want to weight.
  3. Specify the Weight as WT1 (Q12), which tells Snap to use weight WT1 based on the results for Q12.
  4. Select the Cells tab. In the Accuracy section set the Calculations d.p. to 3 decimal places to avoid rounding errors.
  5. Click OK to build the table. Check that the table shows the Weighted Values correctly, in this example there should be 103 males and 103 females. Any errors are due to rounding errors or the incorrectly calculated weighting factors.
Weights7.PNG

The table shows the Unweighted Base and the Weighted Base. You can exclude the Unweighted Base in the Tailor | Analysis option.

The weighting can be applied to any other tables and charts. However, there are 2 limitations that multiple-response variables cannot be weighted and you can only use one weight in an analysis.

The post Changing the proportions or balance of a sample group appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Changing the legend labels https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/changing-the-legend-labels/ Wed, 22 May 2024 15:16:46 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11926 You can specify the labels shown in the legend. By default, the labels display the value of each data point. You can add your own text instead or a combination of the value and your own text. Open this dialog by clicking Fill in the analysis Map Control Editor. Select the drop down to insert […]

The post Changing the legend labels appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
You can specify the labels shown in the legend. By default, the labels display the value of each data point. You can add your own text instead or a combination of the value and your own text.

Open this dialog by clicking Fill IM: Fill button in the analysis Map Control Editor.

Select the drop down to insert the {value} field at the current cursor position.

Set the number of decimal places for the calculated values displayed in the legend.

The post Changing the legend labels appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Changing the legend font https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/changing-the-legend-font/ Wed, 22 May 2024 15:16:28 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11924 You can specify the font used for the legend text by selecting the typeface, font style, font size, and font colour. Open this dialog by clicking Fill in the analysis Map Control Editor.

The post Changing the legend font appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
You can specify the font used for the legend text by selecting the typeface, font style, font size, and font colour.

Open this dialog by clicking Fill IM: Fill button in the analysis Map Control Editor.

The post Changing the legend font appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Changing the legend backdrop https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/changing-the-legend-backdrop/ Wed, 22 May 2024 15:16:06 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11922 You can specify the background and outline for the legend. Open this dialog by clicking Fill in the analysis Map Control Editor. Fill Select whether the legend will be in a coloured box. Gradient Specify in what manner the coloured background changes from the first to the second colour. Fill/From colour Define the first colour […]

The post Changing the legend backdrop appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
You can specify the background and outline for the legend.

Open this dialog by clicking Fill IM: Fill button in the analysis Map Control Editor.

FillSelect whether the legend will be in a coloured box.
GradientSpecify in what manner the coloured background changes from the first to the second colour.
Fill/From colourDefine the first colour (the centre for circle and rectangle gradients).
To colourDefine the second colour (edge colour for circle and rectangle gradient).
FrameDefine the outline style, colour and width of the legend box.

The post Changing the legend backdrop appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Changing the legend location https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/changing-the-legend-location/ Wed, 22 May 2024 15:15:47 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11920 The Location tab positions the legend or map key, relative to the image. Open this dialog by clicking Fill in the analysis Map Control Editor. Check Visible to display the legend on the analysis map. Select a radio button to position the legend. If you select Custom location, you must specify the dimensions of the legend box. For […]

The post Changing the legend location appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
The Location tab positions the legend or map key, relative to the image.

Open this dialog by clicking Fill IM: Fill button in the analysis Map Control Editor.

Check Visible to display the legend on the analysis map. Select a radio button to position the legend.

If you select Custom location, you must specify the dimensions of the legend box. For all other locations, the box is auto-sized. The number of items displayed in the legend is the same as the number of data points defined in the shading.

The post Changing the legend location appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Changing the shading https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/changing-the-shading/ Wed, 22 May 2024 15:15:26 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11918 You can add and remove data points as well as change the colours of each data point in the legend. You must define at least two colours, one set as the minimum and the other as the maximum value. Any additional data points are fixed as mid values. Open this dialog by clicking Fill in […]

The post Changing the shading appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
You can add and remove data points as well as change the colours of each data point in the legend. You must define at least two colours, one set as the minimum and the other as the maximum value. Any additional data points are fixed as mid values.

Open this dialog by clicking Fill IM: Fill button in the analysis Map Control Editor.

Colour modelHSL: Hue saturation lightness colour model. Used for creating traffic light maps to go through the colours of red amber green.
RGB: Red green blue colour model. Used for creating merged colour maps, where the colours merge smoothly into one another.
Data modeStepped: only use the defined colours for all values.
Continuous: use intermediate colours for intermediate values.
+Add a new data point and item to the legend.
Remove the data point and item from the legend.

The post Changing the shading appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Map Control Editor for Analysis Maps https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/map-control-editor-for-analysis-maps/ Wed, 22 May 2024 15:15:06 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11914 The Map Control Editor lets you design an analysis map. The Designer tab contains the tools to load and edit an analysis map. First, you need to load a map control or an image into the map control. The image used for the map control can be one of the following: Snap Surveys provides a range of […]

The post Map Control Editor for Analysis Maps appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
The Map Control Editor lets you design an analysis map.

The Designer tab contains the tools to load and edit an analysis map.

First, you need to load a map control or an image into the map control. The image used for the map control can be one of the following:

  • Snap XMP map control
  • image
  • HTML image map

Snap Surveys provides a range of rating scales that you can download and use.

After you have loaded the images into the map control, you are able to

The post Map Control Editor for Analysis Maps appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Override Analysis Value https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/override-analysis-value/ Wed, 22 May 2024 09:57:20 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11908 You can open the Override Analysis Value dialog by double-clicking a table cell. It is used to add external data or text to a table, possibly for later reference using a table cell reference in a report. You can also use it to change the default text of the row and column labels. Cell Value Includes the […]

The post Override Analysis Value appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
You can open the Override Analysis Value dialog by double-clicking a table cell. It is used to add external data or text to a table, possibly for later reference using a table cell reference in a report. You can also use it to change the default text of the row and column labels.

Cell ValueIncludes the table cell reference for use when inserting a reference to this table cell elsewhere.
DefaultUse value generated from table definition and data.
OverrideUse value supplied in field below.
InsertUse dynamic data within the table by inserting a field.
 Variable field: insert the name, label or current context value of a variable.
 Date/Time field: insert the current date or time.
 Cell value fieldinsert data from another table.
Clear all overridden valuesReturn table to its original state, removing all overrides on cells.

The post Override Analysis Value appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
New Cell Value Field dialog https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/new-cell-value-field-dialog/ Wed, 22 May 2024 09:50:40 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11905 The New Cell Value Field dialog allows you to insert the data into table cells or notes within your report. This can be the calculated current value or over-typed data. Enter an expression describing the table cell data to insert the current table cell data into the report field, when you run the report. The expression is […]

The post New Cell Value Field dialog appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
The New Cell Value Field dialog allows you to insert the data into table cells or notes within your report. This can be the calculated current value or over-typed data.

Enter an expression describing the table cell data to insert the current table cell data into the report field, when you run the report.

The expression is defined as the table name, and an expression identifying the cell to be inserted. You can use the appropriate operators within the expression, e.g., A21 R1C1 – A22 R1C1 where both table cells contain quantities.

The cell referred to can be

  • A row label description: tablename RNlabel.
  • A column label description:  tablename CNlabel.
  • A data cell described by its row and column number: tablename RNCN.
  • A statistic value described by its row and statistic number, where the statistic number is the position in the list of statistics, S1 being the top, given by tablename RNSN.

You can also use the expression tablename empty to test if a specific table contains any data.

You can choose to modify the case and set the number of decimal places to display.

The post New Cell Value Field dialog appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Descriptive Statistics tab https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/descriptive-statistics-tab/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 16:59:23 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11340 Statistic Description Count The number of data cases Mean This is often called the average. It is defined as the sum of the items divided by the number of items. For example, for ten responses Mean = (1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 3 + 4 + 5 + 4 + 6 + […]

The post Descriptive Statistics tab appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Descriptive Statistics tab in the Analysis definition dialog

Statistic

Description

Count

The number of data cases

Mean

This is often called the average. It is defined as the sum of the items divided by the number of items. For example, for ten responses

Mean = (1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 3 + 4 + 5 + 4 + 6 + 2) = 34 10 = 3.4

Mode

The mode of a distribution is the most frequent or most popular item. If two values tie for the mode, Snap chooses the lower. With the same ten responses: 1, 2, 2, 3, 3, 4, 4, 4, 5, 6

Mode = 4, since 4 is the most frequently occurring value (three occurrences).

Quartile 1

25% through a range of values

Median

The midpoint or 50% through a range of values. To calculate the median, the items of the distribution are arranged in order of magnitude starting with either the smallest or the largest, then:

if the number of items is odd, the median is the value of the middle item.

if the number of items is even, the median is the mean of the two middle items.

1, 2, 2, 3, 3, 4, 4, 4, 5, 6

Median = (3 + 4) ÷ 2 = 3.5

Quartile 3

75% through a range of values.

Sum

The sum is calculated by adding all the values of a distribution.

Sum = 1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 3 + 4 + 5 + 4 + 6 + 2 = 34

Minimum

The minimum is the smallest value of the distribution.

Minimum = 1

Maximum

The maximum is the largest value of the distribution.

Maximum = 6

Range

The range shows the spread of the distribution and is calculated by subtracting the smallest value (minimum) from the largest value (maximum).

Range = 6 – 1 = 5

Standard Deviation

The standard deviation is a measure of dispersion of values in a distribution. It gives an indication of how much the values deviate from the mean. Thus, a distribution with a large range would have a larger standard deviation than one with a small range. The standard deviation is calculated as:

https://www.snapsurveys.com/help/15530.bmp

where xi is each value in the distribution, https://www.snapsurveys.com/help/15531.bmp is the mean of the values and n is the number of cases. For the sample in question:

Standard Deviation = 1.428286

Variance

The variance is another measure of dispersion of values in a distribution and is used in the calculation of the standard deviation:

Snap calculates the standard deviation and variance by assuming the data represents a sample rather than an entire population.

Standard Error of the Mean

The standard error of the mean is calculated by dividing the standard deviation by the square root of the number of items in the sample. It is defined as the standard deviation of the distribution of the sample mean and gives an indication of how far individual scores deviate from the mean score shown. The larger the sample, and/or the closer the individual scores are to the mean score, the smaller the standard error.

Standard Error of the Mean = 1.428286 ÷ √10 = 0.451664

Skewness

A distribution that is not symmetrical but has more cases toward one end of the distribution than the other is called skewed.

The measures of central tendency (mean, mode and median) can vary considerably. If the mean is larger than the mid point of the range (the median) and the most frequently occurring value (the mode), the sample is said to be positively skewed.

If the mean is smaller than the mid point of the range (the median) and the most frequently occurring value (the mode), the sample is said to be negatively skewed.

A small skewness value (close to 0) indicates that the data is evenly distributed about the mean. With this type of distribution it would be expected that the values for mean, mode and median be similar. The skewness of the example is 0.098843 indicating a small positive skewness.

Kurtosis

Kurtosis also gives an indication of the shape of a distribution in the form of the extent to which, for a given standard deviation, the data clusters around a central point.

A positive value for kurtosis indicates a distribution that is more peaked than usual. A distribution of this type would typically have most of the values clustered around a central point.

A negative value for kurtosis indicates a flatter or more widely dispersed distribution. The kurtosis for the example is -0.75202

Average Absolute Deviation

The average of the absolute deviations. It is a and tends to ignore distant outliers. It is a summary statistic of statistical dispersion and would normally only be displayed if specifically requested

Sample Standard Deviation

An estimate of the population standard deviation based on the sample.

Sample Variance

An estimate of the population variance based on the sample.

The post Descriptive Statistics tab appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Summary Statistics tab https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/summary-statistics-tab/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 16:59:02 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11338 Area Description Available List of statistical data you can add to your chart/table Used List of statistical data you have added to your chart/table Statistical data   <Body> The analysis/break information given in definition Confidence (mean) Specify the confidence level and display the confidence interval level for the mean (using the defined scoring system) Confidence […]

The post Summary Statistics tab appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Summary Statistics tab in the Analysis definition dialog

Area

Description

Available

List of statistical data you can add to your chart/table

Used

List of statistical data you have added to your chart/table

Statistical data

 

<Body>

The analysis/break information given in definition

Confidence (mean)

Specify the confidence level and display the confidence interval level for the mean (using the defined scoring system)

Confidence Bottom Box

Specify a low-end group of values to be calculated and displayed. If confidence interval selected as an option, display the level of confidence that sample matches target population.

Confidence Difference

Display (top box percentage total) – (bottom box percentage total)

Confidence Top Box

Specify a high-end group of values to be calculated and displayed. If confidence interval selected as an option, display the level of confidence that sample matches target population.

Mean

Average value of the analysis variable(total divided by base) using the defined scoring system

Median

Central value (equal number of cases to each side

Significance (t-test)

Compare mean scores of columns with mean scores of the base to distinguish whether or not the difference between the groups’ averages would most likely reflect a “real” difference in the population from which the groups were sampled. The significance is shown as a percentage.

Standard Deviation

Display standard deviation (measure of dispersal of values and hence deviation from mean)

Standard Error

Display standard error (indication of how far individual scores deviate from the mean score)

t-test

Compare mean scores of axis-defined groups to see if difference is significant. Display significance letters by column values

U test

Compare median scores of axis-defined groups to see if difference is significant. Display significance letters by column values

Variance

Display variance (measure of dispersion of values in a distribution)

This table shows the meaning of the options which appear when a given statistic is selected. These options specify how the statistic is calculated and displayed. The default options are set in the Analysis tailoring dialog.

Statistic

Option

Meaning

Mean

Standard Error

Standard Deviation

Variance

Median

Score

Name of weight matrix, calculation, or name of variable to apply

 

Decimal places

Number of decimal places used in calculation

Confidence (mean)

Confidence Level

The level of certainty that the answer lies within the range given

Confidence Top Box

Confidence Bottom Box

Use the x y responses out of z to calculate q

Select the range of responses used to calculate the confidence top or bottom box. These will be the high-end responses for the top box and the low-end responses for the bottom box

 

Ordered values

Check to only use displayed (ordered) values in calculation and omit any suppressed zero values

 

at a confidence level of

(gap between sample and population) at the specified confidence level

 

Show confidence intervals

Check to display the confidence interval results

 

z-test

Check to display the z-test results with the confidence intervals

 

Multiplier

Allows you to modify the confidence interval if the sample is weighted or drawn from a small (or finite ) population. Set to sqrt(1-n/N) where n = sample size and N = population

Significance (t-test)

Comparison

Base used when comparing the mean of base to the mean of each category on your table. Either use:

Base: the mean for all respondents

Base less current: the mean for respondents that are not included in the category being compared.

 

Score

Name of weight matrix, calculation, or name of variable to apply (same as that used for Mean, Standard Error, Standard Deviation, Variance, Median)

 

Decimal places

Number of decimal places used in calculation

t-test

U test

Upper Level

Set the upper significance level

 

Lower Level

Set the lower significance level

 

Labels: Grouped
Labels: Continuous

Specify how the figures are shown for tables with more than one break variable

 

Show:

All
Higher
Lower
Left
Right

 

Select whether result is shown in both columns it affects, or whether it is only shown in one column. The column it is shown in may be:

column with the higher/lower value

column in the left-most/right-most position

 

Show:

Hyphen
Index

 

Check to show hyphens for non-significant results

Check to label columns with the letter used as index

 

1-Tail
2-Tail

Select type of test (crudely, 1-tailed when looking for increase/decrease between results;2-tailed when looking for difference between two mean scores)

 

Apply Tukey’s Correction (t-test only)

Apply Tukey’s Honestly Significant Difference (HSD) correction to take account of carrying out multiple t-tests

 

Results exclude the x y codes (U test only)

Enables you to exclude codes (eg, Don’t Know ) from the calculation

The post Summary Statistics tab appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Auto Coding tab https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/auto-coding-tab/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 16:58:37 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11336 Area Description Auto Coding   Quantity Set to None for no auto coding Set to Clusters to auto categorise the data using a k-means cluster analysis Set to Values to sort the quantity responses into code bands with one code per unique value Literal Set to None for no auto coding Set to Values to […]

The post Auto Coding tab appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Auto coding tab in the Analysis definition dialog
Area Description
Auto Coding  
Quantity

Set to None for no auto coding


Set to Clusters to auto categorise the data using a k-means cluster analysis


Set to Values to sort the quantity responses into code bands with one code per unique value

Literal

Set to None for no auto coding

Set to Values to create a code for each unique response (so “I like apples” and “I love apples” would have different codes.)

Set to Words to create a code for each unique word in a response (so “I like apples” and “I love apples” would have four codes, one each for “I”, “like”, “love” and “apples”)

Date

Set to None for no auto coding

Set to Values to sort date responses into code bands with one code per unique value

Time

Set to None for no auto coding

Set to Values to sort time responses into code bands with one code per unique value

Words and Values

 

Case sensitive

Create separate codes if responses use different cases.

Stop default words

Do not code words that are included in the stop list

Stop default values

Do not code values that are included in the stop list

Modify case

Change the case of words or phrases to the selected style

Limit codes

Set the maximum number of codes to be used (maximum number of 2000)

Clusters

Specify how open-response quantities will be coded into clusters

Clusters

Set the number of clusters to create

Iterations

Set how often the algorithm is repeated (higher numbers give greater accuracy but are slower)

Running means

Check to calculate the cluster centres every time a data case is allocated to a new cluster, rather than waiting until all cases have been evaluated.

Initial Centres

Specify the starting point of the calculations

 

Set to Zero (default) to start at 0 (in the n-dimensional space). Since the data has been standardised, this should be the centre point of all the variable data

 

Set to First case to use the data in the first respondent case as the starting point

 

Set to Evenly spread to spread the start points evenly across the n-dimensional space

The post Auto Coding tab appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Cells tab https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/cells-tab/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 16:58:15 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11334 Area Description Decimal places Specify the number of decimal places shown on the following values Counts Defaults to 0 Means Defaults to 0 Percentages Defaults to 0 Sums Defaults to 0 Show % sign Select or clear the check box to display percentage sign. Defaults to on Accuracy Significant figures Maximm number of significant figures. […]

The post Cells tab appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>

Area

Description

Decimal places

Specify the number of decimal places shown on the following values

Counts

Defaults to 0

Means

Defaults to 0

Percentages

Defaults to 0

Sums

Defaults to 0

Show % sign

Select or clear the check box to display percentage sign. Defaults to on

Accuracy

Significant figures

Maximm number of significant figures. Defaults to 13 (including decimal places). If calculations exceed this number, the word OVERFLOW is shown.

Calculations d.p

The number of decimal places used in the calculations. Defaults to 2.

Suppress zeroes on specified axis

Remove rows and/or columns (as specified) in a table or chart where all responses are 0. (If you still wish to use them in confidence calculations, you will need to clear the Ordered values box on the Summary statistics tab)

Thresholds

Body cells appear as when is

Check box to specify the conditions under which an entire row or column is suppressed and the character to be used to replace the values field

Any cell appears as
when is

Check box to specify the conditions under which any individual cell in the table is suppressed. The default setting is to replace all zero (or less) values with a hyphen (-)

Body t-test/Body z-test

Displays t-test for Means and Significances analysis selected on the Definition tab and z-test if z-test is checked on the Definition tab for Counts and Percents.

Upper Level

Upper significance level

Lower Level

Lower significance level

Labels

Select Grouped or Continuous to choose how multiple break variables will be labelled

Show

Select which column the significance levels will be displayed in:

All: All columns where they apply
Upper: Only show the columns with the upper significance level


Lower: Only show the columns with the lower significance level
Left: Only show the left-most column showing the significance level


Right: Only show the right-most column containing the significance level

Apply Tukeys correction Check to apply correction to the t-test formula which takes account of carrying out multiple t-tests (t-test only)
Apply Yates correction Check to apply correction to the z-test formula which increases the precision of the test (z-test only)
Tail Select two-tailed test when looking for a difference between two mean scores

Select one-tailed test when looking for an increase or a decrease between results

Hyphen Check to display hyphens for non-significant results
Index Check to label columns with the letter used as an index

The post Cells tab appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Report Styles tab https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/report-styles-tab/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 16:57:51 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11332 Area Description Reports Include Description Include the detailed description defined in the Results Report dialog when you print an analysis from an analysis window Notes Include the notes entered in the Notes tab Analysis text Include the question text of the Analysis expression Title Include the title text entered in the Notes tab

The post Report Styles tab appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Report styles tab in the Analysis definition dialog

Area

Description

Reports Include

Description

Include the detailed description defined in the Results Report dialog when you print an analysis from an analysis window

Notes

Include the notes entered in the Notes tab

Analysis text

Include the question text of the Analysis expression

Title

Include the title text entered in the Notes tab

The post Report Styles tab appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Base/Labels tab https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/base-labels-tab/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 16:57:31 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11330 Area Description Base Responses include all valid replies which may be greater than respondents in a multi-response survey. Respondents include all respondents Update Display Define when the analysis view is updated On request: update when is pressed On text change only: update if variable labels change On any change: update whenever respondent data changes Show […]

The post Base/Labels tab appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Base and Labels tab in the Analysis definition dialog
Area Description
Base
  • Responses include all valid replies which may be greater than respondents in a multi-response survey.
  • Respondents include all respondents

Update Display

Define when the analysis view is updated

  • On request: update when 1 2 3  button is pressed
  • On text change only: update if variable labels change
  • On any change: update whenever respondent data changes
Show  
Language Select the survey language for any labels and analysis fields. This defaults to the system language. When there is no text defined in survey for that language, text will not be displayed.
Analysis base as Enter text for label in field.
Break base as Enter text for label for base section in field
Unweighted as Select or clear the check box to display the unweighted and weighted break bases separately. This is only available if a weight is applied. Enter text for label in field.
Weighted as Enter text for label in field.
Missing as Title for the group of No Reply, Not Asked and Errors. Automatically included if any of these included
Other as Group heading for quantity variables
Errors
Not asked
No reply
You can choose whether non-valid responses are included in the calculations for the analysis and break values. You can also choose whether to display a line of information about these responses
  • Show to include the responses in analysis or/and break and display information on them. Enter text for label in field
  • Hide to include the responses in analysis or/and break but do not show the information.
  • Exclude to remove the responses from the analysis or/and break

Templates

Use Insert to insert one of

  • base Current base value
  • label The label of the analysis variable (grid or code)
  • name The number or ID of the question used for analysis (headings only)
  • score The weights placed on the different responses to a multi-choice question (labels only)
  • unweighted unweighted base values (only useful if the base is weighted).
  • You may also include free text, either on its own or to separate inserted fields.

Analysis Heading

Title for analysis group of rows. Defaults to the variable label (analysis question grid label).

Analysis Label

Title for analysis rows. Defaults to the analysis question code label.

Break Heading

Title for break group of columns. Defaults to the variable label (break question grid label)

Break Label

Title for break columns. Defaults to the break question code label.

Expand axis labels

If multiple variables are used, provide separate labels for each of the variables that appear on one axis. (Charts only). You can define the content of these labels in the Analysis and Break Heading and Label template fields.

The post Base/Labels tab appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Notes/Titles tab https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/notes-titles-tab/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 16:57:07 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11328 Area Description Title Defines the title for table window and text report. This defaults to a summary of the analysis. Insert Insert an Image, Variable field, Survey field, Date/Time field, HTML field, Analysis field or Cell value field at the current cursor position. Chart Axis titles Specify the titles for the chart axes Analysis Defaults […]

The post Notes/Titles tab appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Notes and Titles tab in the Analysis definition dialog
Area Description
Title Defines the title for table window and text report. This defaults to a summary of the analysis.
Insert Insert an Image, Variable field, Survey field, Date/Time field, HTML field, Analysis field or Cell value field at the current cursor position.
Chart Axis titles Specify the titles for the chart axes
Analysis Defaults to the analysis definition as title
Break Title for the x-axis (not for pies or doughnuts) Defaults to the break definition
Value Title for the y-axis (not for pies or doughnuts)
 Use Defaults Set the chart axis titles back to the default values.
Text style area Specifies the font typeface, size, colour and formatting used in notes.
Insert Insert an Image, Variable field, Survey field, Date/Time field, HTML field, Analysis field or Cell value field at the current cursor position.the note
Notes panel Enter text for more information about the current analysis. Text entered here can be viewed and edited in a text panel below the window displaying the result (visible by clicking Notes button in the display window toolbar). It will be included in exports and printed results.

The post Notes/Titles tab appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Definition tab https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/definition-tab/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 16:51:36 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11326 Area Description Type Specifies the analysis as a table, chart, list, cloud or map. Style Selects the style template appropriate to the defined type. Content   Analysis Specifies one axis for the data to be analysed (normally the rows of a table). This can contain: A list or range, consisting of comma separated variable names […]

The post Definition tab appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Definition tab in the Analysis definition dialog
Area Description
Type Specifies the analysis as a table, chart, list, cloud or map.
Style Selects the style template appropriate to the defined type.
Content  

Analysis

Specifies one axis for the data to be analysed (normally the rows of a table).

This can contain:

  • A list or range, consisting of comma separated variable names or TO ( ~)
  • A survey expression, consisting of variable names separated by keywords WITH (:), AND(&), PER (%), NOT(!))
  • Pre-defined tables such as Statistics table, Grid table, Holecount table

Break

Specifies the other axis used to split the data into subgroups.

This can contain:

  • A list or range, consisting of comma separated variable names or TO ( ~)
  • A survey expression, consisting of variable names separated by keywords WITH (:), AND (&), PER (%), NOT (!))

Pre-defined tables such as Statistics table, Grid table, Holecount table

Transpose

Switch the positions of Analysis and Break

Calculate

Specifies the type of analysis together with a field specifying the analysis data. There are six Calculate values.

  • Counts & Percents (default option)
  • Means & Significances
  • Means & Differences
  • Sum & Percents
  • Means & Percents
  • Means & %Differences

The variable entered in the Calculate box adjacent to the Calculate list box is used to calculate the means and sums.

Base If no Base is specified then all respondents in the survey will be included in the analysis.
Filter Defines the subset of data to analyse given as a logical expression.

Weight

Defines how to alter the calculation to represent a different group of respondents. This can be
  • the name of a variable
  • the name of a weight matrix and the variable to which it refers (e.g. WT1(Q10))
  • a numeric value

Allow additional filters

Permits other filters to be applied to this analysis when used in reports. Clear this option if you always want this analysis to appear exactly as defined.

Show Options

The options available depend on the type of analysis selected in Content and Calculate.

All

Show all rows or columns in table or equivalent in chart

Top rows (or columns)

Display following number of rows (or columns) from start of table

Bottom rows (or columns)

Display following number of rows (or columns) to end of table

Rows (or columns) above

Display number of rows (or columns) above a specified value

Rows (or columns) below

Display number of rows (or columns) below a specified value

Retain ‘Other’ row (or column)

Creates ”Other’ category if rows (or columns) are limited

Order by

Defines the order in which the analysis data appears

  • Default where items appear in the order they appear in the questionnaire
  • Analysis Label sorts in alphabetical order by label
  • Analysis Base sorts with the most popular reply first, based on the number of counts for each of the codes in the analysis variable.
  • Score sorts on the statistics that have been added to the table, e.g. mean. If multiple statistics are selected, the one used will be the highest statistic in the list that can be sorted.
Reverse Order Select the check box to reverse the selected order
Hide Table Select the check box to hide the analysis display in a report so that only the notes are visible
Name A name by which each analysis can be saved for later recall/reference
Display Name The name that will be used for the analysis when displayed in Snap Online.
Available Enter a condition under which the analysis is visible in Snap Online. Set to No to make the analysis unavailable and leave blank for it to be available.

The post Definition tab appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
RIM weighting https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/rim-weighting/ Thu, 30 Jun 2022 16:04:38 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=7827 RIM weighting is used when you wish to provide weighting for more than one variable to achieve an even distribution of results across an entire dataset. It can also be used to produce an analysis in which the proportion of respondents in your sample is adjusted to match more closely to the proportion in the […]

The post RIM weighting appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
RIM weighting is used when you wish to provide weighting for more than one variable to achieve an even distribution of results across an entire dataset.

It can also be used to produce an analysis in which the proportion of respondents in your sample is adjusted to match more closely to the proportion in the target population.

For example, if you wished to weight your samples so that they were 50% male and 50% female, and also 20% in each of five age brackets, the algorithm would calculate the correct weighting that needed to be applied to each table entry (combining age and gender).

RIM weighting works best for single response variables where there is no missing data, and the counts or percentages are similar to the existing data responses.

It is not a good idea to use rim-weighting if:

  • Your variables are related to each other (for example, income bracket and dwelling size).
  • The values vary enormously (for example, you have 96 males and four females, and you are attempting to balance it to 50:50).
  • You are applying a very large number of weights.

Creating a RIM Weight

  1. In the Survey Overview window, open the survey.
  2. Click Analysis Variables on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Analysis Variables window which displays a list of the analysis variables.
  3. Click New Analysis Variables Item on the Analysis Variables toolbar. This displays a menu of analysis variables to choose from.
  4. Click New RIM Weight. This opens the RIM Weight window. Note there is an initial error in the status bar as there are no variables references yet.
Graphical user interface, text, application, email

Description automatically generated
  1. In Name, enter a name which describes the RIM weight.
  2. In Label, enter a description of the RIM weight.
  3. In Target total, select the required option.
  4. In Missing data, there are two choices: exclude partial cases or include partial cases. Excluding the partial cases provides the most accurate result as the partial cases have missing data in their responses. The default is exclude partial cases.
  5. In Filter, enter a filter expression to create the RIM weight for a subset of the response data.
  6. Click Add Variable to open the Select variable dialog.
Table

Description automatically generated
  1. Select a variable from the Name drop-down as the weighting variable.
  1. Click OK. This displays default values for the RIM weight in the grid . The grid shows the ratio, expected count and percentage as well as the actual count and percentage.
  2. Click in the Ratio column to change the ratio or target number depending on the Target total option selected.
  3. Repeat for all the variables you wish to add.
  4. If you wish to remove variables, select a variable in the grid then click Delete Variable to delete the variable.
  5. Click Save to save the RIM weight.

Target Totals

There are three options for setting the Target total: Valid cases, From targets and Custom.

Valid cases

Valid cases bases the RIM weight on the valid data responses in the survey. The default ratio is 1 to give an equal distribution for all variable codes. The Ratio column can be changed with a proportion or target number for each variable code. For a target number to be used the total numbers in the Ratio column (per variable) must add up to the number of valid cases, otherwise a proportional ratio is used. The Expected column shows the target counts. The total number of valid cases is available next to the drop-down.

RIM weight with Valid cases selected and an equal ratio distribution

From targets

From targets sets a ratio or target number for each code within a variable. This is set in the Ratio column. The target number is available next to the drop down and is the count of the target number for each variable code in the Ratio column. The Expected column shows the target counts for each variable code.

RIM weight with From targets selected and target numbers set for each code

Custom

Custom allows an overall target number to be entered. Selecting this option enables the field next to the drop-down where you can enter the target number. The default ratio is 1 which shows an equal distribution of the target number split across all the codes within each variable. The target number can be edited in the Ratio column. The Expected column shows the target counts for each variable code.

RIM weight with Custom selected and target numbers set for each code.

Note: The RIM weighting in Snap XMP Desktop works out whether the number entered in Ratio is a percentage, proportion or target number and does not require a percentage sign (%) to be entered.

Tailor the RIM Weight

You can customise the decimal places, maximum iterations and match threshold for the RIM weighting.

  1. Click Tailor on the RIM Weight toolbar where you can edit the number of decimal places, maximum iterations and match threshold for the RIM weighting calculation.
  1. Click OK to save.

Assess the RIM Weight

Assessing the RIM Weight gives statistics of how efficiently the RIM weight will meet the target.

  1. Click Assess RIM Weight on the RIM Weight toolbar to assess the RIM weight.
  1. A summary shows the build information. Click OK to close the summary.

Errors

If there is an error in the RIM weight the status bar will show an error message. Clicking Assess RIM Weight also shows an error message. For example, when not enough target values are set, the assessment shows an error message and the status also displays this message.

Build the RIM Weight

The status of the RIM Weight displays in the status bar at the bottom of the RIM Weight window. When the RIM Weight is created the status shows as Not built.

  1. Click Build RIM Weight on the RIM Weight toolbar to build the RIM weight.
  2. The Status changes to show Built. If there is an error in the RIM weight the status bar will show an error message and the RIM weight is not built.
  3. Click Save to save the RIM weight.

Using the RIM Weight

The RIM weight can be included when creating analyses.

  1. Click the required analysis icon on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Analysis Definition window.
  2. In Analysis and Break, enter appropriate break and analysis fields.
  3. In Weight, enter the name of the RIM weight.
Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated
  1. Click OK to build the rim-weighted analysis.

The post RIM weighting appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Creating a simple chart https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/creating-simple-chart/ Wed, 25 May 2022 10:02:09 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=7679 Charts play an important part in analysis and reporting. They show the response data in a visual format that helps individuals understand the responses to the questions. The chart layouts available include bar charts, pie charts, line graphs and area charts. Chart styles When creating an analysis chart, you need to select the type or […]

The post Creating a simple chart appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Charts play an important part in analysis and reporting. They show the response data in a visual format that helps individuals understand the responses to the questions. The chart layouts available include bar charts, pie charts, line graphs and area charts.

Chart styles

When creating an analysis chart, you need to select the type or style of the chart. Snap XMP provides a large number of pre-defined chart styles. These styles define the layout and colors used to display the chart. Some styles define only the color scheme which is useful when you need a specific set of colors, such as for your organisation’s branding. The pre-defined styles can be edited using the Chart Designer.

Style naming convention

The chart styles that are supplied with Snap XMP Desktop follow a naming convention that can be used to help set up the analysis definition.

Chart styles that contain a layout and colors start with the chart name, such as, Bar, Horizontal Bar, Line and Pie.

If the chart style name contains the word:

  • Counts then select Counts in the Show Options section
  • Percent then select one of the percent options in the Show Options section
  • Transposed then select Transpose otherwise clear Transpose

For example, for the chart style Horizontal Bar Percent Transposed, select the one of the percent options, such as Analysis Percents, and select Transpose.

Chart styles that contain only a color scheme start with the word Color and are followed by a description of the color scheme. For example, Color – 5 point Green to Red Stacked.

Create a simple bar chart

When an analysis, including a chart, is created, two windows are shown to help define the analysis:

  • Analysis Definition window used to define what response data is shown, the chart style and default text used in the chart.
  • Analysis Display window used to define how the chart is displayed.

Usually, the first step is to decide which type of chart you are going to use, although the chart style can be changed at any time. In this example, the chart style selected is Bar Counts. This is a bar chart where the bars show the number of respondents that selected each response.

Instructions

  1. In Snap XMP Desktop, open the survey.
  2. Click Analysis Chart    on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Analysis Definition window where you can create a new chart. This also opens the Analysis Display window which is blank for a new chart before the chart style is selected.
  3. In the Analysis Definition window, click the Select button. This opens the Select Analysis Style dialog. A thumbnail image is shown for each predefined chart style, helping you choose the style you want. Click on the image to select the chart style. The style selected in the example is Bar Counts. Click OK to select the style.
Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated
  1. The next step is to define the response data that is shown in the chart. A simple example of a bar chart is to show the responses to a single question. In Analysis, enter Q4, which is a question asking about the items ordered in a café.
  2. Click Apply to show the chart display in the Analysis Display window.
Graphical user interface, chart, bar chart

Description automatically generated
  1. The bar chart shows all the responses to the question Q4 with each bar showing the number of respondents who ordered each item. The legend shows which color corresponds to each question response. The chart title defaults to the Q4 label and the bars are arranged in the order each choice is asked in the question.

Some default settings for an analysis are set up in Analysis Tailoring and these defaults may vary in your organisation. This is opened by clicking Tailor | Analysis.

Resizing the chart and chart elements

Resize the chart by hovering over the move the cursor to any edge or corner of the window until a double-headed arrow appears. When this arrow appears, click and drag to make the window larger or smaller. The chart resizes to fill the chart plot space available. You can see how your chart will look in different display sizes.

Some chart elements can be resized by clicking on the chart element to select it. Hover the cursor over the black selection markers until a double-headed arrow appears. When this arrow appears, click and drag to make the element larger or smaller.

Drag and Drop

Some items in the chart can be moved using drag and drop. This includes the title, legend, chart plot, footnote and datapoint labels.

  1. Click the item in the chart display. The area is shown with small black squares around the selected area.
  2. Click in the selected area and drag to the new position. The chart display changes around the repositioned item.

Opening the chart designer

The Chart designer helps you customise the style of your chart. Open the Chart Designer by clicking the Edit Style button   in the toolbar of the Analysis Display window.

The Chart Designer shows the chart elements on the left-hand panel in the Chart Designer. Selecting a chart element displays tabs that allow you to change different aspects of that element. Some of the chart elements have sub-elements that can be accessed by clicking on the   symbol.

Chart designer showing the chart type selection

You may want to change an item but not know what it is called. In this case, double-click on the item in the chart. The Chart Designer opens with the item selected.

Saving or cancelling changes

  1. As you make changes to the chart elements in the Chart Designer, click on Apply to see the effect they make. Once you have clicked Apply the Cancel button will not reset the changes.
  2. To abandon your changes, as long as you have not clicked on Apply, click on Cancel.
  3. To confirm your changes, click on OK. These updates are made to the Analysis Display window but are not permanently saved as part of the analysis chart.
  4. To save the changes permanently go to the Analysis Display Window. If you wish to cancel all the changes made, click the Cancel icon on the toolbar. To save the changes, click the Save icon on the toolbar.

Transpose to show labels on axis not legend

In the Bar chart shown you can change the legend so that the labels are shown on the axis underneath.

  • In the Analysis Definition window, select Transpose. This removes the legend, and the labels show underneath each bar.
Chart, bar chart

Description automatically generated

Excluding No replies

Not all respondents complete every question when they submit a response to the survey. Often, in the analysis, the responses containing, no reply, are not relevant and you do not want to see them in the chart.

Note: The default setting to show or hide No reply responses is set in the analysis tailoring. The analysis tailoring dialog opens from the Tailor | Analysis menu. Your organisation may already exclude no reply responses.

To exclude the no replies:

  1. In the Analysis Definition window, click the Base/Labels tab.
  2. In the No reply drop down, select Exclude.
Graphical user interface, application, table

Description automatically generated
  1. Click Apply. Check that there are no replies responses shown.
  2. In the Analysis Display window, click Save to save the changes to the chart.

Ordering

You can order the bars in several ways

  • Default. This is the order that the choices appear in a question.
  • Analysis Label. This is the alphabetical order of the choice labels in a question.
  • Analysis Base orders by the number or percent of responses in descending order.
  • Column counts
  • (Score) orders by any statistics on the table e.g. mean
  1. If the Analysis Definition window is not open, click on the Properties icon on the Analysis Display window.
  2. In the Analysis Definition window, select Analysis Base in the Order by list.
  1. Selecting Reverse order reverses the order of the items.

In addition, customised ordering is available in the Chart Designer.

  1. Double-click on a bar to open the Chart Designer.
  2. Click on Series above the selected bar.
  3. Click on the Order tab.
  4. Click the Up and Down buttons to order the bars, as required.
  5. Click Apply to update the chart display.

Changing the chart title

You can customise the chart title by

  • changing the font, font size, font style and font color
  • changing the text
  • changing the text alignment
  • changing the title orientation
  • changing the location
  • changing the background color and pattern
  • changing the title frame style and shadow effect
  • adding a background image or replacing the title text with a logo or image

Double-clicking on the legend opens the Chart Designer.

Chart

Description automatically generated
  1. Click the Text tab and enter a new title for the chart. Click Apply to update the chart.
Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated
  1. Click the Font tab and increase the font size and make the text bold. Click Apply to update the chart.
Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated

The chart title is now more noticeable with a clearer description.

Chart, bar chart

Description automatically generated

Changing the chart legend

You can customise the legend by

  • changing the location
  • changing the background color and pattern
  • adding a background image or replacing the title text with a logo or image
  • changing the font, font size, font style and font color

Double-clicking on the legend opens the Chart Designer.

  • To make the legend text easier to read, click the Font tab and increase the font size. Click Apply to update the chart.
Chart, bar chart

Description automatically generated

Changing bar colours

The chart style chosen determines whether the bars in a series are different colors or all the same color.

  1. When you click on the bar that needs changing, this selects all the bars in the series with the same color. This shows you which bars will be updated.
  2. Double-click on the bar to open the Chart Designer at the series (bar color) settings.
  3. Click the plus + to expand the bar settings and select Datapoint defaults.
  4. In the Fill tab, select the Pattern, Fill color or Pattern color required.
  1. Click Apply to update the chart display.

The post Creating a simple chart appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Setting up filters for Snap XMP Online analysis https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/setting-up-filters-snap-online-analysis/ Wed, 09 Mar 2022 17:03:17 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=7474 This tutorial shows how to filter your survey’s analyses and reports on Snap XMP Online. These allow you and your shared users to quickly filter the data used in the analyses and reports. It also covers how to hide reports and analyses so they cannot be seen on Snap XMP Online. This is only available for online […]

The post Setting up filters for Snap XMP Online analysis appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
This tutorial shows how to filter your survey’s analyses and reports on Snap XMP Online. These allow you and your shared users to quickly filter the data used in the analyses and reports. It also covers how to hide reports and analyses so they cannot be seen on Snap XMP Online. This is only available for online surveys created in Snap XMP Desktop.

Step 1: Creating the filters to use in Snap XMP Online

The external filters and contexts are defined from the Analyses or Reports windows. Once defined, the filter or context can be applied to reports and analyses in Snap XMP Desktop and Snap XMP Online.

  1. Click Analyses or Reports  on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar.
  2. Click on Define External Filter/Context  . This opens the Define External Filter/Context dialog.
  3. Select the Filter tab to enter a filter or the Context tab to enter a context.
  4. Click Add to add a new filter or context variable to the list. Select from the list of variables in the selected survey and click OK.
  1. Use Move Up and Move Down to change the order of the list.
  2. Click OK to save the filters.

Step 2: Checking the filter in Snap XMP Desktop

External filters or contexts allow you to filter the cases used in an analysis or report without changing the analysis or report definition. This is useful for testing the filters available in Snap XMP Online.

  1. Click Analyses on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar.
  2. Double click on an analysis to display it in the Analysis Display dialog.
  3. Click on Apply External Filter/Context  . This opens the Apply External Filter/Context dialog. If this is disabled, then select Allow additional filters on the Analysis Definition dialog.
  4. In the Apply External Filter/Context dialog, select the Filter or Context tab.
  5. Select the code(s) in the selected variable(s) in the list to apply a filter or context. In this example, the location Bristol UK is selected.
  1. If you have applied a mask to the filter, the filter codes displayed will depend on the mask settings.
  2. Click OK to apply the filters to the analysis. This will show the data responses filtered for the Bristol location.

Step 3: Using the filters in Snap XMP Online

Any analyses or reports that include external filters can use these to view a filtered subset of the response data. To apply a filter to an analyses, use the following instructions:

  1. In Snap XMP Online, select the survey from Your work.
  2. In the Summary tab, click the Analyze link. The reports and analyses are available here.
Graphical user interface, text, application

Description automatically generated
  1. Select Tables and Charts in the side menu then select the analysis you want to view.
Chart, bar chart

Description automatically generated
  1. To apply a filter to the selected table or chart, select Filter & context in the side menu.
  2. Click Add variable   to add a filter rule.
  3. In the Select a variable list, select a variable to use as the filter then click Next.
  4. Select the answers to use in the filter and click OK.
Graphical user interface, application, Word

Description automatically generated
  1. Click Apply changes to update the analysis of your response data for the selected filter.
Graphical user interface, text, application

Description automatically generated

Turning external filters on and off in Snap XMP Desktop

Settings in the analyses can determine whether other users can apply the external filters to an analysis in Snap XMP Online by using settings in Snap XMP Desktop. You can also control whether they can see an individual analysis.

  1. In Snap XMP Desktop, open your survey and click Analyses to open the Analyses window.
  2. Open the analysis that you want to control and click Properties   on the Analysis Display toolbar to display the analysis definition.
  3. In the Definition tab, select Allow additional filters to enable filters for this analysis in Snap XMP Online. (Clear this to disable external filters in Snap XMP Online.)
Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated
  1. Check that the Available field is clear or says Yes. (Enter No in this field to stop the analysis being available in Snap XMP Online. Enter a condition in this field to allow the analysis to be available in Snap XMP Online if the condition is true.)

You can set Available conditions on reports in the report definition.
Graphical user interface, text, application, Word, email

Description automatically generated

If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

The post Setting up filters for Snap XMP Online analysis appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Putting counts and percentages on a bar chart https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/counts-and-percentages-on-bar-chart/ Tue, 01 Mar 2022 10:58:49 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=7407 Bar charts normally display one value per bar. You can choose whether this is: This tutorial explains how to create a bar chart that shows both the counts and the percentage values on a single chart: Note: To show either counts or percents on a bar chart, use the preconfigured chart styles supplied with Snap XMP […]

The post Putting counts and percentages on a bar chart appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Bar charts normally display one value per bar. You can choose whether this is:

  • the count (number of respondents who chose that response)
  • the percentage (number of respondents as a percentage of the total).

This tutorial explains how to create a bar chart that shows both the counts and the percentage values on a single chart:

Chart, bar chart

Description automatically generated

Note: To show either counts or percents on a bar chart, use the preconfigured chart styles supplied with Snap XMP Desktop, such as, Bar Counts Labelled or Bar percent labelled.

Bar chart styles

Bar charts are different from tables because you can only display one value for each bar (the height of the bar on the scale).

You can represent counts and percentage values together in a table.
Graphical user interface, application, table

Description automatically generated with medium confidence

For a bar chart, the height of the bar must be either the counts or the percentage. If you want to display both the counts and the percentage value, you need to pass in the counts and use the Chart Designer to calculate the percentages from the counts.

The following examples use the Bar Counts style to display an item in the Analysis field.

If you enter a term in the Analysis field, the bar chart styles identify the separate items by colour and use a key to tell you which bar is associated with which question or question code.

Chart, bar chart

Description automatically generated
If you enter a term in the Break field, the bar chart styles identify the separate item by labelling the X-axis below the bars. (This also happens if you enter the term in the Analysis field and check Transpose.)
Chart, bar chart

Description automatically generated

You can enter analysis terms in both the Analysis and the Break fields (as for a cross-tabulation) and see the results displayed as a bar chart.
Chart, bar chart

Description automatically generated
If you are only using a single term, you can choose whether to have your bars identified by a colour key or labelled.

If you want your chart to give the exact values for each bar, you can display them on the chart.

Bar chart of counts using the Bar Counts Labelled style. The term is in the Analysis field and the Transpose box is checked.
Chart, bar chart

Description automatically generated

Bar chart percentages

When you display a percentage, you need to know what it is a percentage of. The base percents shown in the table are calculated as the percentage of all the respondents that gave that response.

If you are charting a single-response question, the total number of responses is probably the same as the number of respondents. If you are charting a multi-response question, there will be more responses than respondents.

The Chart Designer can’t work out how many respondents there are from the number of responses, so it can’t calculate the percentages automatically. You must tell it.

1: Creating a table of the analysis

  1. Open the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey supplied with Snap XMP Desktop.
  2. Click Analysis Table  on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar to create a table.
  3. In Analysis, enter Q2.
  4. Select Counts and Base Percents.
Graphical user interface, text, application, email

Description automatically generated
  1. Click Apply to display your table. You can use this to confirm that you have displayed the correct values on the chart.
Graphical user interface, application, table

Description automatically generated with medium confidence

2: Creating the bar chart

  1. Click Analysis Chart  on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar to create a chart.
  2. Set the style to Bar Counts and set the analysis to Q2.
Graphical user interface, text, application, email

Description automatically generated
  1. Click Apply to display your chart. This shows a basic bar chart with no figures displayed on the bars.
Chart, bar chart

Description automatically generated
  1. Click Edit Style on the chart toolbar. This opens the Chart Designer where you can change the appearance of the chart.
  2. In the chart elements list, click on Series then click on the Daily datapoint. Click on the Datapoint Label defaults.
  3. In the Appearance tab, select Base to display the counts and percent at the top of the bar. In the Datapoint Label section select Automatic, Value and Percent.
Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated
  1. In the Value Format tab, select Number and 0 to display whole numbers.
Graphical user interface, text

Description automatically generated
  1. In the Percent Format tab, select As Percentage and 0% to display percentages.
Graphical user interface, text, application

Description automatically generated
  1. Repeat this for all the datapoints.
  2. Click Apply to update the chart.
Chart, bar chart

Description automatically generated
  1. Compare the percentage figures on the chart to the figures on the table. You will see that they do not match. This is because the figures on the chart are calculated automatically using the size of the largest bar. To make the figures display correctly, enter the base figure in the Chart Designer to use to calculate the percentages.
  2. In the Chart Designer click the Y Axis section. The scale is set automatically. Clear the Automatic check box then set the Maximum to the respondent base for the survey: 385 in this example.
Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated
  1. Click Apply to update the chart. The percentage values displayed on the chart are now correct.
Chart, bar chart

Description automatically generated

3: Changing the labels on the Y-axis

Sometimes the chart appears with an unnecessarily precise Y-axis labelling. You can choose to not display the Y-axis, or you can change the display of the labels, so they do not show decimal places.

Chart, waterfall chart

Description automatically generated

Hide the Y-axis

You can stop displaying the y-axis by clearing the Show box.

Graphical user interface, text, application, Word

Description automatically generated

Changing the number of divisions on the Y-axis

Change the number of grid divisions to a factor of 385 (e.g., 7), so that no decimal places are needed. This is done by setting the value in the Major box under Divisions.

Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated

Format the Y-axis labels

  1. Select Axis Labels under Y Axis in the chart elements pane.
  2. Select the Format tab.
  3. Select the Number category and 0 as the Format Code.
Graphical user interface, text, application

Description automatically generated
  1. Click OK.

Saving the style

You can save the chart style that you have just created by right clicking the chart and selecting Save Style from the context menu.

Further information

To find out more about how the Chart Designer works, see Using the Chart Designer.

There is a worksheet on creating your own chart styles: Use Chart styles to add branding to your charts.

If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

The post Putting counts and percentages on a bar chart appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Working with rating scale questions https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/working-with-rating-scale-questions/ Wed, 23 Feb 2022 13:19:36 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=7367 One of the most useful forms of question is a rating scale, where you ask people to mark how satisfied they were with an item or a service. You can then analyse the answers to these questions to see if people are generally satisfied or dissatisfied, so you are more able to judge where to […]

The post Working with rating scale questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
One of the most useful forms of question is a rating scale, where you ask people to mark how satisfied they were with an item or a service. You can then analyse the answers to these questions to see if people are generally satisfied or dissatisfied, so you are more able to judge where to put the effort in to improve what you offer.

For example, here are five rating questions with a five point scale.

Table

Description automatically generated

You could use the responses to these questions to help you judge whether you should invest in a larger parking lot or better food.

This tutorial explains some of the issues about using the data as it stands and describes how to set up a three-column table and a simple bar chart to display whether people are generally satisfied or not.

Background

When you are looking at the responses, you need to be careful that you know what is being counted, and that you compare like with like.

For example, how do you compare people’s satisfaction with parking and cleanliness if forty people answer your questionnaire:

  • ten people answer the parking question, of whom eight select Good
  • forty people answer the cleanliness question, of whom twenty select Good.

To make the comparison useful, you could:

  • ignore the people who haven’t responded, and compare the percentage of people who responded who think it is good (in this case 80% think parking is good while 50% think cleanliness is good).
  • count the people who hadn’t responded as neutral, and then compare the percentages (20% of all respondents think parking is good while 50% think cleanliness is good)

You need to then display your conclusions clearly.

Here are some of the ways you could display the rating data in tables.

Look at the responses in detail with a grid table

This tells you how many people and what percentage of people, selected which answer to which question. You can find more information about creating grid tables.
Table

Description automatically generated

Compare the questions as a whole

  • You could use confidence boxes to group the Poor and Very poor responses together as Negative, and the Good and Very good responses together as Positive and see which question scored highest on Negative or Positive responses. You can find more information about creating a satisfaction scale tables here.
Table

Description automatically generated
  • You could work out a value for all the responses for a question and see which question did best on average. One of the clearest ways of showing this is to give the responses a score ranging from negative to positive. You can find more information about creating a scoring system here.
Table

Description automatically generated
  • You can reduce the table to three columns using derived variables, to make it easy to see the general trends. This worksheet describes how to do this.
Graphical user interface, table

Description automatically generated

This tutorial uses the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey data supplied with Snap XMP and shows you how to create derived variables from the rating questions, so you can display the ratings in a three-column table, as Positive, OK, or Negative. The rating scale questions in the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey are questions Q6.a to Q6.e.

Step 1: Create derived variables for the three columns

You need to create a new variable with 3 codes that represent each five-point rating scale to a three-point rating scale: Positive, OK and Negative.

Create the new variable

  1. Click Variables  on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar to open the Variables window.
  2. Click New Variable  on the Variables window toolbar to create a new variable.
  3. Set the Name to ThreePointV6a to remind you that it is a three-point rating scale derived from Q6.a.
  4. Set the Type to Derived. (The values in this variable are derived from the answers to the rating scale questions.)
  5. Set the Label to Speed of service.
  6. Set the Response to Single.

Create the code list

  1. Click in the Label area for code 1 and type Negative. This is going to be the heading of the column in your analysis.
  2. Click Tab to move to the Values column.
  3. Enter an expression to select the Poor or Very poor responses to the rating question. In this example, these are the responses 1 (Very poor) and 2 (Poor). The expression that selects these responses to the appropriate question (Q6a in this example) is Q6a=(1,2). I.e., if the answer to Q6a is either 1 or 2, this variable will have an answer of Negative.
Table

Description automatically generated
  1. Click Tab to move to the Label column for code 2 and type OK.
  2. Click Tab to move to the Values column and type Q6a=3 (i.e., the answer to Q6a is code 3, OK).
  3. Click Tab to move to the Label column for code 3 and type Positive.
  4. Click Tab to move to the Values column and type Q6a=(4,5)(i.e., the answer to Q6a is code 4 or 5, good or very good).
Graphical user interface, table

Description automatically generated
  1. Click  on the Variables window toolbar to check the number of responses for the parts of your new variable. This displays the correct counts.
  2. Click Save  to save your variable.
  3. Highlight the variable that you have just created in the Variables window and click Clone Variable  to create a copy.
  4. Edit the new cloned variable. Change the variable Name to ThreePointV6b, the Label to Cleanliness and change the question number used in the code values from Q6a to Q6b.
  5. Click Save  to save your variable.
  6. Repeat cloning and editing the variable for Q6c (Parking), Q6d (Quality of food) and Q6e (Choice of food).

Step 2: Create an analysis table from the derived variables

You can now create analyses based on the new derived variables.

  1. To create a table, click Analysis Table  on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Analysis Definition window for a table.
  2. In Analysis, enter ThreePointV6a ~ ThreePointV6e as the analysis expression. (If the variable names are not in sequence, enter them individually, in the format V6a, V6b, V6c, V6d, V6e.)
  3. Select the Analysis Percents box, so you can see what percentage of people chose each answer.
Graphical user interface, text, application, email

Description automatically generated
  1. Click Apply to update the table.
Graphical user interface, table

Description automatically generated
  1. Click Save  to save the analysis table.

Step 3: Create a stacked bar chart from the derived variables

Although the table displays all the information you need, it might be easier to see it in a chart. This step shows creating a stacked bar chart to display the same results.

  1. Click Analyses AnalysesIcon.png  on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar to open the Analyses window.
  2. Click the analysis table that you have just created in the Analyses window and click Clone Analysis  to create a copy. This opens the Analysis Definition window.
  3. In Type, select Chart.
  4. Set the Style to Horizontal Stacked Bar Counts Transposed.
  5. Select Counts and clear Analysis Percents.
  6. Select Transpose.
Graphical user interface, text, application, email

Description automatically generated
  1. Select the Notes/Title tab and type Satisfaction ratings as the title of your chart. Clear any values for the Analysis and Break chart axis titles.
Graphical user interface, text, application, email

Description automatically generated
  1. Click Apply to display the chart. (You may need to drag the definition window away from the chart window.)
Chart, bar chart

Description automatically generated
  1. Click Save  to save the analysis chart.

The chart shows the satisfaction ratings as a single bar for each question. From the chart, it is easy to see that people are most dissatisfied with Service and most satisfied with Choice of food. The number of responses for each rating is given on that section of the bar.

If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

The post Working with rating scale questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Tailored reports and analyses in shared surveys https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/tailored-reports-and-analyses-in-shared-surveys/ Mon, 31 Jan 2022 11:22:09 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=7157 In Snap XMP, you can create reports and analyses in your survey that change according to who is looking at them in Snap XMP Online. This is done by creating the reports and analyses with a context in Snap XMP Desktop. When you share the survey with an analyst or researcher in Snap XMP Online, […]

The post Tailored reports and analyses in shared surveys appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
In Snap XMP, you can create reports and analyses in your survey that change according to who is looking at them in Snap XMP Online. This is done by creating the reports and analyses with a context in Snap XMP Desktop.

When you share the survey with an analyst or researcher in Snap XMP Online, you can also set the context for that user. The report or analysis available to the shared user is tailored according to the context.

The survey needs to include a single-response variable that can be used as the context. For example, this could be a location or a job function.

The reports or analyses are created using information that changes according to the context, that is filtered according to the context or both. In Snap XMP Online, you can share the survey with another user with any context or filter values set on the survey.

Step 1: Create context-sensitive reports and analyses in your survey

You need to put context-sensitive information in your reports and analyses. If you want to set up the report in your own version of Crocodile Rock Cafe survey, the instructions are given below.

This section describes briefly how to change the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey provided with Snap XMP to create the context sensitive report. It consists of the following stages

  • 1: Set up a derived variable to compare all data to the current context data
  • 2: Create a bar chart comparing the amount spent in the specified location with the amount spent elsewhere using the comparison variable
  • 3: Create a comments list filtered on context
  • 4: Create your report including the comparison bar chart and filtered comment list

Set up a derived variable to compare all data to the current context data

  1. Click    to open the Variables window.
  2. Open Q0 and change its Name to Location to make it more obvious what it is. This is the context variable.
  3. Click   on the Variables window toolbar to add a new variable.
  4. Specify the Variable details:
    • Name: CComparison
    • Label: Compare context to all
    • Type: Derived (the variable will derive its data from Location, the existing location question).
    • Response: Multiple
  5. Double click in the first code label and click the Insert button. Select Variable Field from the menu.
Graphical user interface

Description automatically generated
  1. Select Location as the Variable, and Context as the Aspect. This will give the selected location as the code label. Click OK to return to the variable definition.
Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated
  1. Press Tab to move to the Values column. Enter Location=Location@context. The code used will be the code that equals the location specified by the context.
  2. Press Tab to move to the next Label field and enter Other sites. Then enter NOT(Location=Location@context) as the Value. This code will be used when the response does not equal the location specified by context.
  3. Press [Tab] to move to the next Label field and enter All sites. Then enter True as the Value.
Graphical user interface, text, application

Description automatically generated
  1. Click  to save the variable.

Create a bar chart comparing one restaurant to the others using the comparison variable

  1. Click Analysis Chart   to display the Analysis Definition dialog for a chart.
  2. Select the chart style Bar Counts from the drop-down list.
  3. Type CComparison (your derived variable) into the Analysis field.
  4. Check the Transpose box.
  5. Select Means & Significances from the Calculate list and enter Q5 (the amount spent) as the variable to use.
Graphical user interface, text, application, email

Description automatically generated
  1. Select the Notes/Titles tab and click in the Title field.
Graphical user interface, text, application

Description automatically generated
  1. Enter the title of your chart, using the Insert button to open the Variable field dialog and insert the Name aspect of Q5. Click OK and repeat to insert the Context aspect of Location in the title.
Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated
  1. Clear the Chart Axis titles.
  2. Select the Base/Labels tab.
  3. Clear the Reports Include options for Description and Notes if set.
  4. Click Apply to update the chart while keeping the analysis definition displayed.
Chart, bar chart

Description automatically generated
  1. There will be no data for the title and subject as no context has been set.
  2. Click Save  to save your chart.

Add a comments list filtered on context

  1. Click  to create a list. The picture below shows a list consisting of the variable (Q9) with comments plus the displayed location.
    Apply a filter of Q9 ok and Location=Location@context to filter the comments according to the current location. Q9 ok tests that an answer has been supplied to Q9 to strip out empty comments. Location=Location@context filters the comments according to the selected location.
Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated
  1. Select the Base/Labels tab and clear the Reports Include options for Description and Notes if set.
  2. Click OK to create the new list. It will have no content as no context has been set.
  3. Click Save  to save your list.

Create your report including the comparison bar chart and filtered comment list

  1. Click   on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar to open the reports window.
  2. Click   to create a new report and give it a label describing it.
  3. Click   on the report dialog and select Information to add a piece of text to your report.
  4. Enter the title for your report in the text pane. Leave the Title field blank.
  5. Click OK to add the Information instruction to the report.
  6. Click   on the report dialog and select Execute.
  7. Click  on the Execute dialog and select the comparison chart (AN14) from the list.
  8. Click OK to add the Execute instruction to the report.
  9. Click  on the report dialog and select Information to add text after the comparison chart.
  10. Enter some text describing the comments list. Use Insert to insert the Context Aspect of the Location variable to insert the label of the current location.
  11. Type AN18 empty in the N/A field. This tests if there is currently any data in the comments list (analysis AN18). If there is no data, the report will not include the instruction.
  12. Click OK to add the Information instruction to the report.
  13. Click  and select Execute from the drop-down menu.
  14. Select the comments list (AN18) from the list of analyses.
  15. Click OK to add the Execute instruction to the report.
Graphical user interface, text, email

Description automatically generated
  1. Click Save   to save your report.

Step 2: Sharing the survey with a context

Other Snap XMP Online users are given permission to share a survey through the Shares tab in Snap XMP Online.

  1. Log in to Snap XMP Online to show Your work. If you are already using Snap XMP Online, click Home to return to Your work, where the Summary tab displays by default.
  2. Select the survey to share, then select the Shares tab, which lists the users who have shared access to the survey.
Shares tab showing the users that share the selected survey
  1. Click the Add user button to enter the details of the user you want to share the survey with. The user must have a Snap XMP Online account.
Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated
  1. In the Add user dialog enter the user’s email address that they use to access their Snap XMP Online account.
  2. Next set the Permissions for the user. Further information on the permissions is available at Sharing overview.
  3. Type the required context in the Context field (Location=1 in this example). Note that the context will not be checked here. It is only checked when it is used, and it is only used when the client logs in and looks at the analyses or reports.
  4. Set Enabled to Yes for the user to have access to the shared survey or survey template.
  5. Set Manage shares to No if you do not want the user to share the survey with other account holders or set to Yes if you want the user to be able to share the survey with other Snap XMP Online account users.
  6. When you have entered the user details, click Save to add the user. The user has access to the shared item. The Shares list includes the new user.
  7. Select the Show contexts/filters to view the context and filter columns.
Graphical user interface, text, application, email

Description automatically generated
  1. The shared icon shows that the survey or survey template is shared.

Step 3: Testing the context

  1. Log into Snap XMP Online using the shared user’s login details.
  2. Select the survey with the filter value you have just set up.
  3. In the Summary tab, click the Analyze link
  4. Click Reports or Tables & charts in the side menu then select a report or analysis.
  1. Confirm that the results show the context as you would expect. If you have made an error when applying the context, you will now see a message. Look at any other results to confirm that the context applies to all of them.
  2. Click Log out.

If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

The post Tailored reports and analyses in shared surveys appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Create a chart of positive responses to rating scale questions https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/create-chart-of-positive-responses-rating-scale/ Thu, 07 Oct 2021 13:36:17 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6656 Rating scale questions ask the participant to select a rating from a range of responses. These responses usually range from a negative to a positive rating or vice versa and often include 5 or more points. An analysis of the results can be hard to interpret if all the categories are charted. The responses can […]

The post Create a chart of positive responses to rating scale questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Rating scale questions ask the participant to select a rating from a range of responses. These responses usually range from a negative to a positive rating or vice versa and often include 5 or more points. An analysis of the results can be hard to interpret if all the categories are charted. The responses can be grouped into a reduced number of categories such as positive, neutral and negative to simplify the chart and make it easier to interpret at a glance. This can be further simplified to show only positive or negative responses to the rating scale question.

This worksheet shows how to:

  • categorise responses as positive, neutral or negative
  • create a horizontal bar chart using the new categories
  • exclude the neutral and negative categories, leaving only the positive category

Step 1: Categorise responses as positive, neutral or negative

In this example, participants rate aspects of service on a 5 point scale ranging from Very Good to Very Poor. Derived Variables are used to sort Very Good and Good responses into a new Positive category, OK responses into a new Neutral category, and Poor and Very Poor responses into a new Negative category.

  1. On the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar, click Variables VariablesIcon.png  to open the Variables Window.
  2. Click New Variable  NewSurveyIcon.png  to add a new variable.
  3. Specify the Variable details as follows:
    • Name: VQ6a
    • Label: Quality of product (this will be displayed on the chart)
    • Type: Derived (the variable will derive its data from other existing variables)
    • Response: Single (each participant will only fall into one of the new codes)
DerivedVar1.PNG
  1. Create the derived values for the Negative, Neutral and Positive ratings. For example, the Negative category is given by points 1 and 2 on the scale (Very Poor and Poor) and the Value is Q6a=(1,2).
  2. Click Save SaveIcon.png  to save the variable and close the Variable Details window.
  3. On the Variables Window toolbar, click Clone Variable to copy the derived variable you have just created. Change Q6a to Q6b throughout, and update the label.
  4. Click Save SaveIcon.png  .
  5. Repeat for the other questions in the grid.

Step 2: Create a horizontal bar chart using the new categories

Now you can use the new derived variables to create a stacked bar chart of positive, neutral, and negative results.

  1. On the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar, click Analysis Chart AnalysisChartIcon.png to create a new chart.
  2. In the Style list, select Horizontal Stacked Bar Percent Transposed.
  3. In the Analysis field, enter the derived variables.
  4. Select the options Analysis Percents and Transpose.
AnDefn1a.png
  1. Click Apply. Your chart shows the three derived categories.
Chart1.PNG
  1. Click Save SaveIcon.png  to save the chart.

Step 3: Show only the positive ratings

To create a chart showing only the positive responses, the negative and neutral values need to be excluded. You could also exclude the positive and neutral values to create a negative chart. This is achieved using the Chart Designer.

  1. In the Analysis Chart window, double-click the Negative bar to open the Chart Designer. It will open with Series selected on the left-hand side.
  2. Select Negative in the Series list and select Exclude Series in the options.
ChartDesigner.PNG
  1. Select Neutral in the Series list and select Exclude Series in the options.
  2. Click OK to close the Chart Designer. Your chart now shows only the positive ratings.
PositiveChart2.PNG

The post Create a chart of positive responses to rating scale questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Change category colours in charts https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/change-category-colours-in-charts/ Thu, 07 Oct 2021 09:28:19 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6645 Charts play an important part in analysis and reporting, helping to make the response data easier to understand. You can create chart styles that reflect your organization’s branding, bringing a consistent look to your analysis and reports. Snap XMP Desktop provides a large number of predefined chart styles that you can use as supplied or […]

The post Change category colours in charts appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Charts play an important part in analysis and reporting, helping to make the response data easier to understand. You can create chart styles that reflect your organization’s branding, bringing a consistent look to your analysis and reports. Snap XMP Desktop provides a large number of predefined chart styles that you can use as supplied or as the basis for a new style. Some of these chart styles change the layout, background and colours, whereas others change only the colours. The supplied chart styles that only change the colour scheme start with the word Color.

This tutorial shows how to apply a new colour scheme to an existing chart, how to change the colour for individual chart categories, and how to save your custom chart style to use again.

Step 1: Apply a predefined colour scheme

In this example, a new colour scheme is applied to a horizontal bar chart of responses to a question grid.

  1. On the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar, click Analysis Chart AnalysisChartIcon.png to create a new chart.
  2. In the Style list, select Horizontal Stacked Bar Percent Transposed.
  3. In the Analysis field, enter the grid questions.
  4. Select the options Analysis Percents and Transpose.
AnalysisDefn1a.png
  1. Click Apply. The chart will look like this:
AnalysisChart1a.png
  1. In Style, select a new Colour style from the list, for example Color – 5 Point Red to Green Labelled Stacked
AnalysisDefn2a.png
  1. Click OK. Your chart will now look like this:
AnalysisChart2.PNG

This example uses a 5 point scale; however there are colour schemes specifically designed for horizontal bar charts with 3 or 7 points, on both a positive to negative, and a negative to positive scale. There are black and white styles designed specifically for print, and styles with colours replicating those found in various versions of Excel. Colour styles can be applied to any chart, not just horizontal bar charts.

Step 2: Customise individual category colours

Category colours for any type of chart can be easily changed. In this example, the same colour style, Color – 5 Point Red to Green Labelled Stacked, is applied to a 4 point scale, which also includes a ‘Don’t Know’ option. In this context, the ‘traffic light’ colour labelling would be misleading. Changing the Don’t Know category colour from green to grey can show that this category is not included in the ratings. The same steps can be followed to change category colours in any style of chart.

  1. Double-click the area of the chart you would like to change, in this case the Don’t Know category. This opens the Chart Designer.
AnalysisChart3a.png
  1. The Chart Designer contains a number of options to change the appearance and content of your chart. Select Datapoint Defaults then select a new colour from the Fill section:
ChartDesigner1.png
  1. Click OK to save the changes. The chart shows the new category colour.
AnalysisChart4.PNG

Step 3: Save a style to use again

There are two options. You can either save the colour scheme, enabling you to apply the same colours to another chart in the future, or you can save the chart style including layout, background and colour scheme.

  1. Right-click anywhere in the chart area and select Save Style. This opens the Save Style As dialog.
  2. Choose a folder location and enter a file name for the chart style.
  3. In Style parts, select the parts of the custom style to include.
    • To save just the colour scheme, select Series and clear Layout and Background
    • To save the complete chart style, select Layout, Background and Series
SaveAs1.png
  1. Click Save to finish. You can now browse to select your saved chart style or colour scheme in the Analysis Definition.

The post Change category colours in charts appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Summarise rating scale with Group Variables https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/summarise-rating-scale-with-group-variables/ Wed, 06 Oct 2021 16:58:15 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6629 Group variables are used to create a summary analysis of questions which share a common set of answer choices, making it easier to evaluate overall responses to questions in a grid, and make comparisons between separate question grids in your survey. This tutorial shows how to: This example uses the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey supplied with […]

The post Summarise rating scale with Group Variables appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Group variables are used to create a summary analysis of questions which share a common set of answer choices, making it easier to evaluate overall responses to questions in a grid, and make comparisons between separate question grids in your survey.

This tutorial shows how to:

  • Build a horizontal bar chart of rating scale responses
  • Create an ‘Overall’ Group Variable to combine responses from all questions
  • Add the ‘Overall’ category to the Horizontal bar chart

This example uses the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey supplied with Snap XMP Desktop. Alternatively, use any survey which includes one or more question grids.

Step 1: Build a horizontal bar chart of rating scale responses

Start by building a horizontal bar chart to summarise the responses to a typical question grid.

  1. On the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar, click Analysis Chart AnalysisChartIcon.png to create a new chart.
  2. In the Style list, select Horizontal Stacked Bar Percent Transposed.
  3. In the Analysis field, enter the grid questions.
  4. Select the options Analysis Percents and Transpose.
AnalysisDefn1a.png
  1. Click Apply. The chart will look like this:
AnalysisChart1a.png
  1. Click Save SaveIcon.png  to save the chart. Note the name of the chart as you will need to retrieve it in a later step.

Step 2: Create an ‘Overall’ Group Variable to combine responses from all questions

  1. On the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar, click Analysis Variables AnalysisVariablesIcon.png  to open the Analysis Variables window.
  2. Click NewSurveyIcon.png  and select New Group Variable.
AddGroupVar.PNG
  1. In Name, enter GV1 as the Group Variable name.
  2. In Label, enter Overall as the description.
  3. In Source, enter the list of questions to be grouped into the source field.
GroupVarDetails.PNG
  1. Click Save SaveIcon.png  to save the group variable.

Step 3: Add the ‘Overall’ category to the Horizontal bar chart

Now you can add the group variable to your horizontal bar chart.

  1. On the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar, click Analyses AnalysesIcon.png  to retrieve the saved bar chart.
  2. On the Analysis chart toolbar, click Properties  VariablePropsIcon.png  to open the Analysis Definition details.
  3. In Analysis, type GV1 followed by a comma then the grid questions:
OverallGV1a.png
  1. Click OK. Your chart now includes an extra category, Overall, showing the group variable.
OverallChart.PNG

What else could I do with group variables?

Create a chart to summarise multiple grids

If your survey contains more than one question grid, try repeating the steps above to create a group variable for each one (GV1, GV2, GV3 etc). Then, build a Horizontal bar chart including the group variables only.

Create an overall satisfaction index

Create a new group variable including questions contained in multiple question grids, for example type ‘Q8a to Q8d, Q9a to Q9d, Q10a to Q10d’ into the source field (if the grid questions are sequential, you could also type Q8a to Q10d). This will produce an overall score for all grid questions– perfect for a top level summary in your report.

The post Summarise rating scale with Group Variables appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Analysing data with crosstabs https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/analysing-data-with-crosstabs/ Tue, 05 Oct 2021 13:46:54 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6602 You can find trends and patterns in your data by creating ordered crosstabs (cross tabulations) in Snap XMP Desktop. This is a quick way of analysing banded or coded variables. Crosstabs are also known as contingency tables (or pivot tables). This tutorial shows you how to produce and order crosstabs then convert them to charts. […]

The post Analysing data with crosstabs appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
You can find trends and patterns in your data by creating ordered crosstabs (cross tabulations) in Snap XMP Desktop. This is a quick way of analysing banded or coded variables.

Crosstabs are also known as contingency tables (or pivot tables). This tutorial shows you how to produce and order crosstabs then convert them to charts.

A crosstab is a table where the analysis field defines the rows and the break field gives the columns. This can be reversed by selecting the Transpose option.

AnalDefn1b.png

The data in each cell shows the figure for the participants who fit into both the column and the row. The type and order of data displayed is given by the Show options.

AnalDefn1c.png

You can order the rows by:

  • the order the codes appear in the questionnaire, used for rating scales. This is the default order.
  • alphabetical order by label
  • popularity (sorted by quantity of responses)
  • statistics you have included

Creating a simple crosstab

This example shows how to break down responses by gender. It uses data in the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey supplied with Snap XMP Desktop.

  1. On the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar, click Analysis Table AnalysisTblIcon.png  to display the Analysis Definition dialog.
  2. Type Q11 into the Analysis field (the age variable)
  3. Press OK to build a simple table showing the ages of the participants.
AnalyTbl2.PNG
  1. Click VariablePropsIcon.png  on the Analysis table toolbar to display the Analysis Definition dialog.
  2. Type Q12 into the Break field (the gender variable)
  3. Press Apply. The table now shows the values of Q11 as the row labels and the values of Q12 as the column labels across the top of the table.
AnalyTbl3.PNG
  1. In the Analysis Definition dialog, select Break Percents, which shows each answer as a percentage of the column totals for the break variable (Q12).
AnalDefn2a.png
  1. Click Apply to update the table. The percentages are shown below the counts.
AnalyTbl4.PNG
  1. Click Save SaveIcon.png  to save the table.

Creating an ordered crosstab

This example shows how to set out data so it’s easy to see which choices were most popular. The analysis shows which items were ordered (with a breakdown by age), and sorts them according to popularity.

  1. On the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar, click Analysis Table AnalysisTblIcon.png  to display the Analysis Definition dialog.
  2. Type Q4 into the Analysis field (the food ordered)
  3. Type Q11 into the Break field (the age variable)
  4. Press OK. You will see a crosstab with the values of Q4 as the row labels on the left-hand side of the table and the values of Q11 as the column labels across the top of the table. The default row order is the order that the items were listed in the questionnaire. To make it easy to see which choice was the most popular, you can order the rows by the analysis value.
AnalyTbl5.PNG
  1. Click VariablePropsIcon.png  on the table toolbar to open the Analysis Definition dialog again.
AnalDefn3a.png
  1. In the Order by list, select Analysis Base then click Apply. Your table will update, with the rows sorted according to the number of responses. You can see that the French fries row has moved to the top.
AnalyTbl6.PNG
  1. Click Save SaveIcon.png to save the table.

You can easily display your data in chart form. Open the Analysis Definition dialog and change the Type to Chart. The example below shows it with a style of Horizontal Bar Counts. You can see that the items ordered have been sorted by the Analysis base, with the most popular at the top.

Chart1.PNG

Quickly building multiple crosstabs in a report

You can create a report of separate crosstabs using the same break (for example, break all the responses down by age or gender or both) with a single instruction in a report. The example below breaks down the questions by age.

  1. Click ReportsIcon.png  to display the Reports window.
  2. Click NewSurveyIcon.png  to create a new report. Set the labels to a description of your report and select Skip Empty to omit any empty analyses.
Report1.PNG
  1. Click NewSurveyIcon.png  to create a new instruction and select Table in the Instruction List to display a Report instruction dialog.
  2. Complete the fields in the Definition tab:
    1. Analysis: Q2,Q4,Q6a TO Q6e
    2. Break: Q11
    3. Set the Order by dropdown to Default. Ordering is not appropriate for rating scales.
    4. The instruction will generate one crosstab for each question that you put in the analysis field. Literal, date and quantity questions have been excluded.
  3. Click OK to save the instruction.
  4. Click RunIcon.png  on the Report window toolbar to open the Report execution dialog. Click Yes to save the report.
  5. Click Printer to choose a printer to print the report or choose to save the document to a PDF file or similar.
  6. Click OK to run the report and create the set of crosstabs.

Producing crosstabs filtered by demographic

You can also break down the data in your tables by using filters. This example shows how to produce a set of age tables for males and a set of age tables for females.

  1. Create a new report or duplicate the one you created in the previous step.
  2. Change the label of your new report to Analysis of all questions by age filtered by gender.
  3. Click NewSurveyIcon.png  to create a new instruction and select Table in the Instruction List to display a Report instruction dialog.
  4. Enter Q12 (gender) in the filter field.
AnalDefn4a.png
  1. Click OK to save the instruction.
  2. Click RunIcon.png  to open the Report execution dialog. Click Yes to save the report.
  3. Click OK to run the report and create the set of crosstabs.
  4. You will have two versions of all the question tables, one for each gender in Q12.

You can convert all the tables to charts by changing the instruction type and style.

If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

The post Analysing data with crosstabs appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Using word clouds to display your results https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-word-clouds-to-display-results/ Wed, 21 Jul 2021 09:37:38 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6289 Word clouds allow you to display words from your survey’s responses in a graphical representation. Snap XMP Desktop has a range of features that you can use to customise the appearance of the word cloud. These features include: This worksheet shows how to create a word cloud automatically from participants’ comments. It also describes how […]

The post Using word clouds to display your results appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Word clouds allow you to display words from your survey’s responses in a graphical representation. Snap XMP Desktop has a range of features that you can use to customise the appearance of the word cloud.

These features include:

  • selecting how many items are displayed
  • specify the size variation between different words
  • choose the colours used
  • decide whether to categorise literals as separate words or as complete responses
  • create clouds from open responses or from the labels of coded responses
  • automatically categorise open responses using a stop list to stop common words such as “and” or “the” being included in the word cloud

This worksheet shows how to create a word cloud automatically from participants’ comments. It also describes how to change the number of items displayed in your word cloud and tells you how to remove words from a word cloud.

This worksheet uses the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey supplied with Snap XMP Desktop.

Step 1: Creating a word cloud from a literal question

This step describes how to display comments as a word cloud by using auto coding.

  1. In Survey Overview, open the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey.
  2. Click Analysis Cloud  AnalysisCloudIcon.png  on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Analysis Definition window to create a cloud.
  3. In Analysis, enter Q9. This question asks the participant to give any comments about their visit.
  4. Click Apply to display the word cloud.
WordCloud1.PNG

Step 2: Changing the number of entries in your word cloud

If you wish to have more items in your word cloud, change the code limit.

  1. In the Analysis Definition, select the Auto Coding tab. This tab shows how your data will be coded. These settings may be different, depending on the tailoring defaults set up. Unless you have patterns applied to literals, you would normally use Words for literals and Values for everything else. If you use Values for literals, the complete response is used rather than individual words.
AnalyDefn.PNG
  1. Change the value in Limit codes to 20.
  2. Click Apply to see the change in your word cloud.
WordCloud2.PNG

Step 3: Tailoring your word cloud to hide unwanted words

There may be some words collected in the responses that are not helpful or needed in your cloud. You can adjust which words are displayed for an individual cloud by creating a new variable that you can edit then analyse.

  1. Click Analysis Variables  AnalysisVariablesIcon.png  on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Analysis Variables window showing the list of analysis variables. The dialog below shows two automatically created analysis variables, AV.Q9 and AV.Q9.a. In the name, AV shows that this is an auto category variable and the next part contains the variable name it comes from. The last part makes the variable unique. The dialog shows the variables created for the two word clouds for Q9.
AnalyVar.PNG
  1. Select the variable AV.Q9.a and click Clone  CloneSurveyIcon.png  on the toolbar to make a copy of it. This is the variable used for the twenty code word cloud. (You can find out which variable was created automatically for an analysis by using the Sources and Dependents button  SourceDependIcon.PNG  on the Analysis Variables window toolbar.)
  2. The new variable should open automatically. Click Choose codes ChooseCodesIcon.PNG . This displays a new Include column.
AutoCat1.PNG
  1. The first twenty items in the list will be used in a word cloud. Clear the Include box to remove “bit” from the word cloud.
  2. If you remove “bit” from the list of visible items, the item at number 21 will replace it. If you do not want this item to be used clear the Include box next to it.
  3. Clear Include for “1” and “24”. Any excluded words are added to the Stop words.
  4. Click Stop words to show the excluded words. Removing a word from the list will add it to the included list again. Click OK.
StopWords2.PNG
  1. Click Save SaveIcon.png  to save your new variable.

Step 4: Displaying your tailored word cloud

You now need to edit your analysis to use your new variable.

  1. Open the Analysis definition for your word cloud.
  2. In Analysis, enter the  new auto category variable created in Step 3
  3. Click Apply to see the result. The words “1”, “24” and “bit” have been replaced.
WordCloud3.PNG

Displaying a multiple response variable as a word cloud

This tutorial has shown you how to display comments as a word cloud. You can also display other types of questions as word clouds. For example, it’s easy to see which type of food is most popular at the cafe.

WordCloud4.PNG

If you would like to find out more about word clouds, see the topic Overview of word clouds. This covers creating clouds from any type of variable. To find out about changing the word cloud’s appearance, see the topic Word cloud appearance.

If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

The post Using word clouds to display your results appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Banding quantity variables for analysis https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/banding-quantity-variables-for-analysis/ Fri, 16 Jul 2021 10:50:38 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6197 Quantity data provides a continuous set of values which makes it difficult to find out how values are distributed, as every response could be different. Grouping the quantity responses together into banded ranges provides a way of using charts and tables to analyse the quantity data. Usually the data is grouped into equal band intervals […]

The post Banding quantity variables for analysis appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Quantity data provides a continuous set of values which makes it difficult to find out how values are distributed, as every response could be different. Grouping the quantity responses together into banded ranges provides a way of using charts and tables to analyse the quantity data. Usually the data is grouped into equal band intervals to see how the responses are distributed. Choosing how wide the bands are can help you see any important spikes or dips which might average out over a wide band.

To do this, you need to find out what the minimum and maximum value responses are, and use this information to divide the range into equal bands. You can display the minimum and maximum values in a table of descriptive statistics. Once you have decided on the bands, you must sort the responses into those ranges, so they can be used in charts and tables. This is done by creating a derived variable.

Step 1: Decide on the band ranges

In order to split the quantity into bands of equal size, create a table to find the maximum and minimum values and the range. This tutorial uses the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey supplied with Snap XMP Desktop.

  1. Click Analysis table AnalysisTblIcon.png  on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Analysis Definition dialog to create a table.
  2. In Analysis, enter Q5, the question that asks for the “Amount spent”.
  3. In Break, select Statistics table.
AnalStatsTbl.PNG
  1. Click the Descriptive Statistics tab to select the information that will be shown in the table.
DescStats.PNG
  1. Use the < button to remove all entries from the Used column apart from the Minimum, Maximum and Range statistics. (You can select multiple entries to move at the same time.)
  2. Click OK to create your table.
TableStats.PNG

The table shows the top and bottom limits of the bands. For a coarse grain banding, you could split the data into bands of 1 – 21.33 (Low spend), 21.34 – 41.66 (Medium spend) and 41.67 – 62 (High spend). Deciding which band ranges to use can depend on your survey, such as the status of the survey or the intended audience of the analyses and reports that use the banded data. If the survey is live then you may wish to take into account that any new responses may contain data outside the current ranges and extend the bands. If the analysis is used in a report you may want to use whole numbers to make the chart easier to read, for example using 1 to 20 rather than 1-21.33.

Step 2: Create the derived variable

  1. Click Variables VariablesIcon.png  on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Variables window.
  2. Click New Variable NewSurveyIcon.png  on the Variables toolbar to create a new variable.
  3. Enter a Name and Label to describe the variable
  4. Set the Type to Derived.
  5. Set the Response to Single.
  6. Click Toggle Definitions ToggleDefnIcon.PNG to display the variable definition.
  7. In Initial Value, enter Q5. This means that the data will be derived from the response in Q5.
  1. Click in the empty Code Label field. Enter the bands as shown, using the Tab key to move to the next field and to enter a new code.
CodeList1.PNG
  1. Click Save SaveIcon.png  to save the new variable.

Step 3: Analyse the quantity data using the bands

  1. Click Analysis Chart AnalysisChartIcon.png  on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Analysis Definition dialog to create a chart.
  2. In Style, select Bar Percent Labelled. Set the analysis value to the name of your new variable, AmountSpent, and select the Transpose box.
ChartAnal.PNG
  1. Click OK to display the bar chart. You can see that nearly all the responses are in the lowest band. For further detail, you will need to redefine your variable or create a new variable with narrower bands.
BarChart1.PNG
  1. Open the new variable and update the label and values as shown. Click Clone Answer Code CloneSurveyIcon.png  to duplicate the code, if required.
NarrowBandCodelist.PNG
  1. Click Save SaveIcon.png  to save your changes.
  2. If your chart is still open it will now have Out of Date on the title bar. Click Rebuild CountResponsesIcon.PNG  on the toolbar to update the chart.
BarChart2.PNG

Further analysis of the low end values

The previous graph shows that most people spent less than twenty pounds in the shop, with the other bands being roughly equal.

You could further analyse the low end spending in a separate graph by cloning the derived variable, AmountSpent and creating bands ranging from 1 to 20. The bar chart analysis is shown.

BarChart3.PNG

You can see from this that the most popular lower end spend is between one and five pounds.

If there is a topic you would like a worksheet on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

The post Banding quantity variables for analysis appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Using filters to find a subset of response data https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-filters-to-find-a-subset-of-response-data/ Fri, 16 Jul 2021 10:14:52 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6170 Filters allow you to view a subset of the response data that meets specific criteria. This makes it easier to analyse specific areas in the survey’s responses. The response data is not deleted; you are shown only the response data that matches the criteria. The criteria can be changed to provide a different subset to […]

The post Using filters to find a subset of response data appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Filters allow you to view a subset of the response data that meets specific criteria. This makes it easier to analyse specific areas in the survey’s responses. The response data is not deleted; you are shown only the response data that matches the criteria. The criteria can be changed to provide a different subset to view.

Snap XMP Desktop provides filters that are available in a number of areas.

  • viewing responses in the Data Entry and Questionnaire windows
  • adding a filter to an analysis in the Analysis Definition window
  • adding a filter to a report in the Report window
  • adding a filter to certain types of report instruction
  • creating external filters for use in reports, analyses and shared users in Snap Online

In the same way, you can filter the response data.

You can filter data by:

  • the answers to one or more of the questions
  • participants who did or did not reply to certain questions, for example, selecting all participants who wrote a comment
  • value of a question response or on system data provided by Snap XMP Desktop

The way you filter may be different depending on the type of question.

  • filter multi-response values on which codes or how many codes a participant has selected
  • filter quantity questions by whether the value is larger, smaller, or equal to another value
  • filter by the date or time, or on parts of them such as month, day or hour
  • filter text questions on whether the text has been entered, or whether it contains particular words or parts of words
  • filter cases by case number

You can also combine filters together using logic operators, such as AND, or use a derived variable to create complex filters.

Filtering responses in a chart showing satisfaction ratings

This example shows how to create a chart showing the satisfaction rating before and after a promotion by applying a filter to analyse the data over different months. The sample survey Crocodile Rock Cafe is used for this example.

  1. Click on Analysis Chart AnalysisChartIcon.png  on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Analysis Definition window for a chart.
  2. In Style, select Horizontal Stacked Bar Counts Transposed. This creates a bar chart showing the proportions of people who selected each response.
  3. In Analysis, enter Q6.a TO Q6.e. This grid question shows the different levels of satisfaction with different aspects of the service.
  4. Select Transpose to display the responses by question rather than by value.
  5. In Filter, enter Q1a MONTH=(7 OR 8). This filter uses Q1a which is a question asking the date that the participant visited. MONTH is a date function which returns the month of a date.
ChartWFilter.PNG
  1. Click the Notes/Titles tab and enter a title such as Satisfaction ratings for July and August.
NotesTitles.PNG
  1. Click OK to create the chart. It will look something like this:
ChartJulAug.PNG
  1. Click Save SaveIcon.png  on the chart toolbar to save your chart.
  2. The filter can be changed to different months and the chart can be updated with the new results for comparisons.
  3. Entering a filter for the months September and October, Q1a MONTH=(9 OR 10), produces a new set of result where you can see that the levels of satisfaction have improved.
ChartSepOct.PNG

Creating a list of comments

This example creates a list of comments, together with the demographics of the participant making the comment. In this situation, only the responses that contain comments are needed. These can be identified by using OK in the filter. Note that you can use capital or lower case letters for question numbers in the Analysis and Break fields.

  1. Click Analysis List  AnalysisListIcon.png  on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Analysis Definition window for a list.
  2. In Analysis, enter the questions or variables that will be shown in the list. In this example, enter case, Q9, Q12, Q11 in the Analysis field. The list will show the case number, comment, gender and age of the participant.
  3. In Filter, enter Q9 OK. This filters the responses where a comment has been entered. (You could also use NOT Q9 NR to specify cases which do not have a “No reply” to Q9.)
ListAnalDef.PNG
  1. Click OK. The list is displayed. You can see from the case numbers that responses without a comment have been omitted.
CommentsList.PNG

Further information can be found at Filtering the data responses and Filter expressions.

If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

The post Using filters to find a subset of response data appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Introduction to the analysis variables window https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/introduction-to-analysis-variables-window/ Wed, 30 Jun 2021 09:06:20 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6029 The Analysis Variables window displays a summary of all the analysis variables including auto category variables, factor analyses, cluster analyses and groups that have been created in the survey. Analysis variables are derived from other variables, according to criteria you specify. Auto category variables These categorise open response variables into codes. You can then analyse the resulting codes […]

The post Introduction to the analysis variables window appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
The Analysis Variables window displays a summary of all the analysis variables including auto category variables, factor analyses, cluster analyses and groups that have been created in the survey. Analysis variables are derived from other variables, according to criteria you specify.

AnalysisVariables.PNG
  • Auto category variables
    • These categorise open response variables into codes. You can then analyse the resulting codes and display them as clouds, frequency tables etc.
  • Group variables
    • Group variables allow you to treat a group of similar variables as a single variable: for example grid questions. The variables must share a code list.
  • Factor analyses
    • Factor analyses summarises the responses to several variables as a composite variable. It allows you to look at underlying patterns in data.
  • Cluster analyses
    • Cluster analyses analyse factor analyses, and create variables based on how the responses are clustered together.

Button

Menu Option

Description

NewSurveyIcon.png

Edit | New

Create new auto category variablegroup variablefactor analysis or cluster analysis

CloneSurveyIcon.png

Edit | Clone

Clone variable or analysis and show details.

DeleteSurveyIcon.png

Edit | Delete

Confirm then delete selected item

VariablePropsIcon.png

Edit | Modify

Show details of selected item.

SourceDependIcon.PNG

View | Sources and Dependents

Show the Sources/Dependencies dialog.

TailoringIcon.PNG

Tailor | Variables

Set the default options for the variables.

PrintIcon.PNG

File | Print Report

Print the analysis variables report

CopyIcon.png

Edit | Copy

Copy selection information on the Clipboard.

PasteIcon.png

Edit | Paste

Create a group or analysis from information on the Clipboard.

The post Introduction to the analysis variables window appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Introduction to cluster analysis https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/introduction-cluster-analysis/ Wed, 30 Jun 2021 09:02:26 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6055 Cluster analysis is used as a method of segmenting the market on a combination of variables rather than the usual straightforward segmentation variables such as age, gender, location, etc. It is most effective when used with quantity variables or failing that, single-response variables with relatively many possible codes. All of the source data should be […]

The post Introduction to cluster analysis appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Cluster analysis is used as a method of segmenting the market on a combination of variables rather than the usual straightforward segmentation variables such as age, gender, location, etc. It is most effective when used with quantity variables or failing that, single-response variables with relatively many possible codes.

All of the source data should be at least ordinal by nature, and ideally of interval or ratio type. That is, if a single response variable is used, it should be one where the codes show an ordered increase or decrease in response. Thus, an ordered age variable would be acceptable but a gender or geographical region variable would not.

Cluster analysis is an exploratory technique designed to identify patterns in data that may not be immediately obvious. Its object is to sort cases into groups, known as clusters, so that the members of a particular cluster are similar to each other but members of different clusters are dissimilar.

It is not a classification technique as it makes no assumptions about the nature of the groups or clusters prior to the analysis being carried out. The groups are constructed based on the data cases provided with each case being assigned to the cluster that it is most like, and each cluster being defined by the characteristics of its members.

The algorithm for the Cluster Analysis used in Snap XMP Desktop, known as k-means clustering, is as follows.

  1. The user specifies how many distinct clusters are required and which variables are to be used in the analysis.
  2. Each cluster is then assigned a value for each variable. Typically, this will be done arbitrarily taking into account the range of values for each variable. As an example, if only two variables are specified, they could be plotted on a two-dimensional scatter graph with the cluster centres represented by points on the graph.
  3. Having assigned the initial cluster centres, Snap then considers each case in turn and calculates which cluster centre it is closest to. The case is then assigned to that particular cluster.
  4. Once all cases have been considered, and allocated membership of one of the clusters, the cluster centres are recalculated as the mean value of all the members of that cluster.
  5. A consequence of recalculating the cluster centres is that some of the cases may now be in the wrong cluster. That is, the centre of the cluster of which it is a member may have moved further away from them, while the centre of a nearby cluster may have moved closer.
  6. Snap repeats the previous step, assigning each case to the cluster whose centre is closest, until convergence is reached.

Initially there is likely to be considerable movement between clusters, however convergence is quickly achieved in most cases. Typically, successive iterations will generally see fewer cases move from one cluster to another, meaning that the cluster centres do not change so much and hence there will be less movement in the next iteration.

Standardised values

Snap uses Standardised Data Values to perform the Cluster Analysis and allows the user to see the standardised values in the results if desired. The Standardised Data Values are calculated by applying a transformation to the initial data set, creating a set of values with a mean of 0 and a standard deviation of 1.

This is an essential process as the source variables may have very different orders of magnitude. For example, consider two quantity variables, Age and Salary, included in the source data. It is probable that the values for Salary will of a different order of magnitude (tens of thousands) from that of Age (tens). If the Cluster Analysis used the actual data values, differences in salary would be given considerably more importance that differences in age. The resulting clusters would be determined predominantly by differences in salary. Standardising the data sets creates a “level playing field” so that all source variables are compared on equal terms.

When the results are reported, it is often unhelpful to use the standardised values as these have no units and are therefore have limited use for interpretation. Snap XMP Desktop by default reports the actual data values.

Snap measures the distance between cases and cluster centres using the Euclidean method. That is, the straight line distance between the two points on a graph.

Standardised Data Values are calculated by subtracting the mean value of the entire data set and dividing the result by the standard deviation.

Running means

The specification for Cluster Analysis includes an option to use Running Means. By default, this is not selected. If the Running Means option is switched on, then the calculation of the cluster centres takes place every time a data case is allocated to a new cluster, rather than waiting until all cases have been evaluated.

Creating a cluster analysis

  1. Open the survey.
  2. Click the AnalysisVariablesIcon.png button on the toolbar to open the Analysis variables overview window. The overview window shows all the Group and Auto-category variables and Factor and Cluster analyses currently set up in the current survey.
  3. Click the NewSurveyIcon.png button and select New Cluster Analysis… from the menu. The Cluster Analysis Details window appears.
ClusterAnalysis1.PNG
  1. Specify a name and descriptive label as required.
  2. Specify the list of variables from which clusters are to be extrapolated in the Source field. For example, specify Q5, Q2 to have clusters evaluated for those two variables. Use range definitions if the variables fall into a consecutive range, for example Q6a to Q6e would include all variables between and including Q6a and Q6e.

Once the source variables have been specified, the clusters will be determined and results may be reviewed or further qualified by clicking on the appropriate tab.

Initial centres

If clusters are not clearly defined, the initial centres selected may have an effect on the clusters produced. As an extreme example, if you have data that naturally looks like two clusters and you ask for three clusters, the third cluster does not naturally have a suitable centre, so its final position will be affected by its starting position.

Look at the centres and the scatter plot to see if you think the clusters are well spaced for the data – the F-values help with this too.

The Initial centre options are:

Zero (default) – start at zero, so the clusters move away from zero sequentially.

First cases – the n cluster centres are set to the first n cases. This provides some real positions as initial centres. It is rather open to influence from what people have answered.

Evenly spread – for each source variable, find the minimum and maximum values. The first cluster centre starts at the minimum values and the last cluster starts at the maximum values. The other clusters are evenly spaced in a ‘line’ between these extremes. This will favour results ranging from generally good to generally poor

Examining a cluster analysis

The Cluster Analysis dialog allows you to examine the defined clusters in different views by selecting different tabs.

  1. Create a new Cluster Analysis based on the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey with
    • Name: CL1
    • Label: Cluster Analysis CL1
    • Clusters: 2
    • Source: Q5, Q2, Q8
ClusterAnalysis2.PNG
  1. Click on the Results tab to show details of the cluster centres for each variable and the count of respondents in each cluster.
ClusterAnalysis3.PNG
  1. By default, actual values will be shown (as indicated by the Show setting Actual Values. Under this setting, values for quantity variables will reflect the actual answers; values for categorical (single response) variables will reflect the code values.
  2. Change the Show setting to Code Labels to show code labels for categorical variables. Results for quantity variables will still reflect the actual values of those variables.
ClusterAnalysis4.PNG
  1. Change the Show setting to Standardised to show standardised results for all variables.
ClusterAnalysis5.PNG
  1. Use whichever of the Show settings is appropriate for determining a description for each of the clusters. A descriptive label can be allocated to each cluster in either the Results tab or the Setup (previous) tab.
  2. Click the Centre Distances tab to see the table of cluster centre distances. The distances are shown between clusters either as Actual Values (with the Show setting as either Actual values or Code Labels) or Standardised Values.
ClusterAnalysis6.PNG
  1. To see how cluster centres move during the iterative calculation process, click on the Iteration drop-down. The default setting, Final, shows the result at the end of the last iteration.
  2. For an alternative view of the movement of cluster centres, click the Iteration History tab to show the change in each centre during the iterative calculation process.
ClusterAnalysis7.PNG
  1. Click on the Anova tab to show the results of the Analysis of Variance for the current cluster solution. The Mean Square values show the average (mean) squared distance between each of the cluster centres (Between Clusters) and between each case and the centre of the cluster to which it belongs (Within Clusters). The F-value is a statistical measure of how distinct the cluster groups are; a high F-value will indicate highly distinct sub-groups.
ClusterAnalysis8.PNG
  1. The F-Values tab shows a summary of the F-values for several different cluster solutions, with the current solution highlighted. Generally speaking, high F-values indicate that the members of each cluster group are homogeneous, and that the cluster groups are highly distinct from one another.
ClusterAnalysis9.PNG
  1. The Scatter Plot tab shows a plot of data case locations and cluster centres. Each cluster centre is automatically allocated a unique colour. The points representing each case are coloured to indicate the corresponding cluster they have been allocated to. The plot is of one variable against another. If there are more than two variables in the source, drop-down boxes enable you to specify which two should be plotted.
ClusterAnalysis10.PNG

Although F-Values can be used as an indicator of how many cluster groups should be specified, it is not advisable to rely exclusively on this measure. The solution with the highest F-Value will not necessarily be the ideal solution, and users should rely on their own knowledge of the customer base.

The post Introduction to cluster analysis appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Introduction to factor analysis https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/introduction-factor-analysis/ Wed, 30 Jun 2021 09:01:27 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6041 Factor Analysis is a data reduction technique that looks at responses to several variables and summarises them into composite variables, known as factors that make analysing the data a more manageable task. Also called Principal Components Analysis, its main use is in identifying the underlying patterns in the way customers have responded to a series […]

The post Introduction to factor analysis appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Factor Analysis is a data reduction technique that looks at responses to several variables and summarises them into composite variables, known as factors that make analysing the data a more manageable task. Also called Principal Components Analysis, its main use is in identifying the underlying patterns in the way customers have responded to a series of questions.

Typically, a survey might contain a series of questions asking respondents to express an opinion on different aspects of the product or service being evaluated. There may be dozens of questions that all require a response using, for example, a 7-point rating scale. Spotting trends in such a long list of questions can be difficult, so Factor Analysis is used to reduce the list to one of a more manageable length.

In Snap XMP Desktop, the Factor Analysis technique looks at correlations between each pair of questions and combines variables that have a high correlation with each other. These groups of variables are then combined in a particular way to form the factors. As the resultant factors take into account responses to several different source variables, the original list of variables can be reduced to a more manageable number, with each factor as a form of derived variable.

Typically each factor produced by the analysis will be heavily based on a subset of variables that are in some way similar. Since the resulting factors are stored within Snap and can be used as variables in subsequent analysis, knowing the source variables that have influenced the factor most heavily helps when giving the factors meaningful names.

Since the purpose of Factor Analysis is to reduce the number of variables to a more manageable level, it is likely that only a small number of the factors will be retained. The factors are listed in decreasing order of importance, allowing you to choose how many to retain for further analysis. The first factor will be the one that explains the highest amount of the total variance within the data (for the variables used in the source). The second factor will be the one that explains the highest amount of the remaining variance, and so on. The number of factors to be retained will depend on how many source variables are used, and the data for those source variables. This decision is, to some degree, arbitrary. There are theories that provide guidance on how many factors to take, such as ignoring factors with an Eigenvalue below a certain threshold, or taking sufficient factors to have a cumulative variability proportion of greater than a prescribed level.

An important application of Factor Analysis is as a precursor to Cluster Analysis.

Creating a factor analysis

  1. Open the survey.
  2. Click the AnalysisVariablesIcon.png button on the toolbar to open the Analysis variables window. The overview window shows all the Group variables, Auto-category variables, Factor analyses and Cluster analyses set up in the current survey.
AnalysisVariables.PNG
  1. Click the NewSurveyIcon.png button and select New Factor Analysis from the menu. This opens the Factor Analysis Details window.
FactorAnalysis1.PNG
  1. Provide a suitable name and descriptive label of the factor analysis.
  2. In the Source field specify the list of variables for which factors are to be derived. Use range definitions if the variables fall into a consecutive range, for example Q6a to Q6e includes all variables between and including Q6a and Q6e. Specify Q6a to Q6e in the Source field. Separate variables with commas if they do not fall into a consecutive range, e.g. specifying Q6a, Q6b, Q6d.
  3. Once the source variables have been specified, click in the table below and the factors will be calculated. Snap will derive the same number of factors as there are input (source) variables.
FactorAnalysis2.PNG

By default, Snap XMP Desktop uses the Jacobi algorithm for calculating factors. Selecting the Varimax option is an extra step which can make it easier to interpret the factors produced.

Understanding the factor analysis table

FactorAnalysis2.PNG

The results table shows for each factor:

Label

An editable text description of the factor. Choose a useful name by inspecting the factor loadings (see below)..

Eigenvalue

Measure of the weight (or importance) of the factor in representing the variables given as sources. The sum of all eigenvalues is the same as the number of input variables, so any factor with an eigenvalue greater than 1.0 can be thought of as being better than average.

Factors are always shown arranged in decreasing order of eigenvalues.

Proportion

How much of the variability of the data is explained by each factor. It is calculated as the eigenvalue divided by the number of factors/variables and is equivalent to the percentage variability in the data represented by that factor

If one factor has a very high proportion, i.e. more than 80%, and the rest are all very low, it is possible that the questions have not covered all aspects of customers’ attitudes.

Cumulative Proportion

A running total of the previous column (Proportion).Since factors are arranged in order of decreasing eigenvalues, the cumulative proportion represents the percentage variability in the data represented by the specified and all preceding factors.

Factor Loadings

How much a particular variable contributes to the factor. Large loadings show that the variable is relatively important; smaller values indicate that it has less influence. These loadings will help you provide a suitable name for each factor.

Arranging factor loadings tables for easy interpretation

Transposing the table

To interpret the factor loadings, it is often easier to transpose the table. Select Transpose to display each factor as a column.

Re-ordering the table

The variable order is set by how the analysis was specified. You can sort the order by importance within each factor. This helps you see which variables have the greatest effect on a factor.

Click in the grey box containing a number at the top of the column or the end of the row containing the factor data. A triangle appears representing the sort order, and the variables re-order by the factor loading for that factor.

Column

Row

 

Down pointing triangle for table sort

Right triangle for table sort

Greatest first

Up pointing trangle for table sort

Left-pointing traingle for table sort

Smallest first

Blank grey square representing absent triangle

Blank grey square representing absent triangle

(blank) Ordered by analysis specification

Reducing the number of factors

Factor Analysis is a data reduction technique, its purpose is to reduce the initial number of variables to a more manageable number by creating “composite” variables. By default, it produces the same number of factors as there are variables. In a long list of source variables it is likely that several factors will appear to be influenced by the same set of variables. The apparent duplication will usually occur in factors with small eigenvalues. These factors can usually be discarded as being relatively insignificant.

To discard values, you use the Cutoff settings.

Number of factors

Keep the specified number of factors, selecting those with the highest eigenvalues.

Eigenvalue

Keep the factors with an eigenvalue above the specified value. Some theorists use the rule that factors with an eigenvalues of less than 1.0 should be ignored.

Proportion

Keep the factors with a proportion above the specified value. Some theorists use the rule that factors with a proportion less than a certain amount, e.g. 10%, should be ignored.

Cumulative Proportion

Keep the factors which are required to achieve the specified cumulative proportion. Some theorists use the rule that factors should be included up to a specified cumulative proportion, e.g. 80%.

Weighting in factor analysis

You can apply a weight to factor analysis as you can to other statistics.

For example, if the input variables are rating scale questions with 1 as Very Good and 5 as Very Poor, it is worth specifying a weight to the data so that very good scores have a high value and very poor scores have a low value in the resulting factors.

Applying a weight in the Scale box means:

  • the weight will be applied to all multi-choice and grid questions before the factor analysis is performed
  • the weight will NOT be applied to quantity questions

If all your source variables are rating scale questions, the weight will be applied to them all, and this will have no effect on the Eigenvalues or Factor Loadings that are produced.

If you have a mixture of variable types, the weight will only be applied to multi-choice and grid questions, and factor analysis results will differ from the same analysis without the Scale applied.

In the box labelled Scale, enter the name of a suitable weight, for example, one which weights codes 1 to 5 from -2 to +2.

The post Introduction to factor analysis appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Exporting analyses https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/exporting-analyses/ Tue, 29 Jun 2021 09:36:25 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6010 Moving analyses between surveys Snap Interchange Format (SnIF) is used to transfer analyses, including tables, charts, word clouds, lists and maps between surveys. For example, if a number of surveys require the same set of analysis definitions, these could be created in one survey, exported in a SnIF format file and then imported into another survey. In the following […]

The post Exporting analyses appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Moving analyses between surveys

Snap Interchange Format (SnIF) is used to transfer analyses, including tables, charts, word clouds, lists and maps between surveys. For example, if a number of surveys require the same set of analysis definitions, these could be created in one survey, exported in a SnIF format file and then imported into another survey.

In the following example the data is exported via the clipboard. For larger exports, it is recommended that you export to a file.

  1. Click Analyses  AnalysesIcon.png  on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Analyses window.
  2. Select the menu option File | Export to display the Analysis Export dialog.
  3. Specify the Format as SNAP Xml Format (SnIF Xml).
  4. Set the Destination as Clipboard.
  5. By default, this will export all analyses in the survey. If you only need a selection, type the names of the ones required separated by commas, in Content.
AnalysesExport1.PNG
  1. Click OK to export the selected analyses.
  2. Open the survey that you want to add the analyses to.
  3. Click Analyses  AnalysesIcon.png  on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Analyses window.
  4. Select the menu option File | Import to display the Analysis Import dialog.
AnalysesImport1.PNG
  1. Set the Source to Clipboard.
  2. Click OK to import the analysis definitions. They will be added to the survey with all the original details.
  3. If there are already analyses with the same name in the survey, an error message appears. Click Done then each analysis is displayed so that the name can be changed and the item saved.

Exporting an analysis to use in an external application

Analyses can be exported from Snap XMP Desktop by

  • Using the clipboard
  • By exporting to a file

You can then import them into a report; either as a picture in a word-processing package, or into a slide show generated in a presentation package. Tables and lists can also be exported in text format into a spreadsheet package, for you to carry out further calculations.

Using the Clipboard to paste an analysis as a picture

  1. Click Analyses  AnalysesIcon.png  on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Analyses window.
  2. Open the analysis in the Analysis Display window.
  3. Click Copy  CopyIcon.png  to place a copy of the analysis on the clipboard.
  4. Switch to the word-processing or presentation package and choose the menu option Edit | Paste Special. Different packages may use different terminology.
  5. On the Paste Special options select the picture (Enhanced metafile) option and click OK to insert the picture in the document.

Using the Clipboard to paste a table or list in text format

  1. Click Analyses  AnalysesIcon.png  on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Analyses window.
  2. Open the table or list analysis in the Analysis Display window.
  3. Click Copy  CopyIcon.png  to place a copy of the analysis on the clipboard.
  4. Switch to a spreadsheet package and choose the menu option Edit | Paste. The table or list is inserted in text format, enabling further analysis to be carried out.

Exporting an analysis as a file

  1. In the Analysis Display window showing the built analysis, such as a chart, select File | Export to display the Analysis Export dialog.
TableExport.PNG
  1. Specify the Format for the exported analysis. This will depend on the requirements of the package that the analysis is destined for. Comma separated and Tab separated are only suitable for table and list export.
    • Comma separated (CSV) each case comprises a series of fields, each separated by a comma. Fields corresponding to literal, date and time variables are surrounded by quote characters.
    • Tab separated (TSV) comprises a series of fields each separated by a tab.
    • Windows Bitmap (BMP) gives a pixel-based graphic.
    • Enhanced Metafile (EMF) gives a vector-based graphic.
    • Web format (HTML) gives an HTML export
    • Excel (CSV) each case comprises a series of fields, each separated by a comma for use in a spreadsheet.
  2. The Export option is only available when CSV and TSV formats are selected.
  3. Leave the Encoding as Automatic unless you know that the software you are importing to requires a different format (If there are problems, try UTF-8 or ANSI format.)
  4. Specify the Destination by typing in a path and file name or click on Browse.
  5. Click OK to export the analysis. This can then be inserted or opened in the appropriate package.

The post Exporting analyses appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Moving weights between surveys https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/moving-weights-between-surveys/ Mon, 28 Jun 2021 16:13:48 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=5994 You can move weights between surveys using the Snap Interchange Format (SnIF). For example, if several surveys needed the same weights, you could create them in one survey and export them into the others. The following example shows exporting weights from a survey to a file. The weights can also be exported via the clipboard. Click   to open […]

The post Moving weights between surveys appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
You can move weights between surveys using the Snap Interchange Format (SnIF). For example, if several surveys needed the same weights, you could create them in one survey and export them into the others.

The following example shows exporting weights from a survey to a file. The weights can also be exported via the clipboard.

  1. Click  WeightsIcon.png  to open the Weights window.
  2. Select File | Export to display the Weight Export dialog.
WeightExport.PNG
  1. Specify the Format as SNAP Interchange Format (SnIF).
  2. Set the Destination as Clipboard.
  3. Specify the names of the weights you wish to export in the Content field. (e.g. Score). Leave the field blank to export all weights.
  4. Click OK to export the selected weight.
  5. A confirmation message is displayed when the export is complete. Click Done.
  6. Open the survey to which you wish to add the weight or select File | New Survey.
  7. Click  WeightsIcon.png  to open the Weights window and select File | Import to display the Weight Import dialog.
  8. Set the Source to File, entering the file name from the export, and click OK to import the weight(s).
WeightImport.PNG
  1. A confirmation message will be displayed when the import has completed successfully and the new weight(s) will be added to the survey.

The post Moving weights between surveys appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Using external filters and contexts https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-external-filters-and-contexts/ Thu, 24 Jun 2021 09:59:48 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=5939 External filters and contexts can be defined in the Analyses and Reports windows. They are available to apply to analyses and reports to limit which data responses are included in the analysis or report. The external filters and contexts are also used to specify how a shared user can filter reports and analyses in Snap […]

The post Using external filters and contexts appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
External filters and contexts can be defined in the Analyses and Reports windows. They are available to apply to analyses and reports to limit which data responses are included in the analysis or report. The external filters and contexts are also used to specify how a shared user can filter reports and analyses in Snap XMP Online.

Defining external filters and contexts

The external filters and contexts are defined from the Analyses or Reports windows. Once defined, the filter or context can be applied to reports and analyses in Snap XMP Desktop and Snap XMP Online.

DefFilterContext.PNG
  1. Click Analyses AnalysesIcon.png or Reports  ReportsIcon.png on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar.
  2. Click on Define External Filter/Context  FilterIcon.png . This opens the Define External Filter/Context dialog.
  3. Select the Filter tab to enter a filter or the Context tab to enter a context.
  4. Click Add to add a new filter or context variable to the list. Select from the list of variables in the selected survey and click OK.
  5. Use Move Up and Move Down to change the order of the list.
  6. Select the variable that you wish to apply a mask to and enter the name of the mask variable in the Mask field (this must be in the format of variable@context).

Applying external filters and contexts

External filters or contexts allow you to filter the cases used in an analysis or report without changing the analysis or report definition. This is useful for testing the filters available in Snap XMP Online.

Apply a filter or context for an analysis by:

  1. Click Analyses AnalysesIcon.png on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar.
  2. Open the analysis in the Analysis Display dialog.
  3. Click on Apply External Filter/Context  FilterIcon.png . This opens the Apply External Filter/Context dialog. If this is disabled then select Allow additional filters on the Analysis Definition dialog.

Apply a filter or context for a report by:

  1. Click Reports  ReportsIcon.png on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar.
  2. Select the Report and click Execute/Check Report RunIcon.png on the Reports toolbar.
  3. Click the Filter/Context button. This opens the Apply External Filter/Context dialog.

In the Apply External Filter/Context dialog:

  1. Select the Filter or Context tab.
  2. Select the code(s) in the selected variable(s) in the list to apply a filter or context.
  3. If you have applied a mask to the filter, the filter codes displayed will depend on the mask settings.
ApplyFilterContext.PNG
  1. Click OK to apply the filters and contexts to the analysis or report.

The post Using external filters and contexts appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Analysing several variables in a single table https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/analysing-several-variables-in-single-table/ Fri, 28 May 2021 13:29:28 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=5801 This tutorial explains how to set up cross-tabs such as pivot tables and contingency tables. It assumes that you have a questionnaire with four questions, shown below, and shows you how to create a single table combining the data from the four questions. You can create cross-tabs and charts from category variables where one variable’s […]

The post Analysing several variables in a single table appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
This tutorial explains how to set up cross-tabs such as pivot tables and contingency tables. It assumes that you have a questionnaire with four questions, shown below, and shows you how to create a single table combining the data from the four questions.

4_quest.png

You can create cross-tabs and charts from category variables where one variable’s codes provide the columns and another variable’s codes provide the rows. It is possible to combine category variables in your analysis.

There are three ways of combining category variables in a cross-tab.

  • Combining variables (WITH) where all the codes are treated as if they belonged to a single variable, with one column per code
  • Combining all possible codes (PER) where every combination of codes available between the variables is given a column
  • Combining variables with identical codes logically so you can see if either or both codes have been selected. (This is not dealt with in this worksheet)
    • The codes can be logically ANDed together so you get a count if both codes have been selected
    • The codes can be logically ORed together so you get a count if either code has been selected

Step 1: Creating a cross-tab showing missing responses

This shows you how to create four simple cross-tabs showing people who like cheese and chocolate by age and gender and then shows how to combine them into a single table. It also discusses missing answers. If you add percent scores to your cross-tabs, you need to be clear if you are displaying a percentage of all those who took the survey or all those who answered the question. You can include or exclude respondents who have not answered a question.

The survey example had 100 respondents. None of the questions has been answered by all of them.

VariablesWithData.PNG
  1. Click AnalysisTblIcon.png to open the Analysis Tables dialog.
  2. Enter Q1 in the Analysis field and Q3 in the Break field to give a table of people who like cheese broken by gender.
  3. Check Break Percents, which shows each answer as a percentage of the column totals for the break variable (Q3).
AnalysisTbl1.PNG
  1. Click OK to create the table then click SaveIcon.png on the table toolbar to save the table.
  2. Create three more tables, Q2 broken by Q3; Q1 broken by Q4; Q2 broken by Q4.
AnalysisTables.PNG

Note that the Base used in the tables is different. This is because the analysis base consists of people who have answered both questions. This is because the analysis excludes no reply responses.

  1. Click VariablePropsIcon.png on the table toolbar for AN3 to open the Analysis Definition dialog for that table (liking cheese by age).
  2. Click on the Base/Labels tab. Change the No Reply value of Exclude to Show for the Analysis and Break values and click Apply.

BaseLabelsShow2.png
A new row and a new column are added to your analysis, showing the no replies, and the percentages are re-calculated as percentages of the new base. (You can change Exclude to Hide to re-calculate the percentages without including the row/column for the missing responses.)
MissingData.PNG

Step 2: Showing several variables in the same cross-tab

  1. Create a new table. Put Q1 WITH Q2 into the Analysis field. This puts the response counts to the cheese and chocolate questions in the table.
  2. Put Q3 PER Q4 in the Break field. This puts every possible combination of the age and gender questions in the table as a separate column.
  3. Check Base Percents. This uses the same base to calculate the percentages across the table.
PERWITHtableDefn.PNG
  1. Press OK to build the cross-tab. The rows show the responses to both the cheese and the chocolate question. The percentages of the base are calculated separately for each row. The columns show each possible combination of the age and gender questions. The percentages are calculated across all the columns.
PERWITHtableData.PNG
  1. Click SaveIcon.png to save the table.

If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

The post Analysing several variables in a single table appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Calculating the difference between times on different dates https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/calculating-difference-times-different-dates/ Fri, 28 May 2021 10:40:14 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=5783 Calculating the time duration between a start and end date can be used when analysing your survey responses. This could be used to show how long someone spent doing a particular task, had to wait to be served or how long a journey took. You can use the date and time information directly in analyses, […]

The post Calculating the difference between times on different dates appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Calculating the time duration between a start and end date can be used when analysing your survey responses. This could be used to show how long someone spent doing a particular task, had to wait to be served or how long a journey took.

You can use the date and time information directly in analyses, or use a further derived variable to break it down into ranges defined by time intervals, for example, short journey, medium journey, and long journey. By using these two methods, you can present the same data in quantitative and qualitative form, allowing for different types of analyses.

Snap XMP Desktop provides functions to calculate the differences between dates and times. The differences between dates are given in days, and the differences in times are given in seconds.

This tutorial shows how to create time and date questions that are used to calculate the duration of a journey.

Step 1: Creating the time and date questions

  1. Click Survey Overview SurveyOverviewIcon.png on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar to open the Survey Overview window.
  2. Open the questionnaire in the Questionnaire window.
  3. Click New QuestionNewSurveyIcon.png to create the start date question.
    • Set the style to Open Series First.
    • Enter the question text “Please enter the date and time that you left home”.
    • Enter the grid label text “Date of leaving”.
    • Set the response type to Date.
ResponseDate.PNG
  1. Press Tab to create a new row in the question.
    • Enter the grid label text “Time of leaving”.
    • Set the response type to Time.
  2. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to create the arrival date and time questions, changing the text as appropriate.
DateQuestions.PNG
  1. Click Save SaveIcon.png  .

Step 2: Creating derived variables for the dates and times

The date and time variables you have created use the question numbers as the name by default. The dates and times will be used in a formula and it is clearer to create derived variables using a name that explains the purpose of each date and time. This step describes how to create derived variables for the dates and times entered in the questionnaire.

  1. Click Variables VariablesIcon.png  on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Variables window.
  2. Click New VariableNewSurveyIcon.png  to create a new variable. This opens the Variable Details window.
    • In Name, enter the name of the variable, LeaveDate.
    • In Label, enter the description, Date of leaving.
    • In the Code list, enter the question number, in this case Q1a, in the values column of the row OK.
LeaveDateDV.PNG
  1. Click Save SaveIcon.png  to save the variable.
  2. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for
    • Q1b the Time of leaving with name LeaveTime and values Q1b
    • Q2a the Date of arrival with name ArriveDate and values Q2a
    • Q2b the Time of arrival with name ArriveTime and values Q2b

Note: You can change the question name but this is displayed in place of the question number. This could look confusing unless the question numbers are hidden.

Step 3: Creating the derived variable to calculate the difference

The next step creates a derived variable to calculate the difference between the time that the participant left home and the time they arrived at their destination.

  1. Click Variables VariablesIcon.png  on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Variables window.
  2. Click New VariableNewSurveyIcon.png  to create a new variable. This opens the Variable Details window.
    • In Name enter the name of the variable journeyTime
    • In Label, enter Difference between leaving and arrival time in hours
    • In Type, select Derived
    • In Response, select Quantity.
journeyTime.PNG
  1. In Code list, enter the formula in Values in the row OK.
    • The first part of the formula is working out the days spent on the journey and converting it to hours by multiplying it by 24.
      (ArriveDate-LeaveDate)*24
    • The second part of the formula is the difference between the two times. In Snap XMP Desktop, subtracting one time from another always produces a positive value. If the second time is before the first, it is assumed that one must be before midnight and one must be after midnight, and works out a time across midnight. This means that 10am – 9pm gives 13 hours rather than -11 hours. The time differences are in seconds. To convert the time difference to hours, you must divide it by 3600
      (ArriveTime-LeaveTime)/360
    • The last part of the formula adjusts for when the time of arriving is less than time of leaving, for example when a journey begins at 9pm on one day and finishes at 10 am on the next day. This gives the logical expression (ArriveTime < LeaveTime). The num function is used to convert the true or false answer to a numeric value, with 1 for true and 0 for false. Then multiply this result by 24, gives the right number of hours to take away, 0 if ArriveTime isn’t smaller than LeaveTime, and 24 if it is.(24 *num(ArriveTime < LeaveTime))
    • So the whole formula reads: ( ArriveDate – LeaveDate)*24 + (ArriveTime – LeaveTime)/3600 – 24*num(ArriveTime < LeaveTime)
  2. Click Save SaveIcon.png  to save the variable.

Step 4: Creating bands for time duration ranges used in analysis

  1. Click New VariableNewSurveyIcon.png  to create a new variable. This opens the Variable Details window.
    • In Name enter the name of the variable journeyType
    • In Label, enter Banded journey lengths
    • In Type, select Derived
    • In Response, select Single.
  2. In the Code list enter the values:
    • For code 1, enter the label Short journey, and the value as journeyTime<=2. All cases where the time taken is less than or equal to two hours are stored as Quick trips.
    • For code 2, enter the label Medium journey, and the value as journeyTime <=6 as the value. All cases where the time taken is 2 to 6 hours are stored as Medium trips.
    • For code 3, enter the label Long journey, and the value as journeyTime >6 as its values. All cases where the time taken is greater than six hours are stored as Long trips
journeyType.PNG

You can now perform analyses using either the journeyType or the journeyTime variable. For example:

Analysis.PNG

If there is a topic you would like a worksheet on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

The post Calculating the difference between times on different dates appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Gap Analysis: Compare results from satisfaction and importance questions https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/gap-analysis-compare-satisfaction-importance-questions/ Thu, 27 May 2021 14:46:18 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=5701 What is gap analysis? Gap analysis shows the difference between how important attributes or services are to your respondents and how satisfied they are with those attributes or services. It is a useful way of comparing the results from your satisfaction and importance questions and can be used as a tool for interpretation. By comparing […]

The post Gap Analysis: Compare results from satisfaction and importance questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
What is gap analysis?

Gap analysis shows the difference between how important attributes or services are to your respondents and how satisfied they are with those attributes or services. It is a useful way of comparing the results from your satisfaction and importance questions and can be used as a tool for interpretation.

By comparing importance and satisfaction scores in your chart you can use gap analysis to identify priorities for improvement. Gap analysis results indicate that if the satisfaction measure is less than the importance measure the business may not be meeting expectations.

Interpreting the gap analysis chart

In the example chart below a 5-point scale question was used in the Course Evaluation sample survey for both importance and satisfaction. The ratings are from 1 to 5, where 1= totally dissatisfied to 5= totally satisfied and 1= not at all important to 5 = extremely important.

The gap analysis chart

The chart plots how important various aspects of service are to customers, compared with how satisfied customers actually are with that service. The bars indicate the gap which is the mean score for the satisfaction rating subtracted from the mean score for the importance rating.

ws16-f1.gif

Interpretation

The interpretation of the results is as follows:

If the mean score of a service is positive (above zero) then respondents rated the service very important, but they are not satisfied with the service. In this instance, action is required.

If the mean score of a service is negative (below zero) then respondents rated this service relatively unimportant, but are very satisfied with the service. In this instance no action is required.

The closer the gap is to zero the better balance there is between importance and satisfaction.

Below is an interpretation of the findings in the example chart above.

HelpDesk Service – has a small positive gap therefore, respondents rated Helpdesk as a relatively important feature compared to their low satisfaction rating. This could be seen as an area for improvement.

User Guides – has a small negative gap therefore customers have rated this with higher satisfaction than importance. More time could therefore be spent improving other products.

E-Newsletter – has a large negative gap therefore respondents have given this service high satisfaction scores when answering this question, but they do not think this is an important feature. The company needs to concentrate on improving other services and products and leave the E-newsletter as low priority.

On time delivery – has a large positive gap therefore respondents think this service is very important, but their satisfaction of this service is low therefore it is a high priority for improvement.

Setting up the gap analysis

The following instructions show how to create a gap analysis chart. This gap analysis can be found in the Course Evaluation survey provided with Snap XMP Desktop. The Gap Analysis chart style is also provided with Snap XMP Desktop

To set up the gap analysis chart you will need the following:

  • create a number of derived variables
  • tailor the chart
  • create a chart style

Open the Course Evaluation survey and familiarise yourself with the importance (Q5a to Q5d) and satisfaction (Q6a to Q6d) questions.

If you open the Variables screen, you will notice that the derived variables to calculate the scores have already been created for you in V1.1, V1.2, V1.3, and V1.4. You can open these, by double clicking on them, to see how they have been set up. However, if you wish to create the derived variables to follow this worksheet we will name them V2.1, V2.2, V2.3 and V2.4 in the following steps.

Step 1: Create the derived variables

Create the derived variables. The derived variables will subtract satisfaction scores from importance scores for each attribute or service rated, for example Course content satisfaction scores will be subtracted from Course content importance scores. Each rated attribute will have to be set up as an individual derived variable.

  1. Open the survey and click VariablesIcon.png to display the Variables window.
  2. Click NewIcon.png to add a new variable.
  3. Setup the new Variable with the following details:
    • Name: V2.1
    • Label: Course content (The label is a full description of the variable that will appear in the Data window and on all analysis reports.)
    • Type: Derived (The variable will derive its data from other existing variables.)
    • Response: Quantity
  4. Click inside the Values area, in the same row as Valid. Type: Q6a – Q5a (Q6a is the satisfaction question and Q5a is the importance question.)
  5. Click SaveIcon.png to save the derived variable. You will see the saved derived variable (V2.1) in the variable window.
  6. Repeat the steps 2 to 5 above to create 3 more derived variables with the following details:
    • Name: V2.2
    • Label: Instructor
    • Type: Derived
    • Response: Quantity
    • Value: Q6b – Q5b
    • Name: V2.3
    • Label: User guides
    • Type: Derived
    • Response: Quantity
    • Value: Q6c – Q5c
    • Name: V2.4
    • Label: Value for money
    • Type: Derived
    • Response: Quantity
    • Value: Q6d – Q5d

Step 2: Create the gap analysis chart

The next stage is to create a chart to display the results of the derived variables.

  1. Click Analysis Chart AnalysisChartIcon.png  to display the Analysis Definition dialog for a chart.
  2. Select the chart style Gap Analysis from the drop down list.
  3. Type the names of the derived variables into the Analysis field, for example V2.1, V2.2, V2.3, V2.4.
  4. Type stats in the Break field (or select Statistics table from the Break drop-down list).
  5. Check the Transpose box.
ChartDefn.PNG
  1. Click the Descriptive Statistics tab to select which statistics will be used.
  2. Select all of the items in the Used column on the right-hand side.
  3. Click on the left arrow Arrow-left.png button.
  4. Select Mean from the list in the Available column and click on the right arrow Arrow-right.png button.
DescStats.PNG
  1. Click Apply to see the chart.
  2. To change the title shown on the chart, click the Notes/Title tab of the Analysis Definition dialog and type in a title in the Title box.
  3. Click Apply to see the chart.
  4. To add the text at the base of the chart (Needs Attention and Needs No Attention is this example), click into the Notes area of the Notes/Titles tab and type the text you require and click Apply.
GapAnalysis.PNG

Note: You may need to format the text in the Notes area so that it lines up appropriately under each side of the chart. Adding extra spaces will add a gap between the text.

  1. Click OK to close the Analysis Definition dialog.
  2. Click SaveIcon.png to save the chart.
  3. To save this chart style right click anywhere on the chart and select Save Style.
  4. Browse to the Styles folder within the Snap folder and give the new style a name (e.g. Gap Analysis New.csf).
GapAnalysisStyle.PNG

The new style is available to select in the Style dropdown list in the Analysis Definition dialog.

If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

The post Gap Analysis: Compare results from satisfaction and importance questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Using scores to analyse satisfaction questions https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-scores-analyse-satisfaction/ Wed, 26 May 2021 15:04:03 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=5642 The purpose of many surveys is to discover how satisfied customers are with the product or service they are using. Questions about customer satisfaction are often set up to ask participants to rate something on a rating scale. These ratings can be converted into mean values by analysing the responses using a score, providing useful […]

The post Using scores to analyse satisfaction questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
The purpose of many surveys is to discover how satisfied customers are with the product or service they are using. Questions about customer satisfaction are often set up to ask participants to rate something on a rating scale. These ratings can be converted into mean values by analysing the responses using a score, providing useful information that summarises the satisfaction value of all the responses.

Scores allow you to assign a value to each question code, and then calculate analyses using the score instead of the code. This is generally used for scoring satisfaction surveys, so that positive ratings are given positive values and negative ratings are given negative values. You can then summarise the whole satisfaction by calculating the mean of all the cases, showing whether participants are generally satisfied or not, the higher the mean is, the higher the satisfaction score.

When the satisfaction question includes a “Don’t know”, “OK”, “Prefer not to say” or similar neutral answer then these can be treated in different ways in the analysis. A neutral response can be included in the analysis and assigned a value of zero or it can be discarded and not included in the analysis. This produces different calculations for the mean values.

For example, if you have five participants to a survey, who have given the following satisfaction values (from a range of -2 to +2).

Participant 1: -1

Participant 2: +1

Participant 3: +2

Participant 4: +2

Participant 5: Don’t know

To calculate the mean, you sum the values and divide by the number of cases.

  • Calculating the mean scoring “Don’t know” as 0 gives the mean as (-1 + 1 + 2 + 2 + 0) / 5 = 4/5 or 0.8
  • Calculating the mean discarding the “Don’t Know” response gives the mean as (-1 + 1 + 2 + 2)/4 = 4/4 or 1.

It is important to decide how to treat neutral values when judging the satisfaction of your participants. By using a score you can choose to score them as a neutral value, or discard them from the calculation.

This tutorial shows how to create a score to analyse the satisfaction values in the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey that is supplied with Snap XMP Desktop. It shows both the effect of scoring neutral responses as zero, and the effect of discarding the neutral responses.

Step 1: Creating the score weight

The Crocodile Rock Cafe survey that is supplied with Snap XMP Desktop contains a rating question that asks participants to rate how satisfied they are with aspects of the service.

The questions to be scored are Q6a to Q6e.

  1. Click Survey Overview SurveyOverviewIcon.png on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar to open the Survey Overview window then click Offline Surveys.
  2. Open the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey and move to Q6 How do you rate the following?
Rating Grid question
  1. Click Variables VariablesIcon.png  on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Variables window.
  2. Select Q6a then click Properties VariablePropsIcon.png . This opens the Variable Details window where you can view the Code list showing the label assigned to each code.
Code List rating values
  1. Click Weights WeightsIcon.png on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Weights window.
  2. Click New Weight NewSurveyIcon.png  to create a new weight. A weight is a way of matching values to codes for analysis.
  3. Enter the following values for the new weight:
    • Name: scoreSat
    • Label: Balanced score -2 to +2
  4. In Code List, enter the values for each code. NR is used when the response is OK or code 3 in the example. This discards any responses that have a value of NR and these are not included in the analysis..
Weight Details dialog
  1. Click Save SaveIcon.png  to save the weight.

Step 2: Using the score in an analysis

  1. Click Analysis Table AnalysisTblIcon.png  on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Analysis Definition window to create a new table.
  2. In Analysis, enter the value Q6a ~Q6e (this includes all questions from Q6a to Q6e).
Analysis definition of a table
  1. In Calculate, check that Counts and Percents is selected.
  2. In Name, enter Satisfaction in order to identify it easily.
  3. Select the Summary Statistics tab. In Score, enter the name of your score, scoreSat. This score is used to create a summary of the analysis, scoring the codes with the specified values.
Summary Statistics with Mean added
  1. Click on Mean on the left side in the Available column and move it to the Used column to display the mean.
  2. Click OK to display the table.
  3. There is a column displaying the mean scored values.
Analysis table showing counts and mean scored values

The top line labelled Base shows the total number of all participants for all the questions. The mean satisfaction of everyone with all the services is 0.10.The other rows show the average satisfaction for each service. You can see that people are generally positive about the Cleanliness and the Choice of food and unhappy about the Parking and Speed of service.

Step 3: Showing the effect of including and excluding neutral responses

You can examine the effects of including the neutral responses as zeroes by changing the score.

  1. Click Weights WeightsIcon.png to open the Weights window.
  2. Double-click the weight scoreSat to open the Weight Details window.
  3. Edit the neutral score in the list, changing it from NR to 0.
Weight Details dialog
  1. Select the Analysis display window for the table. The Rebuild button  is now enabled, as the score has changed since the analysis was performed.
  2. Click Rebuild  to recalculate the analysis and show the updated mean values.
Analysis table showing counts and mean scored values with the new weight
  1. Click SaveIcon.png to save the changes.

If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

The post Using scores to analyse satisfaction questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Use Chart styles to add branding to your charts https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/chart-styles-add-branding/ Wed, 26 May 2021 14:36:32 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=5607 Charts play an important part in analysis and reporting, helping to make the response data easier to understand. You can create chart styles that reflect your organization’s branding, bringing a consistent look to your analysis and reports. In Snap XMP Desktop, the style of a chart determines the background, the colors used on the chart, […]

The post Use Chart styles to add branding to your charts appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Charts play an important part in analysis and reporting, helping to make the response data easier to understand. You can create chart styles that reflect your organization’s branding, bringing a consistent look to your analysis and reports. In Snap XMP Desktop, the style of a chart determines the background, the colors used on the chart, and the type of chart. The chart styles can be loaded, edited and saved for use in other reports, analyses and surveys.

Snap XMP provides a large number of pre-defined chart styles that can be used as supplied or as the basis for a new style. The pre-defined styles can be edited using the Chart Designer or new styles can be created using the Chart Wizard.

The chart style is made up of three components:

  • Layout which defines the type of chart and how it is displayed
  • Background which defines the color or images used behind the chart
  • Series colors which defines the colors used on the chart

This tutorial shows how to load a pre-defined chart style, use the Chart Designer to edit the chart style and then save the new style. When you save the style you can choose which components are saved in the chart style. Often the chart style is saved with the background and series colors only, so that the style applies these to a chart without changing the layout.

Step 1: Loading an existing chart style

A chart style must be selected when creating a new analysis chart. This can be edited later by loading another existing style or using the Chart Designer. The examples in this worksheet are based on the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey provided with Snap XMP Desktop.

  1. In Snap XMP Desktop, click Survey Overview SurveyOverviewIcon.png to view the list of surveys.
  2. Click Online Surveys OnlineSurveysIcon.png or Offline Surveys OfflineSurveysIcon.png and open the survey in the Questionnaire window.
  3. Click Analysis Chart AnalysisChartIcon.png  on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Analysis Definition window where you can create a new chart.
  4. Click the Select button. This opens the Select Analysis Style dialog. A thumbnail image is shown for each pre-defined chart style, helping you choose the style you want. Click on the image to select the chart style. The style selected in the tutorial is Pie Percent Labelled Outside. Click OK to select the style.
Select Analysis Style dialog
  1. This example creates a simple chart based on a Single Choice question. The Crocodile Rock Cafe contains a question Q11 that records the participant’s age group. Enter Q11 in the Analysis field. When creating a color style file for your charts, you should work from the most complex chart that you use, in order to ensure that you have enough colors. This question has six choices which each require a different color or color/pattern combination.
Chart Analysis Definition
  1. Click OK. This creates the analysis and displays the chart.
Analysis Pie Chart by Age
  1. To load another style, right-click the chart and select Load Style from the context menu. This opens the Select Analysis Style dialog again.
  2. The selection shows the chart style in use. Click on another image to select the new chart style then click OK.

Step 2: Setting a new chart background

The Chart Designer lets you customize each aspect of the chart. This step shows how to replace the background with a picture. The background can also be set to another color.

  1. Double-click the background of the chart to open the Chart Designer.
  2. Select Chart in the left hand column, if it is not already selected.
  3. Select the Picture tab and click the Browse button to choose your picture. Navigate to the folder containing the background image then select the image and click Open.
  4. In Picture Size, select the best fit for your image. Stretch to Fit will stretch the image to the background of the chart.
Chart Designer background picture
  1. Click Apply. The Chart Designer dialog remains open and the new background appears on your chart.

Step 3: Setting the series colors

  1. If the Chart designer dialog is not open, double-click the series item that you wish to change, such as a bar or pie slice. This example starts with the Under 18 series. Select Series | Under 18 | Datapoint defaults | Datapoint1 in the left hand pane.
  2. Select the Fill tab and change the Fill Color to the required color and click Apply to update the chart.
Chart Designer set data point colours
  1. Select Series | 18 – 24 | Datapoint | Datapoint1 in the left hand pane.
  2. Select two colors to mix in the Fill color and Pattern color. In this example, we used blue and black respectively. In Pattern, select a textured pattern. The pattern selection displays the colors you have already chosen.
Chart Designer set data point pattern
  1. Repeat the process for each data point in the series. Click Apply if you wish to make further changes, otherwise click OK to close the dialog.
Pie Chart style

Step 4: Saving the new chart style

  1. Right click your modified chart and select Save Style from the context menu. This opens the Save Style dialog.
  2. Enter a name for the new chart style.
  3. Clear the Layout checkbox but leave the Background and Series checkboxes selected. This saves the chart colors and background only.
  4. Browse to the location that you wish to save the chart style.
  5. Click Save to save the chart style.

If you leave the Layout checkbox selected the style is saved with all the chart information and you will overwrite the chart type when you load the style.

Step 5: Testing the new chart style

  1. Click Analysis Chart AnalysisChartIcon.png from the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar.
  2. In the Analysis Definition dialog, change the style to bar percent, type Q2 in the Analysis box and click OK. This displays a new chart showing a four series element bar chart.
Bar Percent Chart
  1. Right click the chart and select Load Style from the context menu.
  2. Select the style created in Step 2.
  3. Clear the Layout box and click OK. The chart will be updated with the new colors and background.
Bar Percent Chart with new style

If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

The post Use Chart styles to add branding to your charts appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Analysing two surveys together https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/analysing-two-surveys-together/ Wed, 26 May 2021 13:30:04 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=5558 This tutorial covers merging the data from two surveys which are slightly different. One survey has more questions than the other. It assumes that both surveys contain data that will be merged into one survey for analysis. You may need to merge surveys in these situations: Surveys run on an annual basis, to analyse trends […]

The post Analysing two surveys together appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
This tutorial covers merging the data from two surveys which are slightly different. One survey has more questions than the other. It assumes that both surveys contain data that will be merged into one survey for analysis.

You may need to merge surveys in these situations:

  • Surveys run on an annual basis, to analyse trends through two or more years. (The questionnaire might change slightly from year to year).
  • Surveys on one subject but with different focal points (e.g. surveys of users and non-users of a service).
  • Surveys conducted for different locations (e.g. a survey of similar tourist attractions which varies between sites).
  • Surveys conducted using two different interviewing methods (e.g. kiosk and web).

Step 1: Create a master survey to contain the data for both surveys

It is preferable to make a separate master survey to combine your surveys so that both the original surveys remain intact. The master survey will need to contain all the variables and codes in both surveys so that the analysis can be performed correctly.

  1. In the Survey Overview window, select the survey with the highest number of variables.
  2. Select Clone CloneIcon.png to create a clone of this survey.
  3. In the Clone Survey dialog, select whether the new survey is Online or Offline then select Also clone the raw data to include the existing data. Click OK.
  4. In the New Survey dialog, enter a name for the new survey that indicates it is the combined survey.
  5. Click OK to open the new survey. Add in any variables or additional codes that are in the other survey but are not in this survey.

Step 2: Setup a database link to import the data

  1. Select Database links DBLinksIcon.png from the Snap toolbar. This opens the Database Links dialog.
Database Links dialog
  1. Click New to open the Database Linkage Wizard which guides you through the process of creating a new database link.
  2. In the Linkage Type section, select Import from Snap Survey and then click Next
  3. A list of all the surveys in the default directory is shown. Select the survey you want to import from and then click Next. (If the survey you require is not shown use the Browse button to find the appropriate directory.)
  4. You are asked how you wish to merge the survey. Select Append all cases. This adds all the imported cases as new cases at the end of the survey. Click Next.

Step 3: Mapping the variables

The next window is where you will match the variables from the survey you are importing the data from to the survey you cloned as the master.

The variables in the survey you are importing from are displayed in the left column and the current survey variables are displayed in the right column.

  1. The wizard attempts to map any variables from both surveys if the variables are identically named.
Mapping the survey questions
  1. Click each of the variables in the right-hand column. If the variable is a coded question the codes will be displayed in a section below the mapped variables. Check that the codes on the left match the codes on the right.
Mapping the question variables
  1. If there are any blank codes in the right hand column, see the code label where Ice cream should be in the image above, click into the blank area and select the correct code label.
Map the question variables
  1. Click Next to see a summary of the mapped variables. You can also give the Database Link an appropriate name in this window.
Data link summary
  1. Click Finish to return to the Database Links dialog where you will see the link you have just created.

Step 4: Running the database link

When a Database link has been set up it can be run at any time.

  1. Select Database links DBLinksIcon.png to open the Database Links dialog, if required.
Database Links dialog showing the survey import
  1. Select your new Survey Import link and click Run.
  2. A Report dialog is displayed. You can see the number of cases imported in Processed Cases of the Report dialog. Click OK to close the report.
Report showing the processed cases

If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

The post Analysing two surveys together appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Calculating the time in minutes between two time variables https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/calculating-time-minutes-time-variables/ Wed, 26 May 2021 09:05:33 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=5501 With Snap XMP Desktop you can use times to analyze your survey response data. This tutorial explains how to set up the start and end time questions then create variables that calculate the time difference and show how to categorise this information as time bands. Step 1: Creating the time questions Step 2: Creating a […]

The post Calculating the time in minutes between two time variables appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
With Snap XMP Desktop you can use times to analyze your survey response data. This tutorial explains how to set up the start and end time questions then create variables that calculate the time difference and show how to categorise this information as time bands.

Step 1: Creating the time questions

  1. In the Questionnaire window, create two open ended questions. These are used to enter the start time and end time.
  2. In the Topics toolbar select Response and set the question response type to Time.

Step 2: Creating a variable to calculate the time difference

A Variable needs to be set up in order to calculate the interval between the Start and End time. This variable needs to be set up as a Derived, Quantity-Response Variable. That is, a new variable deriving (taking information) from other variables.

  1. In the Variables window, click New Variable NewIcon.png to create a new Variable.
  2. Ensure the following settings are applied:
    • Name: V1
    • Label: Time difference
    • Type: Derived
    • Response: Quantity
  3. In the Values column in the same row as Not Ask type: Q1 missing or Q2 missing. This will ensure that the time difference is not calculated if Q1 or Q2 are empty.
  4. Type the formula below in the values column but this time in the same row as Valid:

((Q2\1)*60 + (Q2-Q2\1)*100) – ((Q1\1)*60 + (Q1-Q1\1)*100) + (1440 * num(Q2<Q1))

The formula is divided into 3 sections. The first section converts the answers to Q2 into minutes, the second section converts Q1 into minutes. The last section is only needed if times could span midnight – it adds 1440 minutes if Q2 has an answer after midnight and Q1 has an answer before midnight.

Note: Time is analysed in minutes. There are 60 minutes in each hour and 1440 minutes in 24 hours: 60 (minutes in an hour) X 24 (hours in a day)

Step 3: Creating a derived variable to display time categories

Another variable needs to be set in order to display the results in time categories.

  1. In the Variables window, click New Variable NewIcon.png to create a new Variable.
  2. Enter the following settings:
    • Name: V2
    • Label: Time categories
    • Text: Duration between start and end times
    • Type: Derived
    • Response: Single
  3. Add the following code information in the Code list to create the categories and values:
LabelValue
0 – 15 minutesV1<=15
16 – 30 minutesV1<=30
31 minutes – 1 hourV1<=60
1 – 2 hoursV1<=120
3 hours and aboveV1 ok
  1. Click on the Count Responses button to calculate the responses. The Counts column in the variable will display the results.
  2. Click on the Save button. You can use the variable to create a table or chart of the results by entering the derived variable name in the analysis box of your table or chart to generate the results.

Using other built-in time functions

Other built-in functions that may be used for extracting information from times are shown in the table.

hourGives the hour in which the time occurs. This uses the 24 hour clock.
minuteGives the minute’s part of the time.
secondGives the second’s part of the time.

You can build a similar derived variable to categorize replies according to the day of week, regardless of the month or the year, by using the weekday function in a similar way to the way the month function was used in the previous example.

If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

The post Calculating the time in minutes between two time variables appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Using patterns to categorise postcodes by postal area https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-patterns-to-categorise-postcodes-by-postal-area/ Wed, 12 May 2021 15:15:59 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=4924 This tutorial shows how to apply a pattern at the analysis stage. This particular example uses a derived variable in conjunction with a pattern to extract the postal area from a full UK postcode. The postcode uk pattern is supplied with Snap XMP Desktop and may be used to validate replies to literal response questions […]

The post Using patterns to categorise postcodes by postal area appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
This tutorial shows how to apply a pattern at the analysis stage. This particular example uses a derived variable in conjunction with a pattern to extract the postal area from a full UK postcode. The postcode uk pattern is supplied with Snap XMP Desktop and may be used to validate replies to literal response questions representing UK postcodes.

The UK postcode standard is made up of four components; Area, District, Sector and Unit. Each component is then broken down to accept a particular literal response as detailed in the table below:

Component

Valid Literal Response

Example

Area

{letter}

{letter}{letter}

B12 4LT

BS35 3UW

District

{digit}

{digit}{digit}

{digit}{letter}

BA3 4HT

BS35 3UW

SW1Y 4RF

Sector

{digit

BS35 3UW

Unit

{letter}{letter}

BS35 3UW

Step 1: Creating a new pattern to extract the postcode area

The first step is to create a new pattern that will extract postcode area from a full UK postcode.

  1. Select View | Patterns from the Snap XMP Desktop menu to open the Patterns dialog.
  2. Find and select the postcode uk pattern then click Clone CloneIcon.png to make a copy of it.
Patterns dialog showing the patterns that are supplied with Snap Desktop
  1. Name the new pattern UK Postal Area.
  2. In the Result box, clear the details then right click and select Component | area. {area} is shown in the Result box.
Pattern Properties dialog
  1. To test the pattern, click Test and type a postcode in the text box. If set up correctly, the result box should display just the area component of the postcode.
  2. Click OK to exit the pattern test and then click OK again to save your pattern.

Step 2: Creating a derived variable to use the new pattern

The second step is to create a derived variable that can be used in conjunction with the UK Postal Area pattern that you have created.

  1. Select Variables VariablesIcon.png  from the Snap toolbar.
  2. Click New variable NewIcon.png to create a new variable.
  3. Enter the following values:
    1. Name PostalArea (or another meaningful name)
    2. Label Area
    3. Type Derived
    4. Response Single
  4. In the code list you can identify the postcode areas that you want to use in the analysis stage. In the example, the analysis looks at the postal areas for Birmingham (B), Bristol (BS) and Reading (RG).
  5. Click Count Responses CountResponsesIcon.PNG  which displays the results in the Counts column.
Derived variable categorizing postcodes by postal area
  1. Click Save SaveIcon.png  to save the derived variable. You can then use this new variable to create tables and charts.

If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

The post Using patterns to categorise postcodes by postal area appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Calculating the number of days between two dates https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/calculating-the-number-of-days-between-two-dates/ Mon, 10 May 2021 13:28:02 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=4875 This worksheet shows how to calculate the number of days between two dates. The example used is for a questionnaire asking about a participant’s vacation where the period of time the participant spent on vacation is calculated. Additionally, there is an analysis requirement to determine the average length of vacation by age of respondent and […]

The post Calculating the number of days between two dates appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
This worksheet shows how to calculate the number of days between two dates. The example used is for a questionnaire asking about a participant’s vacation where the period of time the participant spent on vacation is calculated. Additionally, there is an analysis requirement to determine the average length of vacation by age of respondent and to group the vacations into length of vacation bands.

The questionnaire needs to ask for the date when the participants went on vacation, the date they returned and their age in order to calculate the analysis requirements.

Create a variable for the number of days away

  1. Enter two open ended, date response questions, one for the vacation departure date and one for the vacation return date. Then create Q3 using a multiple-choice, single response question to capture respondent’s ages. The questions are shown here.
Questions about the vacation
  1. From the Variables window VariablesIcon.png click New Variable NewIcon.png to create the variable that will contain the formula to work out the number of days between the two dates
Derived variable for the days away on vacation
  1. Enter the following information:
    • Name: DaysAway
    • Label: Days Away on Vacation
    • Type: Derived
    • Response: Quantity
    • Text: Days Away on Vacation
  2. In the Values column, in the same row as Valid, type Q2-Q1. This will calculate the number of days between holiday departure date and holiday return date.

Create a table showing the average length of stay by age

  1. Click on Analysis Table AnalysisTblIcon.png . This opens the Analysis Definition dialog.
Table analysis showing length of stay by age
  1. In Analysis, enter Q3 What is your age?
  2. In the Calculate dropdown select Means and Significances and in the box to the right enter the derived variable, DaysAway.
  3. Click OK to show results.
Tables showing the results for length of stay by age

Grouping the number of days on vacation into bands

This will categorise the data so that a table or chart can be produced.

  1. From the Variables window VariablesIcon.png  click New Variable NewIcon.png  to create the variable to show the amount of days from the departure date to the return date.
  2. Enter the following information:
    • Name: Length
    • Label: Length of Vacation
    • Type: Derived
    • Response: Single
  3. In the Code list, click the Label field for Code 1 and enter 1 to 3 days. Press Tab on the keyboard, to move to the Values column. In this column Snap needs to know what numbers are to be displayed in this answer, enter 1 to 3. Follow the same procedure to create categories for 4 to 6 days, 7 to 10 days and over 10 days.
Derived variable categorizing the length of stay into bands
  1. Click on Toggle Definitions  ToggleDefnIcon.PNG  and change Calculation to DaysAway.
  2. Click Save SaveIcon.png  to save.
  3. Click on Analysis Table AnalysisTblIcon.png to show the Analysis Definition window.
  4. In Analysis enter Length. Click OK to show results.
Table showing the banded results

If there is a topic you would like a worksheet on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

The post Calculating the number of days between two dates appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Calculating marks in a quiz, test or assessment https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/calculating-marks-in-a-quiz/ Mon, 10 May 2021 12:11:58 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=4842 Using a weight matrix gives the ability to differentiate between correct or incorrect responses to a question. In this example, four multiple choice questions are used, each with four possible answers. Using weighted variables we identify the response for a correct answer as those weighted as one and for an incorrect answer as those weighted […]

The post Calculating marks in a quiz, test or assessment appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Using a weight matrix gives the ability to differentiate between correct or incorrect responses to a question.

In this example, four multiple choice questions are used, each with four possible answers. Using weighted variables we identify the response for a correct answer as those weighted as one and for an incorrect answer as those weighted as zero. Using these numbers the total number of correct responses can be calculated.

Insert the questions

  1. Create a multiple choice question with a single response.
Create the quiz or test questions
  1. Select Q1 and click Clone CloneIcon.png to set up three more multiple choice questions called Q2, Q3 and Q4, each with four possible answers (codes) and with a single response.

Create the weights

  1. Click on the weights WeightsIcon.png  button to open the Weights window.
  2. Select New Weight NewIcon.png to create a new weight. In Name enter ScoreA. This will be used for each question where A is the correct answer.
    In Code List, enter a Value of 1 for Code 1 and 0 for Code 2, 3 and 4.
Create the weight indicating a correct answer
  1. Click Save SaveIcon.png  to save the new weight and close the Weight Details window.
  2. Repeat steps 2 to 3 to create three more similar weights for ScoreB, ScoreC and ScoreD where the value of 1 is in codes 2, 3 and 4 respectively.
Weights for scoring the quiz questions

Create the derived variable

  1. Open the Variables window  VariablesIcon.png and click  NewIcon.png  to add a new variable which will be used to total the number of correct responses.
  2. In Name enter Total.
  3. Set the Type to Derived and the Response to Quantity.
  4. In the Code list set the value for OK as ScoreA(Q1)+ScoreB(Q2)+ScoreC(Q3)+ScoreD(Q4)

The OK value is used as the total score. This depends on the correct answers for each question. In the example, Q1 has the answer A (the first answer), Q2 has the answer B (the second answer), Q3 has the answer C (the third answer) and Q4 has the answer D (the fourth answer).

Derived variable to calculate the total score

Display the result

You can display the total score to the participant.

  1. Place the cursor in the text area of a question, title or instruction where you want the total to appear.
  2. Right click on the cursor and click Insert and then click Variable Field.
  3. In the New variable field window select Total in the Variable list and click OK.
New variable field used to display the total

The variable field appears like this in your questionnaire.

The total score shown in design mode

When your survey is completed it will appear like this in the browser.

The total score shown in a live interview

If there is a topic you would like a worksheet on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

The post Calculating marks in a quiz, test or assessment appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Analysing dates https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/analysing-dates/ Mon, 10 May 2021 10:43:22 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=4834 Snap XMP Desktop includes a number of operations and functions specifically designed to help analyse dates. When a participant responds to a date response question they can enter a free format date. Examples of the date can include July 1st, 2020 or 1 Jul 20. The inbuilt operations enable date responses to be categorized by […]

The post Analysing dates appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Snap XMP Desktop includes a number of operations and functions specifically designed to help analyse dates.

When a participant responds to a date response question they can enter a free format date. Examples of the date can include July 1st, 2020 or 1 Jul 20. The inbuilt operations enable date responses to be categorized by month, by day of the week or by custom specified ranges.

The following steps show how to create a derived variable which categorizes the response, to a date question, into quarters of the year.

Step 1: Create the derived variable

  1. Open the Variables window  VariablesIcon.png and click  NewIcon.png  to add a new variable.
  2. In Name enter Quarter as the derived variable name.
  3. Set the Type to Derived and Response to Single.
    CreateDerivedVariable.PNG

Step 2: Enter the date ranges

  1. In the Code list grid, enter Quarter 1 as the Label for the first quarter then in Values enter the date range Q1 >= 1 Jan 20 and Q1 < 1 Apr 20. Any appropriate date format can be used to specify the fixed dates.
  2. Repeat this for the other quarter date ranges.
Code list defining the annual quarters
  1. Alternatively, for this example we can use the MONTH function. This gives a number representing the month of the year (1=January, 12=December). Using that, we can set up the codes of the categorizing variable as follows:
Code list defining the annual quarters

Using the MONTH function here produces a derived variable that works for every year. This method also takes advantage of the fact that for a derived single variable, only the upper bound for each code value needs to be specified so that any respondent in the previous code will already have been captured by that code.

Step 3: Using other built-in date functions

Other built-in functions that may be used for extracting information from dates are shown in the table.

weekday

the day of the week 1=Monday, 7=Sunday

weekday name

a literal representing the name of the weekday, for example, “Wednesday”

day

the day of the month 1 to 28, 29, 30 or 31 as appropriate

month

the month of the year 1=January, 12=December

month name

the name of the month, for example, “July”

year

the four-digit year, for example, 2020

You can build a similar derived variable to categorize replies according to the day of week, regardless of the month or the year, by using the weekday function in a similar way to the way the month function was used in the previous example.

If there is a topic you would like a worksheet on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

The post Analysing dates appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Analysing postcodes and zip codes https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/analysing-postcodes-and-zip-codes/ Mon, 10 May 2021 10:30:13 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=4826 The best way of analysing postcodes and zip codes is to use a derived variable. When analysing postcodes or zip codes in Snap XMP Desktop consider: Create the postcode or zip code derived variable To create the derived single variable, please follow the steps below to categorize the postcodes and zip codes by area. You can […]

The post Analysing postcodes and zip codes appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
The best way of analysing postcodes and zip codes is to use a derived variable.

When analysing postcodes or zip codes in Snap XMP Desktop consider:

  • The data is treated as case sensitive, which lets you enter the postcode or zip code question in a variety of ways. As a result, you need to account for every possible variation in order to capture all the data.
  • If the postcodes or zip codes include letter combinations that are also in another postcode or zip code, for example, S7 and BS7, put the more complex codes before the simpler ones, that is, insert BS7 before S7.
  • If the postcodes or zip codes include number combinations that are in another postcode or zip code, for example, SW1 and SW11, put a space after the shorter code.
  • Additionally, it is always best to enter each postcode or zip code in inverted commas, for example, “BS8”.

Create the postcode or zip code derived variable

To create the derived single variable, please follow the steps below to categorize the postcodes and zip codes by area.

  1. Open the Variables window  VariablesIcon.png and click  NewIcon.png  to add a new variable.
  2. Select Derived from the Type drop-down and Single from the Response drop-down. A single response is used as each respondent only falls into one of the new codes.
  3. When created, a derived variable is automatically named, starting from V1. You can change this name to one that describes the variable. Enter the new derived variable name in Name.
Derived variable used to analyze postcodes and zip codes
  1. In the Code list grid, click in the Label column next to code 1 and type in the first postcode or zip code area you want to categorise, in this case BS4.
  2. In the Values column for code 1 type in the values to search the data. For example, when searching for any cases where BS4 has been entered the values would be Q11=”BS4″ or Q11=”bs4″ or Q11=”Bs4″ or Q11=”bS4”, with each variation of BS4 being accounted for. Note: Using the word OR, or a comma (,) in the values has the same effect.
  3. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each postcode or zip code you want to search for.
  4. Click Count Responses CountResponsesIcon.PNG  to see the count for each postcode or zip code area in the derived variable.
  5. Click Save SaveIcon.png to save the derived variable.

You can now use the derived variable, in the same way as any other variable, in your analysis or in a filter.

If there is a topic you would like a worksheet on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com.

The post Analysing postcodes and zip codes appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Introduction to group variables https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/introduction-to-group-variables/ Wed, 21 Oct 2020 14:39:15 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=3027 You can link similar questions into a group. This means that you can then analyse the group of questions as a whole. For example, if you have a series of questions on aspects of personality, you could group all the questions associated with team working together, and use them as a single axis for tables […]

The post Introduction to group variables appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
You can link similar questions into a group. This means that you can then analyse the group of questions as a whole. For example, if you have a series of questions on aspects of personality, you could group all the questions associated with team working together, and use them as a single axis for tables or charts.

Group variables may be used to create summary analyses of a number of variables which share a common code list such as might be found in a question grid.

For example, you could create a horizontal stacked bar chart to show the results of respondents’ opinion of five aspects of service offered.

You can use Group variables to include a summary of all five variables in the same chart. All responses will be added together when calculating means, so variables with a larger number of responses will have a larger percentage.

  1. Click AnalysisVariablesIcon.png on the main toolbar to open the Analysis variables window.
  2. Click NewSurveyIcon.png and select New Group Variable from the drop-down list. The Group Variable Details dialog opens.
Error shown for a group variable
  1. Give the group variable:
    • Name: GV2
    • Label: Overall opinion
    • Source: list the variables to group e.g. Q6a~Q6e, or Q1, Q5, Q8
Create a group variable
  1. Click SaveIcon.png to save the variable.
  2. It appears in the list of analysis variables.
Analysis variables list
  1. Click VariablesIcon.png to display the Variables window.
  2. Click NewSurveyIcon.png to add a new variable. This is a blank variable that you can use to insert a blank line in your chart.
  3. Specify the Variable Details:
    • Name: Blank
    • Label: Calculated difference
    • Type: Derived (the variable will derive its data from other existing variables).
    • Response: Single (there will be one response for each case).
Creating a blank derived variable
  1. Click SaveIcon.png to save the new variable.
  2. Click AnalysisChartIcon.png to build a chart.
  3. Specify the Definition details:
    • Style: Horizontal Stacked Bar Percent Transposed
    • Analysis: GV2, Blank, Q6a, Q6b, Q6c, Q6d, Q6e
    • Transpose: Checked
    • Show Options: Check Analysis Percents
Analysis Definition for a group variable
  1. Select the Cells tab and set the decimal places for the Percentages to 2. This reduces rounding errors when calculating the percentages.
Setting the decimal places and accuracy in the analysis
  1. Click OK to display the chart.
Chart for a group variable

The post Introduction to group variables appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Introduction to Auto Category variables https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/introduction-to-auto-category-variables/ Wed, 21 Oct 2020 14:31:11 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=3011 An Auto Category variable generates a list of the most frequently used words or code labels from a question’s response data. Auto Category variables can be used to analyse open-ended questions or multiple response closed questions. They are often used with word clouds. Auto category variables can help you to Auto category variable and word […]

The post Introduction to Auto Category variables appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
An Auto Category variable generates a list of the most frequently used words or code labels from a question’s response data. Auto Category variables can be used to analyse open-ended questions or multiple response closed questions. They are often used with word clouds.

Auto category variables can help you to

  • Limit the number of codes to those with the highest number of responses. The codes may change when the data changes.
  • Create an “Other” category to group the codes that are outside the limit.
  • You can choose to remove words that add nothing to the analysis, by adding them to the list of stop words.
  • Order the codes by the number of counts
  • Set options on how to categorise words in the response

Auto category variable and word clouds

Creating an Analysis Cloud automatically adds an Auto Category variable.

  1. In the Survey Overview, open the survey required.
  2. Click Analysis Cloud  AnalysisCloudIcon.png  on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Analysis Definition window to create a word cloud.
  3. In Analysis, enter the question name. This question usually contains comments given by the respondent.
  1. Click Save SaveIcon.png to save the Analysis Cloud.
  2. Click Analysis VariablesAnalysisVariablesIcon.png on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar to show the list of analysis variables. The Auto Category variable, named AV.Q7, was automatically created when you saved the Analysis Cloud. This is shown in the list of analysis variables.

Editing the Auto Category variable

You are able to edit most of the settings in the Auto Category variable.

  1. Click Analysis VariablesAnalysisVariablesIcon.png on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Analysis Variables window. All the Auto Category variables have the Method “AutoCategory Variable” in the list.
  2. Double-click the Auto Category variable that you wish to edit. This opens the Auto Category Variable Details window.
  1. If any analysis depends on the variable then the name is read-only, otherwise you can edit the name.
  2. Changing the Source question may change the name, if any analysis uses the original Auto Category variable. This creates a new Auto Category variable when you save.
  3. Limit codes sets the maximum number of codes for use, for example, a word cloud analysis will show the top 25 most commonly used words. Categories that are outside the limit codes setting appear with the category number in brackets.
  4. With Other groups the codes outside the Limit codes setting. For example, if Limit codes is 25, only the top 25 codes are shown and the remaining codes are grouped in the category ‘Other’.
  5. Select Order by counts to order the codes by the number of times they occur in the responses. You can also sort the categories by clicking on the column header.
  6. Click SaveIcon.png to save your changes.

Include or exclude categories

  1. Open the Auto Category Variable Details window.
  2. Select Change codes ch_codes to display the Include column.
Including codes in the Auto Category variable details
  1. Clear Include to exclude the code or select it to include the code in the analysis, such as a word cloud. The excluded code moves to the bottom of the list.
  2. Click Save SaveIcon.png to save the changes.

Stopping unwanted words

When a respondent enters a comment, the response often includes common words, such as ‘the’ or ‘and’. The default stop words list includes many of these words, which means they will not appear in the Auto Category variable or the word cloud. You can add your own stop words and you can also choose to include any of the default stop words.

  1. Click the Stop words button to open the Stop Words dialog where you can add stop words or allow a default stop word.
Stop Words dialog
  1. In Stop words, type any words you wish to exclude. Use spaces to separate the words.
  2. In Allow stopped words, type any words from the Default stop words that you wish to include. Use spaces to separate the words. This is only relevant when using the Default stops words list.
  3. Clear the Use checkbox if you do not want to use the Default stop words list. The default is to use the Default stop words list.
  4. Click OK to save your changes.

Options

You can choose different ways of categorizing the multiple response or open-ended questions by selecting different options.

  1. Click the Options button. This opens the Auto category Options dialog.
Auto category options
  1. In the Multi Choice section, select Separate Codes to treat each code in the response as separate, otherwise the codes are categorized as a group.
  2. Select Case Sensitive if you want the same word entered in different cases to be in a different category, otherwise make sure this is clear.
  3. Select Separate Words unless you know that there will be common phrases (e.g., zip codes) that you wish to use as codes.
  4. Select Customise Delimiters if you want to specify the delimiters.
  5. Click OK to save the options.

Creating an Auto category variable for a chart

An Auto Category Variable can also be used as the source variable for a standard chart such as a bar chart.

Create the Auto Category Variable

  1. Click Analysis Variables AnalysisVariablesIcon.png to show the list of Analysis Variables.
  2. Click New Analysis Variables Item NewSurveyIcon.png on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar then select New Auto Category Variable from the list. This opens the Auto Category Variable Details dialog.
  3. In Name, enter a name for the Auto category variable. In this example, the name is AVQ4a as the source question is Q4a.
  4. In Source, enter the source question. When you tab off the field the label will update with the question text.
  1. In Limit codes enter the maximum number of codes. This determines the number of bars in the chart.
  2. Check Order by counts to order from the highest to lowest number of counts.
  3. Click Save SaveIcon.png to save the Auto Category Variable.

Create the Analysis Chart

  1. Click Analysis Chart AnalysisChartIcon.png on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Analysis Definition dialog.
  2. In Analysis, enter the Auto Category variable name, for example, “AVQ4a”.
  3. Select Transpose.
  1. Click Apply to update the chart display. This shows a bar chart of the top 5 other items ordered.

The post Introduction to Auto Category variables appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Categorising time responses https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/categorising-time-responses/ Wed, 21 Oct 2020 11:46:05 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2994 Categorising time responses using a single derived variable In this example of use of a Time variable, a Derived Single Response variable is used to group Q1b, “What time did you arrive?” into suitable ranges for analysis on a table or chart. Click to display the Variables window. Click to add a new variable. Specify […]

The post Categorising time responses appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Categorising time responses using a single derived variable

In this example of use of a Time variable, a Derived Single Response variable is used to group Q1b, “What time did you arrive?” into suitable ranges for analysis on a table or chart.

  1. Click VariablesIcon.png to display the Variables window.
  2. Click NewSurveyIcon.png to add a new variable.
  3. Specify the Variable details:
    • Name: Time
    • Label: Time of arrival
    • Type: Derived (the variable will derive its data from Q1b, the existing time of arrival question).
    • Response: Single (each respondent will fall into only one of the new codes as there is only one time of arrival per case).
  4. Specify the Code Details. Any recognisable time format can be used in the Value specification but if using the 12 hour clock the am and pm suffixes must be applied

OpenEndedTime1.PNG .

  1. Click SaveIcon.png to save the variable. This derived variable can now be used in tables and charts in the usual way.
Table showing Time of arrival by Age

Categorising time responses using a time function

You can also categorise time responses using time functions. This example uses the hour function in a Derived variable to group responses to Q1b, “What time did you arrive?” into suitable ranges for analysis.

  1. Click VariablesIcon.png to display the Variables window.
  2. Click NewSurveyIcon.png to add a new variable.
  3. Specify the Variable details:
    • Name: Arrivalhour
    • Label: Hour of arrival
    • Type: Derived (the variable will derive its data from other existing variables).
    • Response: Single (each respondent will fall into only one of the new codes, as there is only one time of arrival per case).
  4. Set up the code values to categorise by hour.
Variable used to categorise time into hour bands
  1. Click SaveIcon.png to save the variable. You can now use this variable to analyse by respondents’ hour of arrival.

The post Categorising time responses appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Calculating time intervals https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/calculating-time-intervals/ Wed, 21 Oct 2020 11:44:58 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=3005 Listed below are the instructions for creating variables to calculate an amount of time, such as duration of a wait and then put the figure into a time period, based on the difference between a time of arrival variable and a time of departure variable. Data will have already been entered into the questionnaires; including […]

The post Calculating time intervals appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Listed below are the instructions for creating variables to calculate an amount of time, such as duration of a wait and then put the figure into a time period, based on the difference between a time of arrival variable and a time of departure variable.

Data will have already been entered into the questionnaires; including answers to the time variables (the variables must have a response type of Time). For this example, Q1b is the time of arrival and Q1c is the time of departure.

  1. Click VariablesIcon.png to display the Variables window.
  2. Click NewSurveyIcon.png to add a new variable.
  3. To calculate the duration of waiting for each respondent, specify the Variable Details as:
    • Name: Wait
    • Label: Duration of time
    • Type: Derived (the variable will derive its data from other existing variables).
    • Response: Quantity (the response will be a numeric value for each case).
  4. Specify the Code Details to calculate the amount of time in seconds. The Not Asked value is specified to ensure that the calculation is only performed if data exists for the time question.

Code

Code Label

Value

NA

Not Asked

Q1b Missing

OK

Valid

Q1c-Q1b

  1. Click SaveIcon.png to save the variable. The variable can then be used to produce a statistics table of the duration of wait.

The post Calculating time intervals appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Analysing time responses https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/analysing-time-responses/ Wed, 21 Oct 2020 11:38:55 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2991 Time questions enable respondents to give a specific time either in 12 or 24 hour clock and Time variables can be analysed in a number of ways as follows: Times can be categorised as falling into particular periods in the day, such as ‘rush hour’; ‘mid-morning peak’ or ‘lunchtime’. The difference between two times (for […]

The post Analysing time responses appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Time questions enable respondents to give a specific time either in 12 or 24 hour clock and Time variables can be analysed in a number of ways as follows:

  • Times can be categorised as falling into particular periods in the day, such as ‘rush hour’; ‘mid-morning peak’ or ‘lunchtime’.
  • The difference between two times (for example between a time of arrival and a time of departure) can be calculated and the totals grouped into appropriate ranges, such as ’15 minutes waiting time’; ’30 minutes waiting time’ and ‘1 hour waiting time’.

Time formats

A wide range of ways of entering time data is supported.

  • When time data is entered, use a consistent time format. If you use the twelve hour clock remember to add the am or pm suffix otherwise all times will be read as am.
  • Any calculations of time between two periods that fall either side of midnight (e.g. 11.58 pm to 3.30 am) produces a positive number in calculations such as ‘Duration of time’ from time of departure minus time of arrival.

Time Format examples

Time Format varieties

23:59:59

24 hour clock with hours, minutes and seconds. Hours, minutes and seconds separated by a colon.

23:59

24 hour clock with hours and minutes. Hours and minutes separated by a colon.

2300 hours or 23 hours

24 hour clock with or without 00 minutes and with ‘hours’ suffix.

2300 hrs or 23 hrs

24 hour clock with or without 00 minutes and with ‘hrs’ suffix.

11:59:59 or 11:59:59 am or 11:59:59 pm

12 hour clock with hours, minutes and seconds and ‘am’ or ‘pm’ indicator. Hours, minutes and seconds separated by colon.

With no am suffix morning is assumed.

11:59 or 11:59 pm

12 hour clock with hours and minutes and ‘am’ or ‘pm’ indicator. Hours and minutes separated by colon.

With no am suffix morning is assumed.

11 am or 11 pm

12 hour clock with hour only and ‘am’ or ‘pm’ indicator.

With no am suffix morning is assumed.

11 o’clock am or

11 o’clock pm

12 hour clock with hour only, ‘o’clock’ label and ‘am’ or ‘pm’ indicator.

With no am suffix morning is assumed.

Time functions

When defining times, there are a number of functions that can be used to perform calculations and tests on the times.

Function

Interpretation

{time}<, <=, =, ==, <>, >=, > {time}

Shows whether or not a time response fits into the category specified.

{time}-{quantity}

Gives a time, calculated from an existing time variable and a quantity variable.

{time} + {quantity}

Gives a time, calculated from an existing time variable and a quantity variable.

hour

Gives the hour in which the time occurs. Use 24 hour clock only when specifying code values.

minute

Gives the minute’s part of the time only.

second

Gives the second’s part of the time only.

The post Analysing time responses appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Date function examples https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/date-function-examples/ Wed, 21 Oct 2020 11:35:13 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2978 Using a date function to determine the day of the week of a date This example shows the use of the date function weekday. You define a Derived Single Response variable to work out the day of the week for a particular date. Click to display the Variables window. Click to add a new variable. […]

The post Date function examples appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Using a date function to determine the day of the week of a date

This example shows the use of the date function weekday. You define a Derived Single Response variable to work out the day of the week for a particular date.

  1. Click VariablesIcon.png to display the Variables window.
  2. Click NewSurveyIcon.png to add a new variable.
  3. Specify the Variable Details:
    • Name: V6
    • Label: Day of the week restaurant visited
    • Type: Derived (the variable will derive its data from other existing variables).
    • Response: Single (each respondent will fall into only one of the new codes, as there is only one date of visit per case).
  4. Specify the Code Details:
Variable used to categorise time by day of the week
  1. Click SaveIcon.png to save the variable. The variable can then be used in tables and charts in the usual way.
Table showing the Visits by day of the week by Age

Calculating age from a date of birth

These instructions tell you how to create variables to calculate the respondent’s age from their date of birth and then put the respondents into age bands, based on the difference between a date of birth variable and the date function today. The instructions also apply if you have another date question in the questionnaire, which you want to use instead of today.

For this example, the date of birth variable is Q1a. It assumes a four-digit year.

  1. Click VariablesIcon.png to display the Variables window.
  2. Click NewSurveyIcon.png to add a new variable.
  3. Specify the Variable Details as:
    • Name: Age
    • Label: Calculated age in years
    • Type: Derived (the variable will derive its data from other existing variables).
    • Response: Quantity (the response will be a numeric value for each case).
Variable to calculate age in years
  1. Specify the Code Values to calculate the number of years. Note the use of \ to extract the whole number of years.

Code

Code Label

Value

NA

Not Asked

Q1a Missing

OK

Valid

(today-Q1a)\365.25

  1. Click SaveIcon.png to save the variable. You can then use this to analyse respondents’ ages.
  2. The Not Asked value is specified to ensure that the calculation is only performed if data exists for the date question.
  3. To band the respondents into age groups, create a new variable:
    • Name: Agegroup
    • Label: Age groups
    • Type: Derived
    • Response: Single (each respondent will only fall into one of the new codes).
  4. Specify the Code Details:
Variable created to group participants by age
  1. The codes are assigned in order, so all responses that have not been sorted into previous bands appear as 65 plus.
  2. Click SaveIcon.png to save the variable.

The post Date function examples appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Categorising date responses https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/categorising-date-responses/ Wed, 21 Oct 2020 11:29:36 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2971 Using a Derived Single Response variable is used to group Q1a, “When did you visit the restaurant?” into suitable ranges for analysis on a table or chart. Click to display the Variables window. Click to add a new variable. Specify the Variable details: Name: Date Label: Quarterly visits Type: Derived (the variable will derive its […]

The post Categorising date responses appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Using a Derived Single Response variable is used to group Q1a, “When did you visit the restaurant?” into suitable ranges for analysis on a table or chart.

  1. Click VariablesIcon.png to display the Variables window.
  2. Click NewSurveyIcon.png to add a new variable.
  3. Specify the Variable details:
    • Name: Date
    • Label: Quarterly visits
    • Type: Derived (the variable will derive its data from the existing date of visit question).
    • Response: Single (each respondent will fall into only one of the new codes as there is only one date of visit per case).
  4. Specify the Code Details as shown in the example below. Any recognisable date format can be used in the Value specification.
OpenEndedQuantity8.PNG
  1. Click SaveIcon.png to save the variable. The variable can then be used in tables and charts in the usual way.
OpenEndedDate2.PNG

The post Categorising date responses appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Analysing date responses https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/analysing-date-responses/ Wed, 21 Oct 2020 11:26:50 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2969 Dates are analysed in a number of ways as follows: Date formats The software supports a wide range of date formats. All dates are based on the Gregorian calendar. Day The day number must appear in the range 1 to 31, with optional leading zeros. For example, 01, 02 are acceptable. Checks are made on […]

The post Analysing date responses appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Dates are analysed in a number of ways as follows:

  • Dates are categorised as falling in particular years, months or weeks of the year, or on particular days of the week.
  • The difference between two dates can be calculated, such as calculating a respondent’s age. These can be categorised or grouped into appropriate ranges or used in the production of descriptive statistics.

Date formats

The software supports a wide range of date formats. All dates are based on the Gregorian calendar.

Day

The day number must appear in the range 1 to 31, with optional leading zeros. For example, 01, 02 are acceptable. Checks are made on the validity of a day number for the given month. For example, 31 September will be invalid. In the case of the month of February, the calculations also check whether the year is a leap year.

The day number can appear before or after the month, e.g. 1 Jan or Jan 1.

You cannot use the day suffixes such st, nd, rd, th, unless you apply a suitable date pattern to the variable.

The system settings determine the local rules for dates, such as the US standard of Month/Day/Year. Consequently, 01/05/97 will be calculated as January 5th 1997 in the US and May 1st 1997 in the UK (the computer date settings control these formats).

The characters, full stop (.), a hyphen (-) or a slash (/) separate the month, day and year. A space is used when the month is a word.

In the special case where the month name is given before the day number, a comma can be used to separate the day and year, e.g. January 5,1997

Month

The month can appear in full, e.g. January, or abbreviated to the first 3 characters, e.g. Jan, or as a number, e.g. 01.

The only exceptions to the 3 character abbreviation rule are July which can be Jul or Jly, and September which can be Sep or Sept.

The characters, full stop (.), a hyphen (-) or a slash (/) separate the month, day and year. The space character separates the month from the rest of the date if it is in word format.

Year

The year number has two formats available, either the last two digits, e.g. 97, or the full year, e.g. 1997. The characters, full stop (.), a hyphen (-) or a slash (/) separate the month, day and year.

When a year has only two digits, the default sets the year between 1930 and 2029 inclusive. In this way, 97 represents the year 1997, 00 represents 2000, and 29 represents 2029. Update the default year range by opening the Data Entry Tailoring dialog, using the Tailoring | Data Entry menu item. The Dates section contains the Date format and 2 Digit Years fields, which sets the default year range.

Date functions

When defining dates, there are a number of functions that can perform calculations and tests on the dates. The function names are not case sensitive and can be written in uppercase or mixed case.

Function

Description

year

Gives the year in which the date occurs. Note that the result is always the year in full, that is, even though the date was recorded as being in 06, the year function returns 2006.

month

Gives the month number in which the date occurs.

month name

Gives the name of the month in which the date occurs.

day

Gives the day of the month in which the date occurs.

weekday

Gives the day of the week on which the date occurs.

Monday is weekday 1 and Sunday is weekday 7. Dates which fall on the weekend are those where weekday is greater than 5, similarly, dates which fall in the week are those where weekday is less than 6.

weekday name

Gives the name of the day of the week on which the date occurs.

today

Used as a variable, returning the current date as set on the computer.

Examples

Date functions are useful in filter expressions to return a group of data responses based on a date, for example all responses completed in a particular month or year. Filters are available in analyses, reports and when looking at responses in the data entry window.

Here are some examples of date filters using the date functions:

  • ID.Date year=2023 gives responses for everyone who responded in 2023
  • ID.Date year=Today year gives responses completed this year
  • VisitDate Month = Today Month gives responses where respondents visited this month.
  • VisitDate Month = Today Month AND VisitDate Year = Today Year returns responses where respondents visited this month in the current year, which you can use if your survey runs over a number of years
  • VisitDate Month = 1 gives responses where respondents visited in January
  • VisitDate Month name = “January” also gives responses where respondents visited in January
  • VisitDate day = 1 gives responses where respondents visited on the first day of the month
  • VisitDate weekday = 1 gives responses where respondents visited on Monday
  • VisitDate weekday name = “Monday” is an alternative filter that also gives responses where respondents visited on Monday
  • ID.Date weekday = (1 TO 5) gives responses completed on a weekday from Monday to Friday
  • ID.Date weekday = (6 TO 7) gives responses completed on a weekend from Saturday to Sunday
  • ID.Date weekday > 6 is an alternative filter which also gives responses completed on a weekend

The post Analysing date responses appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Categorising quantity responses with a derived variable https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/categorising-quantity-responses/ Wed, 21 Oct 2020 11:22:30 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2962 The following example uses the Crocodile Rock Cafe Survey. A Derived Variable is set up to allocate the data for Q5 “How much did you spend in total?” into ranges. Click to display the Variables window. Click to add a new variable. Specify the Variable Details: Name: V5 Label: Amount spent Type: Derived (the variable […]

The post Categorising quantity responses with a derived variable appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
The following example uses the Crocodile Rock Cafe Survey. A Derived Variable is set up to allocate the data for Q5 “How much did you spend in total?” into ranges.

  1. Click VariablesIcon.png to display the Variables window.
  2. Click NewSurveyIcon.png to add a new variable.
  3. Specify the Variable Details:
    • Name: V5
    • Label: Amount spent
    • Type: Derived (the variable will derive its data from other existing variables).
    • Response: Single (each respondent will only fall into one of the new codes).
Variable showing amount spent
  1. Specify the Code Details:

Code

Code Label

Value

1

Under £2.50

Q5<2.5

2

£2.50-4.99

Q5<5

3

£5.00-7.49

Q5<7.5

4

£7.50-9.99

Q5<10

5

£10.00 plus

Q5>=10

Table showing the Amount Spent by Age
  1. Click SaveIcon.png to save the variable. The variable can then be used in tables and charts in the usual way.

The post Categorising quantity responses with a derived variable appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Statistical calculations on tables https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/statistical-calculations-on-tables/ Wed, 21 Oct 2020 11:20:09 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2951 You can perform a chi-squared test to see if there is a significant relationship between two variables. You can display indexed counts or sums to give a relative measure of individual cell values. Applying the chi-square test The Chi-square test can be applied to single-response variables. It compares observed (actual) and expected (theoretical) values in […]

The post Statistical calculations on tables appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
You can perform a chi-squared test to see if there is a significant relationship between two variables.

You can display indexed counts or sums to give a relative measure of individual cell values.

Applying the chi-square test

The Chi-square test can be applied to single-response variables. It compares observed (actual) and expected (theoretical) values in order to establish whether there is a significant relationship between two variables in a table.

To calculate the Chi-square Statistic and related statistics for a cross-tabulation or grid table,

  • select the Chi square option in the Analysis Definition dialog
  • click Chi-squared button on the table analysis toolbar

The Chi-square and associated statistics will be displayed above the table

You can display the expected values by selecting the Expected Counts option in the Analysis Definition dialog .These are the values that would be expected in each cell of the table if the row variable were not influenced by the column variable or vice-versa (the Null Hypothesis). They are calculated as:

(Row Total) x (Column Total) / Table Total (Base).

Table showing Parking by Age

Since you cannot always compare Chi-squared values directly, Snap generates a statement about the result.

The interpretation of the Chi-square test result follows a seven point scale and categorises the certainty of a relationship (or non-relationship) between the variables in the cross-tabulation as follows:

Message

Meaning

There is evidence of a relationship, significant at the 1% level

There is a very strong relationship between the variables.

There is evidence of a relationship, significant at the 5% level

There is a strong relationship between the variables.

There is evidence of a relationship, significant at the 10% level

There is a relationship between the variables.

The test is inconclusive

The variables are neither related nor unrelated.

There is evidence of no relationship, significant at the 10% level

There is evidence of no relationship.

There is evidence of no relationship, significant at the 5% level

There is strong evidence of no relationship.

There is evidence of no relationship, significant at the 1% level

There is very strong evidence of no relationship.

Error: Chi-squared test invalid. Degrees of freedom is zero

There is not enough data to calculate the Chi-square statistic

The information given in the Chi-square report is as follows:

Detail

Meaning

Chi-square value

https://www.snapsurveys.com/help/15551.bmp

where O is the observed (actual) value, and E the expected value for each cell.

Degrees of freedom

Relates to the number of choices that can be made in fixing the values of the expected frequencies. It is calculated as

https://www.snapsurveys.com/help/15552.bmp

where r is the number of rows in the table and c is the number of columns. The above is a 5 by 5 table, and therefore has 16 (= 4 4) degrees of freedom.

Cramérs V

Used to compare tables of different dimensions and different sample sizes. It is calculated as

https://www.snapsurveys.com/help/15555.bmp

where n is the number of cases and k the smaller of the number of rows and columns. Its value always lies between 0 and 1.

Phi Coefficient

Calculated as

https://www.snapsurveys.com/help/15553.bmp

where n is the number of cases. For 2 by 2 tables Phi always lies between 0 and 1. If one dimension is greater than 2, Phi can be greater than 1. Phi can be used to compare tables of the same dimension but different sample sizes.

Contingency Coefficient

Calculated as

https://www.snapsurveys.com/help/15554.bmp

It will always have a value between 0 and 1. Tables of different dimensions cannot be compared.

Evidence of Relationship

A statement indicating the strength of the relationship (or non-relationship) between the row and column variables. This is used because comparison of chi-square values from tables of different dimensions or different sample sizes is meaningless.

Warning

This appears when a large number of cells in the table have small Expected Values. The reliability of the Chi-square test reduces as the proportion of cells with small expected values increases. A warning appears if more than 20% of the cells of a table have an expected value of less than 5.

Indexed Values

Indexed Values are widely used in product research and other projects to give a relative measure of individual cell values. Indexed Values can be shown on the table by checking the appropriate box (Indexed Counts or Indexed Sums) option in Definition tab of the Analysis Definition dialog.

Table showing Parking by Age

In general, for any individual cell in the table, the corresponding index value can be calculated from the formula:

Index value formula

where:

v is the original cell value

 

c is the column total for the column in which the cell occurs

 

r is the row total of the row in which the cell occurs

 

t is the table total

The figure of 100 represents a norm or expected value. Thus index values less than 100 would be considered lower than expected and index values of greater than 100 would be considered higher than expected.

The post Statistical calculations on tables appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Analysing quantity responses https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/analysing-quantity-responses/ Wed, 21 Oct 2020 11:18:14 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2946 Quantity Response questions are used to collect open-ended numeric responses in a survey. This type of data would usually be values such as amounts of money, volumes, areas etc. Quantity Response data can be analysed as follows: A list of Quantity Responses can be produced either for all respondents or for respondents selected on the […]

The post Analysing quantity responses appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Quantity Response questions are used to collect open-ended numeric responses in a survey. This type of data would usually be values such as amounts of money, volumes, areas etc. Quantity Response data can be analysed as follows:

  • A list of Quantity Responses can be produced either for all respondents or for respondents selected on the basis of a filter specification. This is done in the same way as a list of Literal Responses
  • Statistics of the quantity values can be calculated either for all respondents or for respondents selected on the basis of a filter specification.

A Derived Variable can be set up to allocate the quantity data into coded ranges. These are used as an analysis or break variable on a table.

Overview of descriptive statistics

You can produce a table of descriptive statistics which shows, for each variable in the specification, the mean, mode, median, quartiles, sum, min, max, range, standard deviation, and variance, standard error of the mean, skewness and kurtosis. Any of the statistics can be excluded using the Descriptive Statistics tab on the Analysis Definition dialog.

Table showing the descriptive statistics for quantity response questions

Descriptive statistics can be calculated for all cases or for those selected on the basis of a Filter Specification. Missing values such as No Reply will be excluded from statistical calculations. The statistics can also be weighted, perhaps to correct some imbalance in the sampling, by providing a suitable weight specification.

To describe each of the statistics that may be calculated assume that a survey of households was conducted. As part of that survey the number of persons living in the household was requested. The following replies were received from the eleven households interviewed:

1, 2, 3, 4, No Reply, 3, 4, 5, 4, 6, 2

Statistic

Description

Mean

This is often called the average, and is defined as the sum of the items divided by the number of items.

Mean = (1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 3 + 4 + 5 + 4 + 6 + 2) = 34 10 = 3.4

Since one respondent gave no reply, the mean and all other statistics are calculated using a sample of 10.

Mode

The mode of a distribution is the most frequent or most popular item. If two values tie for the mode, Snap will choose the lower.

Mode = 4, since 4 is the most frequently occurring value (three occurrences).

Quartile 1

25% through a range of values

Median

The midpoint or 50% through a range of values. To calculate the median, the items of the distribution are arranged in order of magnitude starting with either the smallest or the largest, then:

if the number of items is odd, the median is the value of the middle item.

if the number of items is even, the median is the mean of the two middle items.

1, 2, 2, 3, 3, 4, 4, 4, 5, 6

Median = (3 + 4) ÷ 2 = 3.5

Quartile 3

75% through a range of values.

Sum

The sum is calculated by adding all the values of a distribution.

Sum = 1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 3 + 4 + 5 + 4 + 6 + 2 = 34

Minimum

The minimum is the smallest value of the distribution.

Minimum = 1

Maximum

The maximum is the largest value of the distribution.

Maximum = 6

Range

The range shows the spread of the distribution and is calculated by subtracting the smallest value (minimum) from the largest value (maximum).

Range = 6 – 1 = 5

Standard Deviation

The standard deviation is a measure of dispersion of values in a distribution. It gives an indication of how much the values deviate from the mean. Thus, a distribution with a large range would have a larger standard deviation than one with a small range. The standard deviation is calculated as:

https://www.snapsurveys.com/help/15530.bmp

where xi is each value in the distribution, https://www.snapsurveys.com/help/15531.bmp is the mean of the values and n is the number of cases. For the sample in question:

Standard Deviation = 1.428286

Variance

The variance is another measure of dispersion of values in a distribution and is calculated as the square of the standard deviation:

Variance = 2.04

Snap calculates the standard deviation and variance by assuming the data represents a sample rather than an entire population.

Standard Error of the Mean

The standard error of the mean is calculated by dividing the standard deviation by the square root of the number of items in the sample. It is defined as the standard deviation of the distribution of the sample mean and gives an indication of how far individual scores deviate from the mean score shown. The larger the sample, and/or the closer the individual scores are to the mean score, the smaller the standard error.

Standard Error of the Mean = 1.428286 10 = 0.451664

Skewness

A distribution that is not symmetrical but has more cases toward one end of the distribution than the other is called skewed.

The measures of central tendency (mean, mode and median) can vary considerably. If the mean is larger than the mid point of the range (the median) and the most frequently occurring value (the mode), the sample is said to be positively skewed.

If the mean is smaller than the mid point of the range (the median) and the most frequently occurring value (the mode), the sample is said to be negatively skewed.

A small skewness value (close to 0) indicates that the data is evenly distributed about the mean. With this type of distribution it would be expected that the values for mean, mode and median be similar. The skewness of the example is 0.098843 indicating a small positive skewness.

Kurtosis

Kurtosis also gives an indication of the shape of a distribution in the form of the extent to which, for a given standard deviation, the data clusters around a central point.

A positive value for kurtosis indicates a distribution that is more peaked than usual. A distribution of this type would typically have most of the values clustered around a central point.

A negative value for kurtosis indicates a flatter or more widely dispersed distribution. The kurtosis for the example is -0.75202

The post Analysing quantity responses appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Pre-coding answers https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/pre-coding-answers/ Wed, 21 Oct 2020 09:41:21 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2941 The literal answers can be assigned codes to place them into defined categories. This information is available when analysing the respondents’ information. The example below shows coding for the free text for Other food item. Click to display the Variables window. Click to add a new variable. Specify the Variable details: Name: Q4b Label: Other […]

The post Pre-coding answers appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
The literal answers can be assigned codes to place them into defined categories. This information is available when analysing the respondents’ information.

The example below shows coding for the free text for Other food item.

  1. Click VariablesIcon.png to display the Variables window.
  2. Click NewSurveyIcon.png to add a new variable.
  3. Specify the Variable details:
    • Name: Q4b
    • Label: Other items ordered
    • Type: Question
    • Response: Multiple (each respondent could fall into more than one of the new codes if they ordered more than one item).
  4. Specify the Code Details:

Code

Code Label

Value

1

Milkshake

1

2

Apple Pie

2

3

Chicken Nuggets

3

4

Fish Burger

4

5

Breakfast

5

6

Doughnut

6

  1. Click SaveIcon.png to save the variable. This variable can then be used instead of the original Literal Response variable (Q4a) for data entry.

The post Pre-coding answers appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Combining literal responses with a coded question https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/combining-literal-responses/ Wed, 21 Oct 2020 09:38:40 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2933 Click to display the Variables window. Click to add a new variable. Specify the Variable Details: Name: V2 Label: Items ordered Type: Derived (the variable will derive its data from existing variables) Response: Multiple (each respondent could fall into more than one of the new codes) Specify the Code Details: Ensure that the variable from […]

The post Combining literal responses with a coded question appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
  • Click Variables window button to display the Variables window.
  • Click NewSurveyIcon.png to add a new variable.
  • Specify the Variable Details:
    • Name: V2
    • Label: Items ordered
    • Type: Derived (the variable will derive its data from existing variables)
    • Response: Multiple (each respondent could fall into more than one of the new codes)
  • Specify the Code Details:
  • Derived variable matching a code value to a label
    1. Ensure that the variable from which the derived one will gather its data has a relevant pattern applied, such as lower case.
    2. Click SaveIcon.png to save the variable. The variable can then be used in tables and charts in the usual way.
    Table showing the counts of the Items ordered

    Unless a pattern has been applied to the source variable, the specification of the text string must be precise. The pattern match process searches for an exact match (i.e. it is case sensitive) and looks for a capital M at the beginning of the word Milkshake and ignore lower case m. Q4a=”ilkshake” would find both.

    The post Combining literal responses with a coded question appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Categorising literal responses https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/categorising-literal-responses/ Wed, 21 Oct 2020 09:35:49 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2918 Click to display the Variables window. Select the variable which will act as a source to the derived variable. Double click the variable or click to open the Variable Details dialog. Click to display the Pattern drop-down. If it is not already selected choose lower case as the pattern. Save the variable and return to […]

    The post Categorising literal responses appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
  • Click VariablesIcon.png to display the Variables window.
  • Select the variable which will act as a source to the derived variable. Double click the variable or click VariablePropsIcon.png to open the Variable Details dialog.
  • Click ToggleDefnIcon.PNG to display the Pattern drop-down. If it is not already selected choose lower case as the pattern.
  • Save the variable and return to the Variables window.
  • Click NewSurveyIcon.png to add a new variable.
  • Specify the Variable Details:
    • Name: V1
    • Label: Comments
    • Type: Derived (the variable will derive its data from existing variables).
    • Response: Multiple (each respondent could fall into more than one of the new codes if they made more than one comment).
  • Specify the Code Details:
  • Code

    Code Label

    Value

    1

    Food is cold

    Q9=”food” and Q9=”cold”

    2

    More seating required

    Q9=”seat”

    3

    Better parking facilities

    Q9=”park”

    1. Click SaveIcon.png to save the variable. The variable can then be used in tables and charts in the usual way.
    Table showing participant's comments

    Snap is case sensitive so an appropriate pattern must be applied to the source variable to ensure that all cases with relevant comments are captured.

    Categorising postcodes

    The best way of analysing postcodes is to create a Derived Single Response variable and to apply a pattern to the variable.

    The following instructions show how to categorise the postcodes by area.

    1. Select Tailor | Patterns to open the Patterns dialog.
    2. Select postcode uk from the list and click Clone.
    3. Give the pattern a new name, such as UK Postcode area.
    4. Clear the Result box if required. Hover over the Result box and right click.
    5. Highlight Component and a list will appear containing the components of the pattern.
    6. Choose area. This will now appear in the Result box.
    7. Click OK to return to the Patterns dialog
    8. This pattern will be used as part of an ‘as’ expression in the derived variable.
    Pattern Properties dialog
    1. From the Variables Window click NewSurveyIcon.png to add a new variable.
    2. Specify the Variable Details:
      • Name: V3
      • Label: Area
      • Type: Derived
      • Response: Single (each respondent will only fall into one of the new codes)
    3. Specify the Code Details:

    Code

    Code Label

    Value

    1

    Bristol

    Q11 as UK postcode area ==”BS”

    2

    Reading

    Q11 as UK postcode area ==”RG”

    1. Click SaveIcon.png to save the variable. The variable can then be used in tables and charts in the usual way.
    Derived variable categorizing postcodes by postal area

    If you wish to check your results you may do so by using the filter FilterIcon.png button in the Data Entry window. Using the example above, you could enter a filter value of V3=1 to ensure you have specified the value correctly for the ‘Bristol’ area.

    The post Categorising literal responses appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Exporting literal responses https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/exporting-literal-responses/ Wed, 21 Oct 2020 09:27:23 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2913 A list of Literal Responses can be exported to a word processing package for inclusion in a report. In the following example a list of Other items ordered in the Crocodile Rock Cafe Survey will be exported to the word processing package. Click to display the Data Entry window for the current survey. Select the […]

    The post Exporting literal responses appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    A list of Literal Responses can be exported to a word processing package for inclusion in a report. In the following example a list of Other items ordered in the Crocodile Rock Cafe Survey will be exported to the word processing package.

    1. Click DataEntryIcon.png to display the Data Entry window for the current survey.
    2. Select the menu option File | Export to display the Data Export dialog box.
    3. Set the Format to the required format.
    4. Set the Destination for the data report as either File or Clipboard. The clipboard provides the most straightforward method of output and will be suitable for most surveys. However if there is a very large number of cases the computer may not have enough memory to hold all the required data on the clipboard in which case the file option should be used.
    5. In the Filter field type the specification to select the cases to be reported.
    6. For example to report only those cases where a response has been given to Q4a specify Q4a OK. Leaving the Content field blank will include all data in for each case that meets the filter specification in raw data format.
    7. Specify the Content as the name of the variable or variables to be printed:
      • Individual questions (e.g. Q4a)
      • List of questions (e.g. Q1,Q4)
      • Range of questions (e.g. Q1 TO Q4)
      • Include the CASE variable to associate the data with a case number
    Data export dialog used to export comments
    1. Click OK and the data report will be output to the clipboard or the file specified.
    2. Switch to the word processing package and paste the report from the clipboard into a document. Alternatively load the file if the File destination has been used.

    The post Exporting literal responses appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Printing literal responses https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/printing-literal-responses/ Wed, 21 Oct 2020 09:24:36 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2908 Click to display the Data Entry window for the current survey. Click to display the Print Data dialog box. Specify a Title for the report if required. In the Filter field type the specification to select the cases to be printed: For example, to print only those cases where a response has been given to […]

    The post Printing literal responses appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
  • Click DataEntryIcon.png to display the Data Entry window for the current survey.
  • Click PrintIcon.PNG to display the Print Data dialog box.
  • Print a list of literal responses
    1. Specify a Title for the report if required.
    2. In the Filter field type the specification to select the cases to be printed:
    3. For example, to print only those cases where a response has been given to Q4a specify Q4a OK.
    4. Specify the Content as the name of the variable or variables to be printed:
      • Individual questions (e.g. Q4a)
      • List of questions (e.g. Q1,Q4)
      • Range of questions (e.g. Q1 TO Q4)
    5. Click Print to print the report.

    The post Printing literal responses appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Creating a list of literal responses https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/creating-list-of-literal-responses/ Wed, 21 Oct 2020 09:21:46 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2898 You can create a list of literal responses using the List analysis type. Using a derived literal response You can use derived literals to enter other text in your list. You can also convert dates, times and quantity variables to text in derived literals. For example, in the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey supplied with Snap […]

    The post Creating a list of literal responses appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can create a list of literal responses using the List analysis type.

    1. Click Analysis List AnalysisListIcon.png on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar to create a list definition.
    2. Enter the literal variable definition, such as Q9 in the Analysis field.
    3. Press Apply to display the list.

    Using a derived literal response

    You can use derived literals to enter other text in your list. You can also convert dates, times and quantity variables to text in derived literals.

    For example, in the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey supplied with Snap XMP Desktop, there is a date variable Q1.a and a literal variable Q8 for “Any other comments”. To create a report with the information in a readable format, you can create a derived literal that writes the date a comment was received together with the comment, and then create a list analysis of the data.

    1. Click VariablesIcon.png to open the Variables window.
    2. Click NewSurveyIcon.png to add a new variable.
    3. Set the type to Derived and the Response to Literal.
    4. Enter the text “Comment'{Q9}’ was received on:{Q1.a}.”

    Note that the variable names are enclosed in {} within the text. The quotation marks included in the text (‘) are different to those that mark the beginning and end of the text in the derived literal (“). (If you need to have double quotes (“) in your text, you must use single quotes (‘) to mark the beginning and end of the text.

    1. You only want to list if there are comments, so in the Not Asked field, type unless Q9 ok. This means the your derived literal will be left empty if there is no comment
    Derived variable to list comments with the date of visit
    1. Click SaveIcon.png to save the variable.
    2. Create a list as before, but use your new derived variable, V1 in the Analysis field.
    List of comments with the date of visit

    The post Creating a list of literal responses appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Showing mean values in a grid cross-tabulation https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/mean-values-in-cross-tabulation/ Tue, 20 Oct 2020 15:15:00 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2893 A grid cross-tabulation may be used to calculate the mean of a large number of variables broken down by the codes of one or more others. For example, in the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey it might be required to see how the mean service ratings differ between male and female respondents. Click to open the […]

    The post Showing mean values in a grid cross-tabulation appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    A grid cross-tabulation may be used to calculate the mean of a large number of variables broken down by the codes of one or more others. For example, in the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey it might be required to see how the mean service ratings differ between male and female respondents.

    1. Click AnalysisTblIcon.png to open the Analysis Definition window to build a table.
    2. Specify the Analysis variables for the table or chart as Q6a TO Q6e (“How do you rate the following?”).
    3. Specify the Break as Q12 (gender).
    4. Select Means & Differences. Specify the Calculate variable/weight as Score5 (or another appropriate weight for the rating scale).
    Analysis Definition for a table
    1. Click OK to build the table.
    Table showing mean values of ratings by gender

    Each cell in the table shows the mean ratings of speed of service, cleanliness, etc., as calculated according to the values specified in Score5, both for the survey sample as a whole and for males and females separately. The various Analysis Difference, Break Difference and Base Difference options can all still be ticked.

    The post Showing mean values in a grid cross-tabulation appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Tables and charts showing means and differences https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/showing-means-and-differences/ Tue, 20 Oct 2020 15:12:43 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2885 Tables and charts of means and differences can be built. For example, in the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey it might be required to see how much is spent by men and women of different age groups in comparison with each other. This can be either comparing men and women of the same age group or […]

    The post Tables and charts showing means and differences appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Tables and charts of means and differences can be built. For example, in the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey it might be required to see how much is spent by men and women of different age groups in comparison with each other. This can be either comparing men and women of the same age group or comparing all men in the different age groups and separately all women in the different age groups. This is the same table we showed in the example of means and significances but this time rather than seeing if there is a significant difference, we are calculating what the difference in the means is.

    The only response types that can be used in means and differences tables/charts are Single Response and Quantity Response.

    1. Click AnalysisTblIcon.png to open the Analysis Definition window to build a table.
    2. Specify the Analysis variable for the table or chart as Q11 (age categories).
    3. Specify the Break variable for the table or chart as Q12 (gender).
    4. Select Means & Differences as the Calculate option.
    5. Specify the Calculate variable as Q5 (amount spent).
    6. The Show options on the Analysis Definition change to difference options.
      • Choose Analysis Difference if you want to see a comparison of the means and difference of men and women of each age group.
      • Choose Break Difference if you want to see a comparison of the means and difference of men in each age category and a separate comparison of the means and difference of women in each of the age groups.
      • Choose Base Difference if you want to see a comparison of the means of each cell with the base mean.
    Analysis Definition showing mean values
    1. Click OK to build the table.
    Table showing the amount spent by age and gender

    This example displays Break Difference so you can see the mean amount spent by men of each age category compared with the overall mean of amount spent for men. We can also see the mean amount spent by women of each age category compared with the overall mean of amount spent for women.

    Converting to a chart

    The difference values can usefully be displayed in the form of a 2D bar chart:

    1. Click VariablePropsIcon.png to re-define the table and change the form to have the Bar Counts style.
    2. Uncheck the Means box and click OK to build the chart.
    Chart showing the amount spent by age and gender

    The post Tables and charts showing means and differences appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Tables and charts showing means and significances https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/showing-means-and-significances/ Tue, 20 Oct 2020 15:08:53 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2876 The significance is calculated by comparing the mean of one category with another using the t-test. The t-test establishes the significance of the fact that the mean for a particular cell is greater than, or less than, the mean of a reference cell. The reference cell may be the analysis base (the mean of all […]

    The post Tables and charts showing means and significances appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The significance is calculated by comparing the mean of one category with another using the t-test. The t-test establishes the significance of the fact that the mean for a particular cell is greater than, or less than, the mean of a reference cell. The reference cell may be the analysis base (the mean of all respondents in the same row) or the break base (the mean of all respondents in the same column).

    The only response types that can be used in means and significances tables/charts are Single Response and Quantity Response.

    For example, in the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey it might be required to see whether there is a significant difference in spending in a comparison of men and women who are in the same age bracket or, alternatively, it might be necessary to look at whether there is a significant difference between the amount spent by men in different age categories and the amount spent by women in different age brackets. In other words, the first example will compare men and women of the same age, whereas the second example will compare men in age categories and there will be a separate comparison between women in age categories.

    1. Click AnalysisTblIcon.png to open the Analysis Definition window to build a table.
    2. Specify the Analysis variable for the table or chart as Q11 (Age categories).
    3. Set the Break variable for the table or chart as Q12 (Gender).
    4. Set Calculate to Means & Significances.
    5. Specify the Calculate variable as Q5 (Amount spent).
    6. The Show options in the Analysis Definition now show significance options.
      • Choose Analysis Significance if you want to see a comparison of means between men and women.
      • Choose Break Significance if you want to see a comparison between men of different age groups and a separate comparison of women of different age groups.
    Analysis Definition showing mean values
    1. Click OK to build the table

    Each cell in the table shows the average amount spent and the significance of that value compared with every other mean in either the same column or the same row, depending on whether Analysis Significance was selected, or Break Significance.

    Table showing the means and significances for Age by Gender

    The table displays Break Significances. You can see that there are highly significant differences between the means of females aged under 18 and those who are 55+. Amongst men, there are no significant differences. The table also displays any significant differences between the base means (all respondents) for each age category.

    Converting to a chart

    On a chart you can show either the mean or the significance but not both.

    1. To convert this table to a chart format, click VariablePropsIcon.png.
    2. Uncheck the Break Significance option.
    3. Change the form from Table to Chart and from the drop-down menu select the style Bar Counts.
    4. Click OK to build the chart.
    Chart showing the amount spent by age and gender

    The post Tables and charts showing means and significances appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Analyses of mean values https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/analyses-of-mean-values/ Tue, 20 Oct 2020 14:56:04 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2869 Tables, charts and Maps of mean values can be built. Maps can only be used to display a single row or column of data. The example describes how to display a table using the data in the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey showing the average amount spent (Q5) broken down by frequency of visit (Q2) and […]

    The post Analyses of mean values appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Tables, charts and Maps of mean values can be built. Maps can only be used to display a single row or column of data.

    The example describes how to display a table using the data in the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey showing the average amount spent (Q5) broken down by frequency of visit (Q2) and gender of the respondent (Q12).

    1. Click AnalysisTblIcon.png to open the Analysis Definition dialog to build a table.
    2. Specify the Analysis variable for the table or chart as Q2 (frequency of visit).
    3. Specify the Break variable for the table or chart as Q12 (gender).
    4. Set Calculate to either Means & Differences or Means & Significances. Only the means are required for this table; differences or significances will not be shown, as only the Means option is ticked.
    5. Specify the Calculate variable as Q5 (amount spent).
    Analysis Definition showing mean values
    1. Click OK to build the table.
    Table showing frequency of visit by gender showing mean amount spent

    Each cell in the table shows the average amount spent. For example, the average amount spent by males who visit the restaurant daily is 15.17.

    To convert this table to a chart format

    1. Click on VariablePropsIcon.png in the table window.
    2. Change the form from Table to Chart.
    3. Click Browse by the Style field, and select the style Bar Counts from the drop-down list.
    4. Click OK to build the chart.
    Chart showing frequency of visit by gender showing mean amount spent

    The post Analyses of mean values appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Setting the options for Significance (t-test) https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/setting-significance-options/ Tue, 20 Oct 2020 14:54:35 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2866 You can control the way t-tests and U-tests are calculated by changing the figures in the Summary Statistics tab of the Analysis Definition dialog. If you want these figures to be the default values for the survey, you must set them in the Analysis tailoring dialog. This also has a Summary Statistics tab. You open […]

    The post Setting the options for Significance (t-test) appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can control the way t-tests and U-tests are calculated by changing the figures in the Summary Statistics tab of the Analysis Definition dialog.

    If you want these figures to be the default values for the survey, you must set them in the Analysis tailoring dialog. This also has a Summary Statistics tab. You open the Analysis Tailoring dialog by selecting Analysis from the Tailor menu.

    1. Open the appropriate dialog (Analysis Definition or Analysis tailoring)
    2. Click the Summary Statistics tab
    3. Select the Significance (t-test) in either of the columns. The possible options appear below.
    Summary Statistics tab in the Analysis definition dialog
    • Comparison enables you to select the base used when comparing the mean of base to the mean of each category on your table. Either use:
      • Base: the mean for all respondents
      • Base less current: the mean for respondents that are not included in the category being compared.
    • Score is the score applied for all calculations
    • Decimal places give the number of decimal places the significance (t-test) value is calculated to. (It is usual to keep the significance (t-test) decimal places to 0 and the mean decimal places to 2.)

    The post Setting the options for Significance (t-test) appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Using Significance (t-test) in tables https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-significance/ Tue, 20 Oct 2020 14:50:33 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2861 The Significance (t-test) allows us to compare the significance of the mean of each column of data with the significance of the mean of the base. For example, in the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey it might be required to see whether there is a significant difference in perception of speed of service between different age […]

    The post Using Significance (t-test) in tables appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Significance (t-test) allows us to compare the significance of the mean of each column of data with the significance of the mean of the base.

    For example, in the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey it might be required to see whether there is a significant difference in perception of speed of service between different age groups.

    1. Click AnalysisTblIcon.png to open the analysis Definition dialog to build a table.
    2. Specify the Analysis variable for the table as Q6c (Rating of Parking).
    3. Specify the Break variable for the table as Q11 (Age range).
    4. Click the Summary Statistics tab.
    5. Select Significance (t-test) in the Available column and click on the > button to move the option into the Used column.
    6. Select Mean and click on > to move it into the Used column.
    7. Specify Score5 as the score. (Score5 is the name given to a Weight WeightsIcon.png created in the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey.)
    8. Click OK to build the table.
    Table showing mean and significance values

    The table shows the counts and percentages of each age group against the rating of speed of service. It also shows the mean rating of speed of service as specified by each age group, and the t-test (significance of the mean) in each category compared with the t-test (significance of the mean) of the base. The significance is shown as a percentage, so if we use the 95% and 99% significance levels as our markers we can see that the under 18s and 35-44 age groups have highly significant results, which means these results are likely to be repeatable in other surveys. The other age categories are not showing significant results and would not necessarily be repeated if the survey was conducted again with a similar group.

    The post Using Significance (t-test) in tables appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Setting the options for t-tests and U-tests https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/options-for-t-tests-and-u-tests/ Tue, 20 Oct 2020 14:38:47 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2857 You can control the way t-tests and U-tests are calculated by changing the figures in the Summary Statistics tab of the Analysis Definition dialog. If you want these figures to be the default values for the survey, you must set them in the Analysis tailoring dialog. This also has a Summary Statistics tab. You open […]

    The post Setting the options for t-tests and U-tests appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can control the way t-tests and U-tests are calculated by changing the figures in the Summary Statistics tab of the Analysis Definition dialog.

    If you want these figures to be the default values for the survey, you must set them in the Analysis tailoring dialog. This also has a Summary Statistics tab. You open the Analysis Tailoring dialog by selecting Analysis from the Tailor menu.

    1. Open the appropriate dialog (Analysis Definition or Analysis tailoring)
    2. Click the Summary Statistics tab
    3. Select the t-test or U-test in either of the columns. The possible options appear below.
    Options for t-tests and U-tests
    OptionMeaning
    Upper Level
    Lower Level
    The Upper Level and Lower Level values are the confidence levels used to report results as being “Significant” (lower level) or “Highly Significant” (upper level). The upper level should always be higher than the lower level, but they can take any value between 50% and 99.9%. Typically you would set them at 90% and 95%, or at 95% and 99%.
    Labels: Grouped
    Labels: Continuous
    Specify how the figures are shown for tables with more than one break variable. The first column of the first variable will be labelled as Column A and subsequent columns for that variable will be labelled B, C, D and so on. For example, in the snCrocodile survey the ‘under 18s’ code will be labelled A. When the columns for the first variable are all labelled, the next variable will either continue in the alphabetical sequence, if you select Continuous, or will start again at A if you select Grouped.
    Show:  
    All
    Higher
    Lower
    Left
    Right
     Show will affect the way in which the result for a particular cell in the table is shown. If you select All, then every result will be reported twice. For example, if there is a significant difference between columns B and D, this will be reported in both column B and column D. The remaining four options will mean that the result is only reported once, the column it is included in being determined by which option is selected. Higher and Lower will show the result only in the column with the higher or lower value. Left and Right will show the result only in the leftmost or rightmost column.
    Show:
    Hyphen
    Index
     This controls whether or not a hyphen is displayed for non-significant results. If it is not selected, only the letters indicating significant results will be shown. This controls whether or not the column indexing, i.e. the letter that represents each column, is displayed as part of the column heading. It is usually advisable to have this option selected, particularly if you are analysing a large number of variables.
    1-Tail
    2-Tail
    Specify whether a 1-tailed or 2-tailed test is carried out. Unless you have a specific reason to use a 1-tailed test you should keep to a 2-tailed test. (Basically, 1-tailed when looking for increase/decrease between results;2-tailed when looking for difference between two mean scores)
    Apply Tukey’s Correction (t-test only)Tukey’s Correction is applied where more than two categories of data are being compared using the t-test, to avoid anomalous results which sometimes arise as a result of the t-test when multiple categories of data are being compared.
    Results exclude the last/first number of codes (U test only)Enables you to exclude codes (e.g., Don’t Know ) from the calculation

    The post Setting the options for t-tests and U-tests appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Using U-tests in tables https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-u-tests/ Tue, 20 Oct 2020 14:31:58 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2851 In the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey, the speed of service,Q6a is rated by respondents in various age groups, Q11. The U test can be used to identify differences between the ratings for the different age groups. Click to open the Analysis Definition dialog to build a table. Specify the Analysis variable for the table as […]

    The post Using U-tests in tables appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    In the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey, the speed of service,Q6a is rated by respondents in various age groups, Q11.

    The U test can be used to identify differences between the ratings for the different age groups.

    1. Click AnalysisTblIcon.png to open the Analysis Definition dialog to build a table.
    2. Specify the Analysis variable for the table as Q6a.
    3. Specify the Break variable for the table as Q11 (Age).
    4. Select the Summary Statistics tab.
    5. Select U-Test in the Available column and click on the > button to move the U-Test option into the Used column.
    Summary Statistics tab in the Analysis definition dialog
    1. Click OK to build the table.
    Table showing U test values

    Each cell in the table shows the number of respondents who ticked each particular age group and speed of service rating. The U-Test result displays 6 characters in each age group column representing the results of comparing a column with those of each other column. It indicates whether there is a significant difference or whether it is just a chance result.

    Character

    Meaning

      –

    No significant difference; a chance result.

    lower case character

    The difference is significant at the lower level of confidence.

    upper case character

    The difference is significant at the higher level of confidence.

    This implies that there is a significant difference between those under 18, and those between 45 and 54. There may be other significant differences which are concealed because your sample size is too small or somehow unrepresentative.

    The post Using U-tests in tables appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Using t-tests in tables https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-t-tests/ Tue, 20 Oct 2020 14:27:56 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2844 The t-test is used to compare two mean scores to see if the difference between them is statistically significant. A table is set up with mean scores applied. The level of confidence between the mean scores for two different groupings can then be displayed by using a t-test. For example, in the Crocodile Rock Cafe […]

    The post Using t-tests in tables appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The t-test is used to compare two mean scores to see if the difference between them is statistically significant.

    A table is set up with mean scores applied. The level of confidence between the mean scores for two different groupings can then be displayed by using a t-test.

    For example, in the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey it might be required to see ratings for the overall performance of the restaurant question by age groups and to show the mean score for each of these groupings. The t-test can then be used to establish which mean scores are significantly different. For example, under 18s’ rating of overall performance is high; therefore, it would be useful to find out if this is a significant result and likely to be repeated in further surveys or just a chance thing.

    1. Click AnalysisTblIcon.png to open the Analysis Definition dialog to build a table.
    2. Specify the Analysis variable for the table as Attitude (the derived variable we set up to assess Overall rating of performance).
    3. Specify the Break variable for the table as Q11 (Age).
    4. Click the Summary Statistics tab
    5. Double-click Mean in the Available column to move it to the Used column.
    6. Enter score10 in the Score field. Instructions on creating the weight score10 are given in Calculating mean scores after banding a quantity variable
    Summary Statistics tab in the Analysis definition dialog
    1. Double-click t-test in the Available column to move it into the Used column. Leave the t-test settings as they are.
    2. Click on the Base/Labels tab. Because the analysis variable has been scored, change the analysis labels to make this obvious on the table.
      • Click Insert by the Analysis Label and select {label}. This inserts the appropriate code label of the analysis variable into the table.
      • Type “scored as” into the Analysis Label field
      • Click Insert by the Analysis Label and select {score}. This inserts the score for that code into the table.
    3. Click OK to build the table.
    Table showing mean and t-test values

    Each cell in the table shows the number of respondents who ticked each particular age group and overall performance rating. The mean displays seven scores at the bottom of the table, which indicate the mean response for the base and for each age group. The mean score was set up so that good scores are positive and bad scores are negatives. (Excellent scores 5 through to Very Poor scoring -5). The Under 18 age group, showing a mean score of 1.98, indicates that they scored overall performance of the restaurant as good. The 55+ age group has the lowest mean score of -2.5 which represents an average score of poor.

    The t-test result displays 6 characters in each age group column representing the results of comparing the mean score value of one column with those of each other column. It indicates whether there is a significant result between the two means or whether it is just a chance result. For example, is it just chance that the under 18s scored highly compared to the 55+ or is this highly significant and will be a repeatable trend?

    Character

    Meaning

     

    No significant difference; a chance result.

    lower case character

    The difference is significant at the lower level of confidence.

    upper case character

    The difference is significant at the higher level of confidence.

    These levels of confidence can be changed on the Summary Statistics tab of the Analysis Definition dialog. Highlight t-test and alter the numbers in the Upper Level and Lower Level dialog boxes. A 99% level of confidence means that 99 times out of 100 this group of people will always score more highly. The 100 represents 100 surveys. With this level of confidence it is highly likely that the result is repeatable and not a random result.

    Summary Statistics tab in the Analysis definition dialog

    In the example table the “under 18” t-test result displays “-bCDEF”.

    • The first character place refers to itself (under 18s) and is represented with a hyphen; no significant difference is always recorded when comparing with itself.
    • The second character place displays a lower case ‘b’ indicating that the result is significant at 95% confidence between the under 18s and the 18-24s.
    • Character three place has a ‘C’ recorded which represents 25-34s and indicates a significant result. This result shows 99% confidence that the Under 18 age group will be more satisfied with the overall performance than the 25 to 34 age group. This result can also be seen with the next two age groups as capitals are displayed for D, E and F.

    Although the t-test is a reliable statistical method that allows you to analyse any major categories of respondents and see if the way they are responding is significantly different, when comparing more than two categories of data it can produce some unexpected results. Therefore when doing analysis across more than two categories of data it is advisable to apply Tukey’s Correction, which is available in the Summary statistics tab of the Analysis Definition dialog.

    The post Using t-tests in tables appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Calculating median scores https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/calculating-median-scores/ Tue, 20 Oct 2020 14:24:42 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2840 The following example uses the Crocodile Rock Cafe Survey. Question 6a is an attitude questions using a rating scale of very good to very poor coded 1 to 5. Click to display the Analysis Definition dialog box. Specify the Analysis as Q6e, Choice of food. Specify the Break as Q11, Age range. Click on the […]

    The post Calculating median scores appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The following example uses the Crocodile Rock Cafe Survey. Question 6a is an attitude questions using a rating scale of very good to very poor coded 1 to 5.

    1. Click AnalysisTblIcon.png to display the Analysis Definition dialog box.
    2. Specify the Analysis as Q6e, Choice of food.
    3. Specify the Break as Q11, Age range.
    4. Click on the Summary Statistics tab.
    5. Highlight Median from the ‘Available’ list and click > to add it to the Used column. You can position the Median scores above the body of the table by using the Move Up button.
    6. Click OK to display the table.
    Table showing median values of ratings by age

    Remember that calculating the median means finding the mid-point. In this example 65 respondents are 25-34; therefore the mid-point is 32. The 32nd respondent in that age group responded ‘Good’ so the median is ‘Good’. 72 respondents are 35-44 and the mid-point is 36. The 36th respondent comes within the responses of ‘OK’ and the median is therefore ‘OK’.

    You can add a score to the table by checking the Scored box. The median will be calculated using the score displayed.

    The post Calculating median scores appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Calculating mean scores after banding a quantity variable https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/calculating-mean-scores/ Tue, 20 Oct 2020 14:20:16 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2828 The following example uses the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey supplied with Snap XMP Desktop. Question 8 is an attitude question, asking respondents to rate their experience on a scale of 1 (poor) to 10 (excellent). It is a quantity variable, so to find out how many people entered each value, it must be banded into […]

    The post Calculating mean scores after banding a quantity variable appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The following example uses the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey supplied with Snap XMP Desktop. Question 8 is an attitude question, asking respondents to rate their experience on a scale of 1 (poor) to 10 (excellent). It is a quantity variable, so to find out how many people entered each value, it must be banded into the different values, using a derived variable. You can then display the results as a frequency table.

    You can calculate the mean scores of the banded variable by scoring it, so that the different codes in the derived variables are matched back to numeric values. Open the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey.

    1. Click WeightsIcon.png to display the Weights Window.
    2. Click NewSurveyIcon.png to add a new weight (score10) and specify the weight matrix as:
    Weight Details dialog
    1. You can use other scoring values if you wish. For example 100, 90, 80, etc.
    2. Click VariablesIcon.png to display the Variables window.
    3. Click NewSurveyIcon.png to add a new variable.
    4. Specify the Variable Details for derived variable which bands Q8 into ten codes. The example shown labels the bands as 1 to 10, but you could label them Poor to Excellent.
    Derived variable to calculate Attitude to cafe
    1. Click AnalysisTblIcon.png to display the Analysis Definition dialog box.
    2. Enter your new derived variable in the Analysis.
    3. Specify the Break as Q11, age range.
    4. Click the Summary Statistics tab.
    5. Double-click Mean in the left-hand column to add it to the list of statistics.
    6. A box appears for you to score the mean. Specify the Score as your new score (score10).
    Summary Statistics tab in the Analysis definition dialog
    1. Click on the Base/Labels tab. Because the analysis variable has been scored, change the Analysis labels to make this obvious on the table.
    2. Click Insert by the Analysis label and select {label}. This inserts the appropriate code label of the analysis variable into the table.
    3. Type “scored as” into the Analysis label field.
    4. Click Insert by the Analysis label and select {score}. This inserts the score for that code into the table.
    Heading and label definitions
    1. Click OK to create the table.
    Tables showing mean values for weighted attitude scores by age

    The post Calculating mean scores after banding a quantity variable appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Weight reports https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/weight-reports/ Tue, 20 Oct 2020 10:13:32 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2824 Click on to display the Weight Report dialog box. A default report title is entered which you can update with a more suitable title. This dialog has three different report formats: Detailed, single column Produces a report showing all the elements of each weight, as specified in the Weight Details window, in a single column […]

    The post Weight reports appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Click on Print button to display the Weight Report dialog box.

    Print the weight details

    A default report title is entered which you can update with a more suitable title.

    This dialog has three different report formats:

    • Detailed, single column
    • Produces a report showing all the elements of each weight, as specified in the Weight Details window, in a single column format
    • Detailed, double column
    • Produces a report showing all the elements of each weight, as specified in the Weight Details window, in a double column format
    • Summary
    • Produces an overview-type report that matches the data in the Weights Window

    The report settings can be changed by selecting Setup. Click Print and the report will be printed.

    The post Weight reports appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Using weights to calculate the difference in rating https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-weights-calculate-rating-difference/ Tue, 20 Oct 2020 10:11:10 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2812 Sometimes Weights are used as part of a calculation. They give different scores to the responses, so you can convert a variable code into another value for calculation. You can use weights to subtract the negative from the positive values of a rating scale variable. By using this data in a statistics table, you can […]

    The post Using weights to calculate the difference in rating appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Sometimes Weights are used as part of a calculation. They give different scores to the responses, so you can convert a variable code into another value for calculation.

    You can use weights to subtract the negative from the positive values of a rating scale variable. By using this data in a statistics table, you can see whether the ratings were generally positive or negative.

    This example assumes a five-code scale, in which the middle value is neutral, such as Q6a (speed of service). Because the rating scale only contains counts of responses, you need to set up a derived variable in order to calculate the statistics of the scored response.

    1. Click WeightsIcon.png to display the Weights window.
    2. Click NewSurveyIcon.png to add a new weight and specify the Weight Details as follows:
      • Name: WT6
      • Label: Weight pos/neg
      • Decimal places: 0
      • Number of codes: 5
    3. Specify the Code Details:
    Weight details dialog
    1. Click SaveIcon.png to save the Weight.
    2. Click VariablesIcon.png to display the Variables window.
    3. Click NewSurveyIcon.png to add a new variable.
    4. Specify the Variable Details:
      • Name: V10
      • Label: Calculated difference
      • Type: Derived (the variable will derive its data from other existing variables).
      • Response: Quantity (the response will be a numeric value for each case).
    5. Specify the Code Details to combine the Weight with the Speed of service rating variable:

    Code

    Code Label

    Value

    OK

    Valid

    WT6(Q6.a)

    1. Click on SaveIcon.png to save the variable.
    2. Click AnalysisTblIcon.png to display the Analysis Definition dialog to create a table.
    3. Specify the Analysis as V10, which is the variable to be weighted.
    4. Select Statistics table from the list for the Break (or enter STATS).
    5. Click OK and the table will be built.

    The Sum will be the difference between the positive and negative values.

    Descriptive statistics for calculated differences

    The post Using weights to calculate the difference in rating appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Using a weight to convert responses into numerical values https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-weight-to-convert-into-numerical/ Tue, 20 Oct 2020 10:05:03 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2801 You may wish to further analyse questions by converting the response given into a numerical score, and using this to provide summaries of respondents’ answers. The example shows how to convert a ratings scale into a numerical value, so you can get an average value for the qualities that are being rated. The questions to […]

    The post Using a weight to convert responses into numerical values appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You may wish to further analyse questions by converting the response given into a numerical score, and using this to provide summaries of respondents’ answers. The example shows how to convert a ratings scale into a numerical value, so you can get an average value for the qualities that are being rated.

    The questions to be scored are 6.a to 6.e in the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey.

    1. To check which question this is, open the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey and scroll down to question 6.
    Grid rating question
    1. Click VariablesIcon.png or press Ctrl+R to open the variables window.
    2. Find the grid questions and look at the Code list so you know which labels seen by the respondent are assigned to which codes.
    Variable code list
    1. Open the Weights window by clicking WeightsIcon.png or pressing Ctrl+W.
    2. Click NewSurveyIcon.png to add a new weight and specify the Weight Details as follows:
      • Name: scoreSat
      • Label: Satisfaction score -2 to +2
      • Decimal places: 3
      • Number of codes: 5
    3. Specify the Code Details
    Weight code list
    1. Click SaveIcon.png to save your weight.

    Using the score in analysis

    1. Click AnalysisTblIcon.png to open the Analysis Definition window for a table.
    2. Set the analysis value to be Q6.a ~Q6.e (this includes all questions from Q.6a to Q6.e)
    3. Select the Summary Statistics tab and move Mean from the Available column into the Used column. Type the name of your score (scoreSat) in the Summary Score box. This tells Snap to create a summary of your analysis, scoring the codes with the specified values.
    4. Click OK to display the table.
    5. There is a column displaying the mean scored values.
    Table using weight for a grid question analysis

    The top line (Base) shows the total number of all respondents for all the questions. The mean satisfaction of everyone with all the services is 0.13.

    The other rows show the average satisfaction for each service. You can see that people are generally positive about the Cleanliness, Quality of food and Choice of food and unhappy about the Speed of Service and Parking.

    Including Don’t Know responses

    When the question contains a Don’t Know response you can choose to include these responses in your analysis or exclude these responses from the analysis.

    • Including the response add a score, such as 0, for the code associated with the Don’t Know response
    • Excluding the response set the score to NR to give it a score of No Reply. This means that it won’t affect the analysis

    The post Using a weight to convert responses into numerical values appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Increasing or decreasing the size of a sample group https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/change-size-of-sample-group/ Tue, 20 Oct 2020 09:49:18 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2791 You could change the size of the sample group in the same way that you changed the proportions (balance) of a sample group. You would only need to choose different target figures (e.g. set the target number of males to be 150 and set the target number of females to be 100). If you simply […]

    The post Increasing or decreasing the size of a sample group appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You could change the size of the sample group in the same way that you changed the proportions (balance) of a sample group. You would only need to choose different target figures (e.g. set the target number of males to be 150 and set the target number of females to be 100).

    If you simply want to increase or decrease the number of cases in the survey, you could follow the steps below, which divides the target number by the actual number. In the example below, 384 is the actual number of respondents and 500 is the target number:

    1. Click VariablesIcon.png to display the Variables window.
    2. Click NewSurveyIcon.png to add a new variable.
    3. Specify the Variable Details:
      • Name: V8
      • Label: Inflated cases
      • Type: Derived (the variable will derive its data from other existing variables).
      • Response: Quantity (the response will be a numeric value for each case).
      • Decimals: To access the Decimals field, click on ToggleDefnIcon.PNG . Change the figure from 0 to 3.
    4. Specify the Code Details to calculate the higher base. As with the creation of a weight, the calculation is going to divide the target figure by the actual figure.

    Code

    Code Label

    Value

    OK

    Valid

    500/384

    Derived variable used to inflate size of a sample group
    1. Click SaveIcon.png to save the variable.
    2. Click AnalysisTblIcon.png to display the Analysis Definition dialog to create a table.
    3. Specify the Analysis as Q2, which is the variable to be weighted.
    4. Specify the Weight as V8.
    Analysis Definition using a weight
    1. Click OK and the weighted table will be built.

    The inclusion of the weight will multiply the number of respondents in each response code by the value in V8.

    You may also need to set the Decimal Places of Calculations to 3 to avoid rounding errors. Select the Cells tab on the Analysis Definition dialog and alter the Calculations d.p. number, if required.

    The post Increasing or decreasing the size of a sample group appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Using RIM weighting to balance sample proportions https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/changing-balance-of-sample-group/ Tue, 20 Oct 2020 09:43:44 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2780 Balancing the sample of data responses allows you to adjust the proportion of respondents in your sample to match more closely the proportion in the target population. This target may align the demographics of the respondents to those in a census or an industry benchmark. For example, you can balance the age of respondents to […]

    The post Using RIM weighting to balance sample proportions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Balancing the sample of data responses allows you to adjust the proportion of respondents in your sample to match more closely the proportion in the target population. This target may align the demographics of the respondents to those in a census or an industry benchmark. For example, you can balance the age of respondents to match the age ranges recorded in the local country’s census. You can also set the proportions to show an even distribution for each age range.

    In Snap XMP, RIM weighting provides the ability to set target totals for one or more variable so you can achieve, as closely as possible, a target distribution of results across the survey’s data.

    Assessing sample proportions

    First, use an analysis table to view the proportions of the survey dataset.

    1. Click Analysis Table AnalysisTblIcon.png to display the Analysis Definition for a table.
    2. In Analysis, enter the variable that you want to balance, for example, age ranges. Make sure Counts is selected as well as Respondents on the Base/Labels tab.
    3. Click Apply to display the table.

    Creating the RIM Weight

    Next, create the RIM weight to change the proportion of each age range.

    1. Click Analysis Variables  to open the Analysis Variables window.
    2. Click New Analysis Variables Item  , which displays a menu of analysis variable types to choose from.
    3. Click New RIM Weight to open the RIM Weight window. Note there is an initial error in the status bar as there are no variables references yet.
    4. In Name, enter a name which describes the RIM weight.
    5. In Label, enter a description of the RIM weight.
    1. Click Add Variable  to open the Select Variable dialog.
    2. In the Name drop-down, select the age range variable as the weighting variable, and click OK.

    The grid shows the ratio, expected count and percentage as well as the actual count and percentage.

    Even distribution example

    This example creates an even distribution for each age range.

    In Target total, select Valid cases the required option. Valid cases bases the RIM weight on the valid data responses in the survey. The default ratio is 1 to give an equal distribution for all variable codes. 

    After entering the ratios you need to build the RIM weight.

    Demographic distribution example

    This example creates a distribution based on a census result.

    Age rangePopulation (millions)
    Under 1812.6
    18 to 24 years5.5
    25 to 39 years12.0
    40 to 59 years15.6
    60 plus14.5

    In Target total, select Valid cases the required option. Valid cases bases the RIM weight on the valid data responses in the survey. The default ratio is 1 to give an equal distribution for all variable codes. 

    Change the ratio to that of the population for each age range.

    After entering the ratios you need to build the RIM weight.

    Build the RIM Weight

    The status of the RIM Weight displays in the status bar at the bottom of the RIM Weight window. When the RIM Weight is created the status shows as Not built.

    1. Click Build RIM Weight  on the RIM Weight toolbar to build the RIM weight.
    2. The Status changes to show Built. If there is an error in the RIM weight the status bar will show an error message and the RIM weight is not built.
    3. Click Save  to save the RIM weight.

    If the survey receives more responses after you have built the RIM weight, then you will need to rebuild the RIM weight manually as the weight is not updated automatically.

    Using the RIM Weight

    Create the table analysis using the RIM weight to change the proportions of the sample group.

    1. Open the Analysis table created for the age range.
    2. In Weight, enter the name of the RIM weight.
    1. Click OK to build the rim-weighted analysis.
    Table showing an even distribution of age ranges
    Table with RIM weight for census population distribution

    The RIM weight can be saved and used on any other table or chart.

    The post Using RIM weighting to balance sample proportions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Counting items other than respondents https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/counting-items-other-than-respondents/ Tue, 20 Oct 2020 09:39:18 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2774 The following example uses the Crocodile Rock Cafe Survey. A table is weighted to show the results for each member of the party rather than for the party as a whole. Click to display the Analysis Definition dialog box. Specify the Analysis as Q6a to build a table of Q6a, “How do you rate the […]

    The post Counting items other than respondents appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The following example uses the Crocodile Rock Cafe Survey. A table is weighted to show the results for each member of the party rather than for the party as a whole.

    1. Click AnalysisTblIcon.png to display the Analysis Definition dialog box.
    2. Specify the Analysis as Q6a to build a table of Q6a, “How do you rate the speed of service?”
    3. Specify the Weight as Q3a, “How many people were in your party today?”
    Analysis Definition using a weight
    1. Click OK and the weighted table will be built.
    Table using weights for a rating question

    The inclusion of the weight will multiply the number of respondents in each response code by the value in Q3a for each respondent, namely the number of adults in the party.

    The table shows the Unweighted Base and the Weighted Base. The Unweighted Base can be excluded using the Tailor | Analysis option.

    The post Counting items other than respondents appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Using weights https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-weights/ Tue, 20 Oct 2020 09:37:29 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2767 A Weight may be used in several different ways: To create means in mean score tables To count items other than respondents, such as, amounts of money To change the proportions/balance of a sample group To increase/decrease the size of a sample group As part of a calculation Multiple Response variables cannot be weighted and […]

    The post Using weights appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    A Weight may be used in several different ways:

    • To create means in mean score tables
    • To count items other than respondents, such as, amounts of money
    • To change the proportions/balance of a sample group
    • To increase/decrease the size of a sample group
    • As part of a calculation

    Multiple Response variables cannot be weighted and you cannot use more than one Weight in a table.

    When tables have weights applied to them, and statistics produced, such as significances and confidence intervals, they are calculated using the weighted data not the unweighted.

    Defining a weight

    Weights consist of a series of codes. They should have the same number of codes as the variable that you are applying the weight to.

    1. Click WeightsIcon.png to display the Weights window.
    2. Click NewSurveyIcon.png to add a new weight or VariablePropsIcon.png on the Weights window toolbar to display the Weight Details dialog for an existing weight.

    The image below shows a weight used to transform a five-code rating score into positive and negative values.

    Weight details dialog
    1. Enter a unique name in the Name field.
    2. Enter a description of your weight in the Label field.
    3. Enter the number of decimal places used in a calculation in the Decimal places field.
    4. Enter the Value for each code in your weight. (Press Tab to create a new code). If you wish to exclude a variable code from the weighting, (e.g.”Don’t Know”) set its value to NA.
    5. Click SaveIcon.png to save the weight.

    The post Using weights appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Creating a simple means chart of your semantic scale question https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/analysing-semantic-scale-with-charts/ Mon, 19 Oct 2020 12:34:59 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2747 This example shows how to produce a chart of the means of a grid of semantic scale questions. It uses the example pictured below (Q7.a to Q7.c) Click to display the Analysis Definition dialog for a chart. Select the style Horizontal Bar Counts Transposed in the dropdown list of Styles. Browse for the style if […]

    The post Creating a simple means chart of your semantic scale question appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    This example shows how to produce a chart of the means of a grid of semantic scale questions. It uses the example pictured below (Q7.a to Q7.c)

    Semantic Scale question
    1. Click AnalysisChartIcon.png to display the Analysis Definition dialog for a chart.
    2. Select the style Horizontal Bar Counts Transposed in the dropdown list of Styles. Browse for the style if it is not visible
    3. Add the semantic scale grid variables to the Analysis field. You can add the whole set in the form Q7.a to Q7.c, or you can add individual questions separated by commas.
    4. Select Statistics table from the dropdown list in the Break field (or type STATS in the field, in upper or lower case).
    Analysis Definition for a chart showing the statistics for a semantic scale question
    1. Click the Descriptive Statistics tab.
    2. Show only the Mean in the Used pane.
    3. Click OK to build the chart.

    The result is a bar chart showing the mean values of the responses recorded for each of the variables.

    Chart showing mean values for a semantic scale question

    Editing the style of your semantic scale chart

    If you have created a semantic scale chart using the Horizontal Bar Counts style, you will need to make some adjustments to it to make it appropriate for a semantic scale chart.

    You will need to set the axis to have the same values as your semantic scale, and improve the label display

    1. Click anywhere along the bottom axis to open the appropriate section of the chart designer.
    Chart showing mean values for a semantic scale question
    1. The chart designer window opens with the Y-axis highlighted.
    2. Clear the Automatic scale box.
    3. Set the Minimum value of the scale to 1.
    4. Set the Maximum value of the scale to the number of codes in your semantic scale (5 in this example).
    5. Set the value of the Major divisions to the number of codes in your semantic scale (5 in this example).
    Chart Designer dialog
    1. Click OK to apply the changes to your chart and close the chart designer.
    Chart showing mean values for a semantic scale question
    1. Save your style changes to use again by right-clicking the chart and selecting Save style and choosing a name and a folder for your new style.

    Creating a break-down chart of your semantic scale question

    This example shows how to produce a chart of the means of a grid of semantic scale questions broken down by gender. It assumes that you have created a semantic chart style as described in Editing the style of your semantic scale chart.

    1. Click AnalysisChartIcon.png to display the Analysis Definition dialog box for a chart.
    2. Set the style to Horizontal Bar Counts Transposed.
    3. Add the semantic scale grid variables to the Analysis field. You can add the whole set in the form Q7.a to Q7.c or you can add individual questions separated by commas.
    4. Set the Break field to the variable that you wish to use to break down your responses (Q12, gender in this example).
    5. Check the Transpose box.
    6. Set the Calculate field to Means & Significances (any of the Means options will do here).
    Analysis Definition for a chart
    1. Select the Cells tab and set the number of decimal places for the Means to 2. This makes the data comparable to previous examples.
    2. Click Apply to create your chart.
    3. Click the labelled axis and set the values to your semantic scale maximum code value as described in Editing the style of your semantic scale chart.

    The result is a bar chart showing the semantic scale responses broken down by gender.

    Chart showing mean values for a semantic scale question

    The post Creating a simple means chart of your semantic scale question appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Creating tables of your semantic scale question https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/analysing-semantic-scale-with-tables/ Mon, 19 Oct 2020 12:30:44 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2736 This example shows how to produce holecount and means tables of the responses to a grid of semantic scale questions. It uses the example pictured below from the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey (Q7.a to Q7.c). Producing a holecount table This allows you to see quickly how many people have chosen each response. Click to display […]

    The post Creating tables of your semantic scale question appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    This example shows how to produce holecount and means tables of the responses to a grid of semantic scale questions. It uses the example pictured below from the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey (Q7.a to Q7.c).

    Semantic Scale question

    Producing a holecount table

    This allows you to see quickly how many people have chosen each response.

    1. Click AnalysisTblIcon.png to display the Analysis Definition dialog for a table.
    2. Add the semantic scale grid variables to the Analysis field. You can add the whole set in the form Q7.a to Q7.c, or you can add individual questions separated by commas.
    3. Select Holecount table from the dropdown list in the Break field (or type HOLECOUNT or COUNT in the field, in upper or lower case).
    4. If you wish, select the Analysis percents option to display the percentage choosing each response.
    Analysis Definition showing a holecount table for a semantic scale question
    1. Click OK to build the chart.

    The result is a table showing the number of responses recorded for each of the choices. The example below also shows the analysis percentages.

    Holecount table for a semantic scale quesiton

    Producing a means table

    A means table gives the average response for each scale question.

    1. Click AnalysisTblIcon.png to display the Analysis Definition dialog for a table.
    2. Add the semantic scale grid variables to the Analysis field. You can add the whole set in the form Q7.a to Q7.c, or you can add individual questions separated by commas.
    3. Select Statistics table from the dropdown list in the Break field (or type STATS in the field, in upper or lower case).
    4. Check the Transpose box.
    Analysis Definition for a table showing the statistics for a semantic scale question
    1. Click the Descriptive Statistics tab.
    2. Show only the Mean in the Used pane.
    3. Set the number of decimal places to 2.
    Descriptive Statistics tab in the Analysis definition dialog
    1. Click OK to build the chart.

    The result is a table showing the means of the responses recorded for each scale.

    Table showing mean values for a semantic scale

    The post Creating tables of your semantic scale question appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Creating a Map showing age group data using graphics https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/creating-map-using-graphic/ Fri, 16 Oct 2020 10:05:06 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2712 This example describes how to show a ratings scale by age, with the age data conveyed in the graphic, and the satisfaction statistics displayed by color. It uses the questions available in the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey. Adding graphics to represent each age group In the Crocodile survey, these are: Under 18 18 – 24 […]

    The post Creating a Map showing age group data using graphics appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    This example describes how to show a ratings scale by age, with the age data conveyed in the graphic, and the satisfaction statistics displayed by color.

    It uses the questions available in the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey.

    Adding graphics to represent each age group

    1. Create an image representing the different age groups used to classify respondents.
    Graphic showing available age ranges

    In the Crocodile survey, these are:

    Under 18

    18 – 24

    25 – 34

    35 – 44

    45 – 54

    Over 55

    1. Ensure that you have enough space to display the analysis data on the image. The size of the image will be the size of your Map.
    2. Save the image file in a known place (eg styles/map/age_pic.gif)
    3. Click AnalysisTblIcon.png to define the analysis.
      • Enter Q9 (age) in the Analysis field.
      • Select Means and Significances in the drop-down list. Enter Q6a (speed of service satisfaction rating) in the field for the variable for which the mean is calculated. (If you wished to score the mean, you would enter the score in the field after the variable name, e.g. q6.a score5).
    4. Click OK to save the table. Keep the window open for reference while creating your Map.
    5. Select the table in the Analyses window and click Clone button on the toolbar to duplicate the analysis.
    6. Select Map in the Type list.
    7. Select <Create new style> from the dropdown list of styles. The Map Control Editor opens.
    8. Select File|Import image and browse for the image you have created.
    9. Click IM: square button to select the square tool, and draw a square under one of your figures.
    Map editor for analysis showing age figures
    1. Use Copy and Paste to duplicate the square until there is one under each figure.
    2. Select each square in turn and select Shape|Assign to code. Select the appropriate code for the figure. (You can also right-click the shape and assign codes from the context menu.)
    Assigning code to an age code image

    As you assign codes, the analysis data will automatically be calculated and used to fill the square.

    Assigning RGB colors and legends for the least and most satisfied age groups

    1. Click IM: Fill button to open the Map Control Editor Fill series dialog.
    Set the shading for the map control
    1. Select RGB as the color model. This means that intermediate colors will be calculated as if you were moving round the colors in a rainbow.
    2. Select Continuous as the Data Mode. This means that every value will be assigned a color according to its data value.
    3. Click the color buttons to assign colors to represent the maximum and minimum values.
    4. Select Legend in the left-hand pane.
    Set the location of the labels in a map control
    1. Check the Visible box to display the Legend, and select one of the radio buttons to position it.
    2. Click the Labels tab.
    3. You will have the same number of labels fields as colors listed in the Shading window. By default the text for each color is the value it represents. Add some text to identify what the Map is displaying.
    Set the labels for a map control
    1. Click OK.
    2. When you have finished defining the Map, select File|Save map control and save your Map as an .isf file.
    3. Click OK to display the completed Map analysis.

    The post Creating a Map showing age group data using graphics appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Creating a Map showing ratings scale by area (based on a map graphic) https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/creating-a-map-for-ratings-scale/ Fri, 16 Oct 2020 10:01:01 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2701 This example describes how to show a ratings scale by area, with the area data conveyed in the graphic, and the satisfaction statistics displayed by color. It assumes that: You already have a Map Control Editor style representing the country with the different areas defined. The respondents’ area is stored in Q11 and their satisfaction […]

    The post Creating a Map showing ratings scale by area (based on a map graphic) appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    This example describes how to show a ratings scale by area, with the area data conveyed in the graphic, and the satisfaction statistics displayed by color.

    It assumes that:

    • You already have a Map Control Editor style representing the country with the different areas defined.
    • The respondents’ area is stored in Q11 and their satisfaction level is stored in Q7.
    1. Click AnalysisTblIcon.png to define the analysis.
      • Enter the area variable (Q11) in the Analysis field.
      • Select Means and Significances in the drop-down list. Enter the satisfaction variable (Q7) in the field for the variable for which the mean is calculated.
    Analysis definition for a map control

    (If you wished to score the mean, you would enter the score in the field after the variable name, e.g. q6.a score5).

    1. Click OK to save the table. Keep the window open for reference while creating your Map.
    2. Select the table in the Analyses dialog and click CloneSurveyIcon.png on the toolbar to duplicate the analysis.
    3. Select Map in the Type list.
    4. Select the saved style file from the dropdown list of styles.
    5. Double-click the Map window to open the Map Control Editor.
    Scotland selected in UK satisfaction map
    1. Click on each area in turn and confirm that the code assignment displayed at the bottom of the window is correct
    2. If the codes have not been pre-defined, select each area in turn and select Shape|Assign to code. Select the appropriate code for the figure. (You can also right-click the shape and assign codes from the context menu.)

    Assigning colors to your areas and displaying a legend

    1. Click IM: Fill button to open the Map Control Editor Fill series dialog.
    Set the shading for the map control
    1. Select HSL as the color model. This means that intermediate colors will be calculated using a traffic light scheme.
    2. Select Stepped as the Data Mode. This means that only the colors listed will be seen.
    3. Click the NewSurveyIcon.png button twice to add two new data points. There will now be four satisfaction levels displayed. From the table, you know that the maximum satisfaction level is nine and the minimum is three. The extra two data points will be equidistant between the maximum and minimum (5 and 7). Because the Data Mode is Stepped, the areas will be colored according to the nearest data point value, e.g, 4.3 will be classified as 5.
    4. Select Legend in the left-hand pane.
    Set the location of the labels in a map control
    1. Check the Visible box to display the Legend, and select one of the radio buttons to position it.
    2. Click the Labels tab.
    3. You will have the same number of labels fields as colors in the Shading window. By default the text for each is the value it represents. Add some text to identify what the Map is displaying.
    4. Click OK.
    5. When you have finished defining the Map, select File|Save map control and save your Map as a new .isf file. (If you do not save it as a separate file, it will still be stored in your survey, but will not be available to any other surveys or analyses.)
    6. Click OK to display the completed Map analysis.
    UK area analysis

    The post Creating a Map showing ratings scale by area (based on a map graphic) appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Creating a Map for analysis using an existing style https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/creating-a-map-using-style/ Fri, 16 Oct 2020 09:56:27 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2693 Select the Analysis Map toolbar button. The Analysis Definition dialog will be displayed. Specify the variable you wish to display as a Map in the analysis field. Select an existing style or click Browse to search for a style that is not in the list. Click Apply to display the map in the Analysis Display […]

    The post Creating a Map for analysis using an existing style appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
  • Select the AnalysisMapIcon.png Analysis Map toolbar button.
  • The Analysis Definition dialog will be displayed.
  • Analysis Definition of a map for a grid question
    1. Specify the variable you wish to display as a Map in the analysis field.
    2. Select an existing style or click Browse to search for a style that is not in the list.
    3. Click Apply to display the map in the Analysis Display window.
    4. Double-click the new map or click StyleModeIcon.png to open the Map Control Editor.
    Map Control Editor
    1. Click a defined area to select it. You can then make changes to it such as assigning it to a different code.
    2. Click IM: pen button to specify how the areas are outlined.
    3. Click IM: Fill button to make any changes to the legend or the colors that will fill the specified areas (shaded from maximum to minimum). The Fill definition applies to all areas, as it represents the calculated analysis values.
    4. When your changes are complete, select File|Save map control to save your Map as a re-usable style file.
    5. Select File|Exit or click OK to go back to the analysis window.

    Changing the code assignments

    1. Within the Map Control Editor, click an area to select it.
    2. Right-click and select Assign to code from the context menu, then select the code you wish to associate with this area. You may associate the same code with multiple areas.

    Changing the area shapes

    Within the Map Control Editor, click an area to select it.

    • Drag the area handles (white squares) to change the size and proportions of a shape.
    • Right-click and select Shape type to change the shape type.
    • If the shape type is a polygon, you can add or delete point by right-clicking a point and selecting Add Point or Delete Point from the context menu.

    The post Creating a Map for analysis using an existing style appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Overview of maps https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/overview-maps/ Fri, 16 Oct 2020 09:52:08 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2691 A Map allows you to display the means or counts for a multi-choice or grid variable in a graphical format. You can associate one or more areas of an image with each of the question codes. The areas are colored according to the number of cases where that response is selected. These can be used […]

    The post Overview of maps appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    A Map allows you to display the means or counts for a multi-choice or grid variable in a graphical format. You can associate one or more areas of an image with each of the question codes. The areas are colored according to the number of cases where that response is selected.

    These can be used in conjunction with data which has been gathered using a Map Control in the questionnaire or with data gathered or calculated in any other way.

    For example, you could have a picture showing the areas of a city and color each one according to the number of respondents living there. You can specify the colors used for the highest and lowest values, and how the color changes in between.

    You should note that there is only benefit in using a map analysis if the picture contributes something to the analysis. This means that the location of the areas within the picture has meaning (for example, a city map). If the graphics could be replaced by a simple list, then the analysis could be equally well displayed as a bar chart.

    Maps in detail

    Maps can only display analysis data for questions with single or multiple responses.

    You can specify, counts, percentages, means or sums as the type of data to be displayed.

    You specify which area(s) of an image to associate with each variable code, and how the areas will be colored according to the data related to each code.

    You can set a color for the highest value (max) and the lowest value (min), and the intermediate colors will be calculated according to the data value for each code.

    Maps consist of:

    • a background image
    • the defined areas of the image, and the response codes they are associated with
    • the way the colors change according to the statistical data for each code.

    Maps for analysis are defined in the Map Control Editor. Details for creating a Map Control can be found at Hyperlink here.

    Note that the usefulness of a Map in analysis is entirely dependent on whether the area of the image has a meaning related to the specified response code. If the image areas and the response codes have no natural relation, then you would probably be better off using a bar chart.

    When you create a Map style for analysis, it has a different function from the Map Control styles used in the questionnaire window.

    This is because the image must convey information about the response codes, even when filled with a color that represents a calculated number (e.g. the mean).

    You can either:

    • use an image, such as a map, where the shapes are instantly recognisable and identifiable through outline and location in the picture.
    • use an image which shows what the response codes mean, but displays the analysis information separately.

    The post Overview of maps appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Word cloud appearance https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/word-cloud-appearance/ Fri, 16 Oct 2020 09:50:23 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2687 You can change the way your word cloud looks by selecting a different style, or by adjusting the style using the Cloud style dialog. To adjust the style, right-click or press F2 in a cloud window and select Edit Style from the context menu. The Cloud Style dialog opens. By default it will show the […]

    The post Word cloud appearance appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can change the way your word cloud looks by selecting a different style, or by adjusting the style using the Cloud style dialog.

    1. To adjust the style, right-click or press F2 in a cloud window and select Edit Style from the context menu. The Cloud Style dialog opens. By default it will show the Plot aspect. This will look slightly different if you have created your cloud from a cross-tab.
    Cloud style dialog
    1. Click the Font button to change the font used in your word cloud.
    2. Select Solid and then a background color if you wish your word cloud to appear on a colored background. The font and background are previewed at the bottom right of the dialog.
    3. Change the Angles to switch the words in your cloud from being written horizontally to vertically.
    4. Change Randomness to change the way that words are laid out in the word cloud. A high value will give slightly rounder look.

    Changing color size and opacity of the words in your cloud

    The colors in your word cloud will vary between the colors selected in the palette.

    • Change the value in Palette to change the number of different ranges used in your word cloud. The colors used for words in the cloud graduate between the colors in the palette. If you want the colours to be distinct, you will need to add a color for each code (or the number in the Limit codes field in your definition)
    • The colors in the palette are listed (Palette1 to Palette6 in the dialog above). You can view and change a color in the palette by selecting it. Its current value can be seen and changed in the Colour list. (Custom in the dialog above).

    The preview of the words in your cloud are shown on the right of the dialog.

    Selecting the colors for a word cloud
    • Change the Size percentage to change the range of sizes in your word cloud. The size range is shown as the change in height of the colour area in the preview.
    • Change the Opacity percentage to change the range of transparency in your word cloud. The opacity range is shown from left to right in the preview.

    Change other aspects of the cloud

    You can add a title to your cloud by selecting Title in the Aspect list.

    You can add a backdrop to your cloud by selecting Backdrop in the Aspect list.

    The Legend aspect only applies to cross-tabulation clouds.

    Word cloud styles

    You can load an existing style by

    • selecting its name in the Style field of the Analysis Definition dialog when you define your cloud.
    • right-clicking or pressing F2 in the Analysis Display window with a cloud and select Load Style from the context menu.

    You can browse for any cloud style file (.wcsf file). Styles provided with Snap are stored in the Styles sub-directory from the main Snap program folder.

    Editing word cloud styles

    Edit the way the cloud looks by using the Cloud Style dialog.

    Saving word cloud styles

    If you have altered the appearance of a cloud and want to store this new design for future use, press F2 or right-click and select the Save Style option.

    The file name of the style used to create the original word cloud is used as the default in the Save Style As dialog box.

    Change the name in the File Name field, leaving the .wcsf extension. Click OK to save the style.

    The post Word cloud appearance appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Adjusting words displayed for an individual cloud https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/adjust-words-for-cloud/ Fri, 16 Oct 2020 09:46:06 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2679 It is best to duplicate a system-generated variable and then edit your new variable. You can then use this variable in analyses. Click to show the list of analysis variables. The dialog below shows the automatically created analysis variables starting AV.Q9. The AV part of the name tells you it is an auto category variable. […]

    The post Adjusting words displayed for an individual cloud appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    It is best to duplicate a system-generated variable and then edit your new variable. You can then use this variable in analyses.

    1. Click AnalysisVariablesIcon.png to show the list of analysis variables. The dialog below shows the automatically created analysis variables starting AV.Q9. The AV part of the name tells you it is an auto category variable. The next part is the name of the variable that it comes from, and the last part makes the variable unique.
    Analysis variables list
    1. Select the variable you wish to edit and click CloneSurveyIcon.png on the toolbar to make a copy of it.
    2. Double-click the new variable. The Auto Category Variable Details window opens. By default the codes are displayed in order.
    3. Change the name as required.
    4. Select ChooseCodesIcon.PNG Choose codes to display all possible codes. Categories that are not displayed in the word cloud appear with the category number in brackets. They are sorted by number of items.
    Auto Category variable details
    1. To stop a word being used in the word cloud, clear the Include box. Items that are not included are sent to the bottom of the list.
    2. You can sort the list by Label or number of items. Click on the appropriate column label to change the way the list is sorted.
    3. Click SaveIcon.png to save your new variable.

    Editing your analysis

    You now need to edit your analysis to use your new variable.

    1. Open the Analysis definition for your word cloud.
    2. Change the variable used in the Analysis field to your new auto category variable.

    The post Adjusting words displayed for an individual cloud appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Finding the auto category variables used by an analysis https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/finding-auto-category-variables-that-analysis-uses/ Fri, 16 Oct 2020 09:42:53 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2674 When a word cloud is created, an Analysis variable is created to hold the sorted word categories. You can find out which auto category variable is used by looking at the sources for an analysis Select the word cloud in the list of analyses. Click on the Analyses window toolbar to see what the sources […]

    The post Finding the auto category variables used by an analysis appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    When a word cloud is created, an Analysis variable is created to hold the sorted word categories. You can find out which auto category variable is used by looking at the sources for an analysis

    1. Select the word cloud in the list of analyses.
    2. Click SourceDependIcon.PNG on the Analyses window toolbar to see what the sources are, that is what items the analysis uses.
    List of Analyses
    1. The Sources/Dependents window opens. The associated system variable will be listed as a source.
    Sources and dependencies window

    The post Finding the auto category variables used by an analysis appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Changing the default stop words https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/changing-default-stop-words/ Fri, 16 Oct 2020 09:34:19 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2670 You may find that you want to exclude particular words from your word clouds. You can do this by changing the default stop word list. The stop word list consists of a text file consisting of all the words you want to exclude. Default stop word files are supplied for multiple languages. Note that if […]

    The post Changing the default stop words appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You may find that you want to exclude particular words from your word clouds. You can do this by changing the default stop word list.

    The stop word list consists of a text file consisting of all the words you want to exclude. Default stop word files are supplied for multiple languages.

    Note that if you are using a networked copy, the default stop word list will be on the server.

    Adding words to the default stop word list

    1. Select Tailor|Languages to open the Languages dialog. Select the language.
    2. Click the Stop Words… button to open the Stop Words dialog for the selected language.
    Stop Words dialog
    1. Type any words you wish to exclude in the Stop words field, separated by spaces.
    2. Click OK to save your changes.

    The post Changing the default stop words appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Creating a word cloud from a cross-tabulation https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/creating-word-cloud-cross-tab/ Fri, 16 Oct 2020 09:24:57 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2664 You can break your word cloud down by the responses to another variable. For example, this shows food orders by gender. Add a legend to your word cloud If you wish, you can change the font, font color and space around the legend. The legend is previewed at the bottom right of the dialog.

    The post Creating a word cloud from a cross-tabulation appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can break your word cloud down by the responses to another variable. For example, this shows food orders by gender.

    Sample word cloud by gender
    1. Click AnalysisCloudIcon.png on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar to create a cloud.
    2. Enter the variable definition in the Analysis field.
    3. Enter the variable used to break down the analysis in the Break field.
    4. Select the Auto Coding tab.
    5. Select Words or Values in the appropriate drop-down list(s) for the variables you are using. This will create categories based on the individual values in all the responses.
    6. Select the maximum number of values you would like in the cloud by changing the value in Limit codes.
    7. Press Apply to display the cloud.
    8. The cloud will select its number of colors according to the number of codes in the Break variable.

    Add a legend to your word cloud

    1. Open the Cloud Style dialog for your word cloud by
      • Right-click or press F2 and select Edit Style from the context menu
      • Click StyleModeIcon.png in the word cloud toolbar.
    2. Select Legend in the Aspect list.
    3. Select Visible.
    Word cloud style options
    1. Select the position of your legend using the Location radio buttons.

    If you wish, you can change the font, font color and space around the legend. The legend is previewed at the bottom right of the dialog.

    The post Creating a word cloud from a cross-tabulation appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Creating a word cloud of values, dates or times https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/creating-word-cloud-values/ Fri, 16 Oct 2020 09:20:53 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2661 You can create a word cloud of quantity, date or time responses using the cloud analysis type.

    The post Creating a word cloud of values, dates or times appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can create a word cloud of quantity, date or time responses using the cloud analysis type.

    1. Click AnalysisCloudIcon.png on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar to create a cloud.
    2. Enter the variable definition in the Analysis field.
    3. Select the Auto Coding tab.
    4. Select Values in the appropriate (Date, Time or Quantity) drop-down list if not selected. This will create categories based on the individual values in all the responses to that question.
    5. Select the maximum number of values you would like in the cloud by changing the value in Limit codes.
    6. Press Apply to display the cloud.

    The post Creating a word cloud of values, dates or times appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Creating a word cloud of literal responses https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/word-cloud-literal-responses/ Thu, 15 Oct 2020 13:30:04 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2654 You can create a word cloud of literal responses using the cloud analysis type. Setting up which words are shown in the cloud Because the words are collected from all responses, there may be some that are not helpful to have in your cloud. You can choose which words are shown in your cloud. You […]

    The post Creating a word cloud of literal responses appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can create a word cloud of literal responses using the cloud analysis type.

    1. Click AnalysisCloudIcon.png on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar to create a cloud.
    2. Enter the literal variable definition in the Analysis field.
    3. Select the Auto Coding tab.
    Analysis Definition for a word cloud
    1. Select Words in the Literal drop-down list if not selected. This will create categories based on all the words in all the responses to that question.
    2. Select Stop default words. This stops Snap using words like “and” and “the” as categories.
    3. Select the maximum number of words you would like in the cloud by changing the value in Limit codes.
    4. Press Apply to display the cloud.

    Setting up which words are shown in the cloud

    Because the words are collected from all responses, there may be some that are not helpful to have in your cloud. You can choose which words are shown in your cloud. You can do this in two ways:

    1. Add the words to the default Stop Words list. This means that the words will not be visible in any word clouds created automatically
    2. Adjust which words are displayed for an individual cloud. The best way to do this is to duplicate the automatically-created variable and then edit it to hide unwanted words. You can then use the new variable in analyses.

    The post Creating a word cloud of literal responses appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Overview of word clouds https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/word-clouds-overview/ Thu, 15 Oct 2020 13:27:59 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2650 Word clouds provide a quick way to see what responses are most common. The more common a term is, the larger it appears in the cloud. You can create word clouds from any type of variable. They are most often used for displaying open-ended literal responses to see how often particular words appear in comments. […]

    The post Overview of word clouds appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Word clouds provide a quick way to see what responses are most common. The more common a term is, the larger it appears in the cloud. You can create word clouds from any type of variable. They are most often used for displaying open-ended literal responses to see how often particular words appear in comments.

    Sample word cloud

    Word clouds allow you to display responses at different sizes, colours and opacity according to their frequency. The least frequent responses are displayed in the smallest and most transparent text.

    It is possible to combine variables into a single word cloud.

    You can break your word cloud down by the responses to another variable. For example, this shows food orders by gender.

    Sample word cloud by gender

    The post Overview of word clouds appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Displaying counts and percentage figures on a bar chart https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/display-barchart-counts-and-percent/ Wed, 14 Oct 2020 09:35:05 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2633 Bar charts normally display one value per bar. You can choose whether this is: the count (number of respondents who chose that response) the percentage (number of respondents as a percentage of the total) If you want to display both the counts and the percentage value, you need to pass in the counts and use […]

    The post Displaying counts and percentage figures on a bar chart appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Bar charts normally display one value per bar. You can choose whether this is:

    • the count (number of respondents who chose that response)
    • the percentage (number of respondents as a percentage of the total)

    If you want to display both the counts and the percentage value, you need to pass in the counts and use the Chart Designer to calculate the percentages from the counts.

    To ensure that the chart designer uses the number of respondents as its value for 100%, you must pass in a variable or variable code containing that value. This is done by creating a derived variable which has a code that is true for all respondents. This code then has a count value of the number of respondents.

    You can then exclude this code from the final bar chart. You can only exclude codes from terms in the Analysis field that have not been transposed.

    1. Click VariablesIcon.png on the Snap toolbar to open the Variables window.
    2. Select the variable you wish to chart. Here we are using Q2.
    3. Click CloneSurveyIcon.png on the Variables window toolbar to create a copy of the variable.
    4. Set the Type to Derived. (The values in this variable are derived from the answers to Q2.)
    5. Set the Name to V2Q2 to remind you that it is derived from Q2.
    6. Set the Response to Multiple, so that you can have more than one code selected.
    7. Select to the Values column for the first code Daily and enter Q2=1
    8. Repeat for the other codes in Q2.
    Derived variable to count the number of respondents
    1. Create an additional code and name it Hidden total. Set the value to TRUE.
    2. Click 1 2 3  button on the Variables window toolbar to check the number of responses for the parts of your new variable.
    3. You will get a message warning you that this will cause any changes to be kept. Click OK. The counts are displayed. The count for Hidden total should be the same as the base value in your table.
    4. Click SaveIcon.png to save your variable.

    Create the chart

    1. Click AnalysisChartIcon.png on the Snap toolbar to create a chart.
    2. Set the style to Horizontal Bar Counts and set the analysis to V2Q2.
    3. Check Counts.
    4. Click Apply to display your chart.
    5. Double click on the Hidden total bar to open the Chart Designer and check the Exclude series box to stop the display of that bar.
    6. In this type of chart, each of the bar heights is a datapoint in a series. In the left hand pane, double-click Series to open it, then Daily then select Datapoint Labels defaults.
    7. Select the Above Point radio button as the Text Location in the Appearance tab. This specifies where the counts and percentage figures will be placed.
    8. Check Value and Percent under the Datapoint Label. This will display the counts and percentage figures at the end of the bar.
    Chart designer showing the label appearance
    1. Repeat for the other series that you wish to display (Twice a week, Weekly and Monthly).
    2. Click Apply to display the new version of the chart.
    3. The percentage values are not correct as they have not been calculated using the Hidden total value. Select Y Axis in the left hand pane of the Chart Designer dialog.
    4. Select the Scale Type tab and select the Percent radio button.
    5. Select Category Maximum as the Percent base. This uses the highest count as the number to calculate the percentages from. In this chart, it is the value in Hidden total, the same as the respondent base.
    Chart designer showing the percent scale type
    1. Click Apply.
    Bar chart showing counts and percentages for frequency of visit

    Further changes can be made using the Chart Designer to give your chart the desired look.

    Change the way the labels on the y-axis are displayed

    1. Select Axis Labels under Y Axis in the left hand pane of the Chart Designer dialog.
    2. Select the Format tab in the right hand pane.
    3. Select 0% as the Format Code.
    Chart designer showing the axis labels format
    1. If you wish to make the y axis maximum 100%, select Y Axis in the left hand pane.
    2. Clear the Automatic box.
    3. Change the Maximum to 1.
    Chart designer showing the value scale
    1. Click OK.
    Chart showing counts and percentages for frequency of visit

    The post Displaying counts and percentage figures on a bar chart appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Creating a combination chart to display respondent means as points and bars https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/creating-combination-chart/ Wed, 14 Oct 2020 09:30:34 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2618 You can create a combination chart to compare the means of groups of respondents in a satisfaction survey with the mean responses of all respondents. This example uses the data provided in the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey supplied with Snap XMP Desktop to display the average satisfaction for men and women at the Crocodile Rock […]

    The post Creating a combination chart to display respondent means as points and bars appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can create a combination chart to compare the means of groups of respondents in a satisfaction survey with the mean responses of all respondents.

    This example uses the data provided in the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey supplied with Snap XMP Desktop to display the average satisfaction for men and women at the Crocodile Rock Cafe against the average satisfaction of all respondents. To make it obvious which the reference values are, they will be displayed as bars, whereas the individual means for men and women will be displayed as points.

    These instructions assume that you have created a derived variable that includes all respondents.

    Derived variable to count the number of respondents
    1. Click AnalysisChartIcon.png to open the Analysis Definition dialog.
    2. Change the Chart style to Bar counts.
    3. Set the Analysis field to Q6a~Q6e. This includes all the satisfaction questions (you can check what they are in the open Variables window).
    4. Set the Break field to V1: Q10. (V1 is your newly created derived variable, Q10 is the gender question.)
    5. Set the Calculate field to Means & Differences.
    6. Check the Transpose box under Options.
    Analysis definition for a bar chart
    1. Click OK. The chart window opens, displaying the defined bar chart.
    Bar chart showing the mean results by gender compared to all respondents
    1. Open the chart designer by clicking StyleModeIcon.png on the chart toolbar. The chart designer dialog appears.
    2. Highlight Chart in the left-hand pane if it not already selected. This is the section of the chart designer that defines the overall look of the chart.
    3. Ensure that the 2D radio button is selected and click Combination in the list of chart types.
    4. Click Apply to use these settings without closing the chart designer window.
    5. Select Series in the left-hand pane. This is the section of the chart designer dialog that deals with the display of the break and analysis data. This is where you specify that in the combination chart, you wish to display the All Respondents information as bars, and the data split by gender as lines.
      • Click All Respondents in the Series box and check that Bar is selected in the Display As box.
      • Select Male in the Series box and select Line in the Display As box, and repeat for Female.
      • Click Apply to use these settings without closing the chart designer window.
      • The visible chart should change to show a combination bar and line chart.
    Chart designer showing the series type for all respondents
    Combination chart showing points and bars
    1. The bars are in front of the lines, making it difficult to see them. Select Series in the left-hand pan again, and click the Order tab.
    2. Select All in the list and click the Down button twice to move it to behind the Male and Female displays.
    3. Click Apply. The chart updates to place the lines in front of the bars.

    Set the data point markers

    Now you have created a combination chart, you want to mark the points that represent the data values for men and women, instead of just having them as points where the lines angle.

    1. Click the Expand branch square icon by Series in the left-hand pane to show the list of the variable codes in the Break.
    2. Click the Expand branch square icon by Male or Female to show the list of controls for displaying the information for the selected data. Select Datapoint Defaults. This is where you specify how the datapoints will be displayed.
    Set the markers for the points of a combination chart
    1. Click the Markers tab to define the markers. (You can specify the line colour in the Fill tab.)
      • Check the Show markers box.
      • Set the Style as required. Here we have chosen Filled Square for Female and Filled Triangle for Male
      • Leave the Color, Size and Pen Width as they are.
      • Click Apply to update the chart.
    Combination chart showing points and bars
    Combination

    The post Creating a combination chart to display respondent means as points and bars appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Using gap analysis to interpret importance with satisfaction https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-gap-analysis/ Wed, 14 Oct 2020 09:17:33 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2607 Gap analysis shows the difference between how important attributes are to your respondents and how satisfied they are with those attributes. By comparing importance and satisfaction scores on your chart you can use gap analysis to identify priorities for improvement. If the importance bar is longer than the satisfaction one there may be a problem. […]

    The post Using gap analysis to interpret importance with satisfaction appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Gap analysis shows the difference between how important attributes are to your respondents and how satisfied they are with those attributes. By comparing importance and satisfaction scores on your chart you can use gap analysis to identify priorities for improvement.

    If the importance bar is longer than the satisfaction one there may be a problem.

    This example uses the Course Evaluation survey supplied with Snap.

    The questionnaire uses a 5-point scale for both importance and satisfaction ratings. (1= totally dissatisfied to 5= totally satisfied) and (1= not at all important to 5 = extremely important).

    Example of a rating grid question

    The gap analysis chart tells you how important various aspects of the service are to customers, compared with how satisfied customers actually are with particular attributes e.g. instructor and user guides. The gap is the mean score for the satisfaction rating subtracted from the mean score for the importance rating, e.g. Q7c-Q6c.

    Chart showing the gap analysis for each aspect

    If the mean score of a service is positive (above zero),

    • Respondents rate the service as very important but they are not satisfied with the service they are receiving. In this instance, action is required.

    If the score is negative (below zero),

    • Respondents rate this attribute relatively unimportant, but are very satisfied with the service. In this instance no action/improvement is required.

    The closer the gap is to zero the better balance there is between how important something is, and how satisfied customers are with it.

    Type of gap

    Service

    Priority

    Meaning

    Small negative gap

    Course content

    3

    Customers have rated this with higher satisfaction than importance. More time could therefore be spent improving other products.

    Large negative gap

    Instructor

    4

    Respondents have given the instructor high satisfaction scores when answering this question, but they do not think this it is an important feature. The company needs to concentrate on improving other services and products and leave the instructor as low priority.

    Large positive gap

    User Guides

    1

    A large, positive gap reflects respondents who think that user guides are a very important feature, but their satisfaction of this service is low = Priority for improvement
    It is essential that the company look into improving their user guides.

    Small positive gap

    Value for money

    2

    Respondents rated value for money as a relatively important feature compared to their satisfaction, but their satisfaction falls short of this requirement. Again, this could be seen as an area for improvement.

    Creating a gap analysis chart

    To set up the gap analysis chart you need to:

    • create derived variables for the services you wish to examine
    • define the chart
    • apply a chart style

    Creating the derived variables

    A derived variable allows you to subtract the satisfaction scores from the importance scores for each service. For example, Course content satisfaction scores will be subtracted from Course content importance scores. Each service will have to be set up as a derived variable.

    1. Open the Course Evaluation survey supplied with Snap.
    2. Click VariablesIcon.png to display the Variables window.
    3. Click NewSurveyIcon.png to add a new variable.
    4. Specify the variable details. Set the Type to Derived and the Response to Quantity. This shows that it has a value derived from other variables.
    5. Add a Label to describe the new variable, e.g., “Course content”. This label will appear on the chart.
    6. Set the Value to Q6.a (Course content importance) – Q5.a (Course content satisfaction).
    Derived variable calculating the difference between satisfaction and importance
    1. Click SaveIcon.png to save the variable.
    2. Repeat the steps above for the other three rating questions you wish to analyse

    (V1.2 will be Q6b-Q5b, V1.3 will be Q6c-Q5c and V1.4 will be Q6d-Q5d)

    Creating the gap analysis chart

    1. Click AnalysisChartIcon.png to display the Analysis Definition dialog for a chart.
    2. Select the chart style Gap Analysis from the drop down list.
    3. Type the names of the derived variables into the Analysis field, for example V1.1,V1.2,V1.3,V1.4,
    4. Type stats in the Break field or select Statistics table from the drop-down list.
    5. Check the Transpose box.
    Analysis Definition for a chart showing gap analysis
    1. Click the Descriptive Statistics tab to define which statistics will be used.
    2. Select all the terms in the right-hand column.
    3. Deselect Mean.
    4. Click < so that Mean is the only term in the Used section.
    Descriptive Statistics tab in the Analysis definition dialog
    1. Click Apply to see your chart.

    To change the title shown on your chart, click the Notes/Title tab of the Analysis Definition dialog and enter a new title in the Title box. Click Apply to see the changes.

    The post Using gap analysis to interpret importance with satisfaction appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Creating a Hi-Lo chart showing maximum and minimum values https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/creating-hilo-chart/ Wed, 14 Oct 2020 09:13:53 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2601 Hi-Lo charts can be used to show limited statistics. Click to display the Analysis Definition dialog for a chart. Add the variables of type quantity to the Analysis field, separated by commas. Set the Break to STATS or select Statistics table in the dropdown list. Check the Transpose box. Select the style Hilo in the […]

    The post Creating a Hi-Lo chart showing maximum and minimum values appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Hi-Lo charts can be used to show limited statistics.

    1. Click AnalysisChartIcon.png to display the Analysis Definition dialog for a chart.
    2. Add the variables of type quantity to the Analysis field, separated by commas.
    3. Set the Break to STATS or select Statistics table in the dropdown list.
    4. Check the Transpose box.
    5. Select the style Hilo in the dropdown list of Styles. Browse for the style if it is not visible.
    Analysis definition for a HiLo chart
    1. Click the Descriptive Statistics tab.
    2. Show only the minimum and maximum in the Used pane. (Select all other statistics in the Used pane and move them to the Available pane.)
    3. Click OK to build the chart.

    The result is a Hi-Lo Chart showing the highest value recorded and the lowest value recorded for each of the variables.

    HiLo Chart display

    The post Creating a Hi-Lo chart showing maximum and minimum values appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Using the Chart Wizard https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-chart-wizard/ Wed, 14 Oct 2020 09:09:34 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2595 The Chart Wizard allows you to create new chart styles or amend an existing one based on a step by step process. You select a chart style, set the chart options, control the chart layout and specify chart and axis titles. The Chart Wizard is available in the Analysis Display window. Right-click the mouse or […]

    The post Using the Chart Wizard appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Chart Wizard allows you to create new chart styles or amend an existing one based on a step by step process. You select a chart style, set the chart options, control the chart layout and specify chart and axis titles.

    1. The Chart Wizard is available in the Analysis Display window.
    2. Right-click the mouse or press F2 to display the context menu.
    3. Select the Chart Wizard menu to open the Chart Wizard.
    4. Use the buttons at the bottom of the dialog boxes to navigate through the Chart Wizard.
    5. The Gallery page allows you to select the type of chart you wish to design. Two buttons at the top of the box allow you to select either 2D or 3D chart types.
    Chart Wizard Gallery to select a chart type
    1. Click Next to go to the Style page. This lets you set chart display options such as series labels, stacking and bar gap. The options shown will be different depending on the type of chart you are designing.

    ChartWizard2.PNG

    1. Click Next to go to the Layout page, which provides options for selecting items such as chart titles, chart footnotes and chart legends. The preview image shows you how the chart will look with your settings.
    Chart Wizard Layout settings
    1. Click Next to go to the Axes page, which allows you to set axis titles.
    Chart Wizard Axes settings
    1. Click Finish to create your chart.

    The post Using the Chart Wizard appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Using the Chart Designer https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-chart-designer/ Wed, 14 Oct 2020 09:06:37 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2585 Once you have set up the chart in the Analysis Definition dialog, you can start the Chart Designer by clicking the Edit Style button in the toolbar of the Analysis Display window. The chart elements are listed on the left hand panel in the Chart Designer. Selecting a chart element displays tabs that allow you […]

    The post Using the Chart Designer appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Once you have set up the chart in the Analysis Definition dialog, you can start the Chart Designer by clicking the Edit Style button StyleModeIcon.png in the toolbar of the Analysis Display window.

    The chart elements are listed on the left hand panel in the Chart Designer. Selecting a chart element displays tabs that allow you to change different aspects of that element. Some of the chart elements have sub-elements that can be accessed by clicking on the https://www.snapsurveys.com/help/15353.bmp symbol.

    Chart designer showing the chart type selection
    1. Click the Edit Style button StyleModeIcon.png in the toolbar of the Analysis Display window or double click on the item you wish to change. The Chart Designer opens on the Chart or the double clicked item.
    2. As you make changes to the chart elements click on Apply to see the effect they make. Once you have clicked Apply the Cancel button will not reset the changes. You can cancel the changes once you return to the Analysis Display window using the CancelIcon.png icon.
    3. To abandon your changes, as long as you have not clicked on Apply, click on Cancel.
    4. To confirm your changes, click on OK.

    Adding a background to your chart

    1. Click the Edit Style button StyleModeIcon.png or double-click the background of the chart to open the Chart Designer.
    2. Select Chart in the left hand column if it is not already selected.
    3. Select the Picture tab.
    4. Click the Browse button to choose your picture. An open file dialog appears.
    5. Select the image you want as the chart background and click Open.
    Chart designer showing a background picture selection
    1. Set the Picture Size radio button to one of the options. The default is set to Best fit.
    2. Click Apply. The Chart Designer dialog will remain open, but the new background will appear on your chart.

    Setting the color of a pie-slice or bar

    1. If the chart designer dialog is not already open, double-click the pie slice or bar that you wish to change on your chart. If it is already open, select the item you want in Series | Your slice or bar label | Datapoint default | Datapoint 1 in the left hand pane.
    2. Select the Fill tab.
    Chart designer showing fill pattern, color and border settings
    1. Here you can change the Pattern, Fill Color and Pattern Color. The Edge style can also be changed. Click Apply to see your changes on the chart.
    2. Select the Datapoint for the next bar/slice in the Series in the left hand pane and repeat the process.
    3. Click Apply if you wish to make further changes, else click OK to close the dialog.

    Tips for chart design

    • When making changes to font style and size, aim to make consistent changes across all aspects of the chart for more professional and easier to read documents.
    • To insert a line break in your text use Crtl + Enter.
    • You can only show both absolute values and percentages in the pie and doughnut chart styles. On a pie or doughnut chart the percentage shown will always be the Break Percentage.
    • If you wish to show percentages on chart styles other than pie or doughnut, you must choose a percentage option in the Analysis Definition dialog. The value displayed will be the percentage selected without a percentage sign.
    • There are some chart styles which already have data point labels built in.
    • An alternative method of accessing the Series option for a particular code is to use the mouse. Click once to highlight a bar or segment of the chart, and then double click to bring up the dialog box. Do not move the mouse as you undertake this operation or it will not work.

    The post Using the Chart Designer appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Chart styles https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/chart-styles/ Wed, 14 Oct 2020 09:00:39 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2578 A chart consists of The chart is defined in the Analysis Definition dialog where the chart style is selected. The chart style template defines how the analysis data is displayed. There are a number of chart and table styles that are supplied with Snap XMP Desktop. You can adapt these to your requirements using the […]

    The post Chart styles appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    A chart consists of

    • data
    • information on how the data is analysed
    • information on how the analysis is displayed

    The chart is defined in the Analysis Definition dialog where the chart style is selected. The chart style template defines how the analysis data is displayed. There are a number of chart and table styles that are supplied with Snap XMP Desktop. You can adapt these to your requirements using the Chart Designer or create new ones using the Chart Wizard.

    The chart style is made up of three components:

    • Layout defines how the chart is displayed; type of chart, axes and visibility
    • Background defines the color or images used for the chart background
    • Series defines the colors used for the different chart elements, such as bars, lines and segments.

    Once you have created a chart style, you can save it, and reapply it to other analyses. You can save the style components separately or together.

    Note: The number of series colors in your chart style will depend on the chart you have created it from. If you save a style from a chart with four bars (and four separate colors used to identify them) then apply it to a chart with seven pie slices, the colors will repeat.

    Selecting a chart style

    An easy way to select a style of chart analysis is to use the Select Analysis Style dialog. This displays examples of each chart style as a thumbnail image, helping you choose the style you want. The selected chart is highlighted when the dialog is opened.

    1. On the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar, click Analysis Chart AnalysisChartIcon.png to open the chart analysis definition.
    2. In the Analysis Definition dialog, click Select. This opens the Select Analysis Style dialog.
    1. In the Select Analysis Style list, a thumbnail image is shown for each chart style, helping you choose the style you want. Click on the image of the chart style to use in the analysis.
    1. If you can’t find a chart style click Browse to search other folders for the style files.
    2. Select or clear the Layout, Background and Series check boxes to include the parts of the chart style you want to use.
    3. Click OK to select the chart style.

    The chart style can be adapted to your requirements using the Chart Designer. Alternatively, you can create new chart styles using the Chart Wizard.

    Further information on using color chart styles can be found in the tutorials:

    Using chart style naming

    The chart styles that are supplied with Snap XMP Desktop follow a naming convention that can be used to help set up the analysis definition.

    If a chart style contains a layout the name starts with the chart type, e.g. Horizontal Bar. Color only chart styles start “Color – ” following by a description.

    If the chart style name contains the word:

    • Counts then select Counts in the Show Options section
    • Percents then select one of the percent options in the Show Options section
    • Transposed then select Transpose otherwise clear Transpose

    For example, for the chart style Horizontal Bar Percent Transposed, select the one of the percent options, such as Analysis Percents, and select Transpose.

    Saving a chart style

    1. Make the changes you want to your chart.
    2. Press F2 or right-click your modified chart and select Save Style from the context menu.
    3. The Save Style dialog appears.
    4. Enter a name for your new style.
    5. In Style parts, Select or clear the Layout, Background and Series check boxes to include the parts of the chart style you want to use. For example, clear Layout and select Background and Series to save the chart colors and background only and exclude the chart type.
    Saving a chart style template
    1. Click OK to save your style.

    By default the chart style is saved in the Snap XMP Desktop Styles folder. If you wish to save to a different location, browse to the required folder then save your file.

    Note: If you leave the layout box checked your saved style will have all the chart information, not just the background and colors, and you will overwrite the chart types if you load it to a different chart.

    The post Chart styles appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Chart elements https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/chart-elements/ Wed, 14 Oct 2020 08:58:03 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2569 Each chart is contains a number of elements. The Title is an area to display the name used to identify the chart. The title is composed of the variable labels for the variables on the chart. This can be replaced with user defined text. The Plot is the area of the chart that displays the […]

    The post Chart elements appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Each chart is contains a number of elements.

    Chart Elements
    • The Title is an area to display the name used to identify the chart. The title is composed of the variable labels for the variables on the chart. This can be replaced with user defined text.
    • The Plot is the area of the chart that displays the data.
    • A Data point refers to a value or a single piece of data on the chart.
    • Series are sets of related data. In Snap these are the codes for the analysis variables.
    • Categories are used to group a series. In Snap these are the codes for the break variables.
    Chart Elements
    • Grid Lines can be incorporated into the charts to provide a measurable scale through the chart.
    • Legends provide a key to the data in the chart. These are by default placed on the right of the chart.
    • The Y axis is the vertical axis on most charts. In horizontal charts the x and y axis are interchanged. The y axis usually represents the values such as counts or percentages.
    • The X axis is the horizontal axis on most charts. The x axis usually displays the Categories.
    • The Z axis is used in 3 dimensional charts. The z axis usually displays the Series which are described in the Legend.
    • Axis labels are words or numbers that mark the different sections of the axis.
    • Axis title is the name given to describe the entire axis.
    • Tick marks are short lines that mark an axis into lengths of equal size.
    Chart elements
    • Data point labels can be attached to each individual Data point and there are options for adding the code name, the code value and the percentage.
    • Backdrop is the background area of the chart that can show an image or background color.
    • The Footnote is another area of text that can provide information about the chart.

    The post Chart elements appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Types of chart https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/types-of-chart/ Wed, 14 Oct 2020 08:32:49 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2560 The most popular types of charts available, are shown here. Further styles are also available such as Gantt, Bubble and Hi-Lo. Area charts Area Charts are most often used to emphasise the relative importance of values over a period of time. An area chart focuses on the magnitude of change rather than the rate of […]

    The post Types of chart appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The most popular types of charts available, are shown here. Further styles are also available such as Gantt, Bubble and Hi-Lo.

    Area charts

    Area Charts are most often used to emphasise the relative importance of values over a period of time. An area chart focuses on the magnitude of change rather than the rate of change. Each filled area on the chart represents a series and is identified by a different color or pattern.

    Example of an area chart

    Bar charts

    Bar charts are used to compare one item with another, or to compare multiple items over time. Each bar represents a cell value. This is the chart equivalent of a frequency table.

    Example of a bar chart

    Clustered Bar Charts are similar to the more conventional vertical bar charts. They are the equivalent of a cross-tabulation.

    Example of a clustered bar chart

    Horizontal Bar Charts are similar to standard vertical bar charts, except that the categories are organised on a vertical axis and the values are plotted on a horizontal (y) axis.

    Stacked Bar Charts are used to show how the main category is divided into smaller categories. This can be shown as number or percentage of the total amount.

    Pie charts

    Pie charts show the relationship of parts to the whole. If multiple pies are displayed, then each pie represents a category, and each slice represents a value in that category. The example shows a pie for each age category, with segments for frequency of visit. Pie chart values for each segment are usually displayed as percentages.

    Example of a pie chart

    Doughnut Charts are provided and their use is similar to pie charts.

    Line charts

    Line charts are best used to show changes over time. They emphasise time flow and rate of change rather than the amount of change.

    Example of a line chart

    Step charts

    Step charts are used to compare items that do not show trends. They display distinct points along the value (y) axis, with vertical lines showing the difference between each point. The horizontal (x) axis shows categories.

    Example of a step chart

    The post Types of chart appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Choosing what is displayed in a table https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/choosing-table-options/ Mon, 12 Oct 2020 15:29:52 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2557 You can specify whether the different row and column labels should appear in your table. For each section you can select whether to show row and column labels, row labels only, column labels only or none. If your table contains questions with multiple codes, you can decide whether the question text appears above the code […]

    The post Choosing what is displayed in a table appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can specify whether the different row and column labels should appear in your table. For each section you can select whether to show row and column labels, row labels only, column labels only or none.

    If your table contains questions with multiple codes, you can decide whether the question text appears above the code labels or beside it.

    1. Open the table to be changed
    2. Click F2 or right-click and select Options from the context menu to open the Options dialog.
    Options selecting the labels displayed in an analysis table

    Section

    Description

    Totals

    The column and/or row containing totals can be included or excluded

    Question labels

    The question text of each of the variables used in the table can be included or excluded in rows/columns.

    Code labels

    The question code labels can be included or excluded in rows/columns.

    Inline questions

    If the Question labels are visible, they can be displayed in line with the code labels by selecting Both, Row or Column. If None is selected, the labels appear above the code labels in columns and to the left of them in rows.

    Cell contents Description

    Check to include a description of the contents of each cell at the top left of the table.

    1. Change the options to include or exclude the labels as required.
    2. Click OK to save the settings and see how they appear in a table.

    The post Choosing what is displayed in a table appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Changing the position of text and the size of table cells https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/changing-table-cell-size/ Mon, 12 Oct 2020 15:28:13 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2554 The text in tables is placed in cells. You can position the text in the top, bottom or middle of a cell, and aligned left, right or centre. You can also specify how far the text is from the edge of the cell to give more or less space between the text and cell borders. […]

    The post Changing the position of text and the size of table cells appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The text in tables is placed in cells. You can position the text in the top, bottom or middle of a cell, and aligned left, right or centre. You can also specify how far the text is from the edge of the cell to give more or less space between the text and cell borders.

    You can specify how many lines you can use to write the text, and how big the cells are.

    1. Open the table to be changed
    2. Click F2 or right-click and select Styles from the context menu to open the Define Table Style dialog.
    3. Select the areas of the table that you wish to alter in the left-hand pane.
    4. Click in the appropriate place in the Alignment pane to change the position of the text in the cells.
    5. Set the values in the Margins to set the distance of the text from the edges of the cells.
    6. Click Apply to check the table looks the way you would like, and OK if satisfied.

    Setting the size of cells

    You can change the size of table cells by dragging the row and column borders. These changes will not be stored in the style file if you save it.

    1. Move the mouse over the gap between columns until the cursor changes to a double-headed arrow.
    2. Drag the column or row border to the position that you want.

    Note that if the rows or columns have been set to Keep all the same size in the Cell Sizing dialog; when you drag one border, all the rows or columns resize together. If you want to drag them individually, you need to open the Cell Sizing dialog and clear Keep all the same size.

    These changes are not automatically saved when the table is saved.

    It is possible to set the size of the table cells to a fixed width/height so that it is stored in the style file.

    1. Open the table to be changed.
    2. Click F2 or right-click and select Sizing from the context menu to open the Cell Sizing dialog.
    Set the cell sizing in an analysis table
    1. Choose from Best Fit, Fixed or Variable cell size for the Column Width and Row Height.
      • Best Fit lets Snap calculate the cell size according to their contents
      • Fixed lets you to set the size in the Size field displayed when this option is selected
      • Variable lets you drag the cell to set the size.
    2. When you choose Best Fit you can check the Keep all the same size box to force all rows to have the same width or height.
    3. Choose from Best Fit or Fixed for the Column Label Height or Row Label Width, as required.
    4. Click OK to apply your settings. These settings will be saved if you save the style.

    The post Changing the position of text and the size of table cells appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Changing the highlighting and spacing of rows and columns https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/changing-highlight-and-spacing/ Mon, 12 Oct 2020 15:24:02 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2550 You can define highlights which are used to highlight some of the rows or columns of a table. You specify the look of the highlight in the Define Table style dialog, and which rows or columns are highlighted in the Separators dialog. Defining how the lines will look Open the table to be changed Click […]

    The post Changing the highlighting and spacing of rows and columns appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can define highlights which are used to highlight some of the rows or columns of a table. You specify the look of the highlight in the Define Table style dialog, and which rows or columns are highlighted in the Separators dialog.

    Defining how the lines will look

    1. Open the table to be changed
    2. Click StyleModeIcon.png , click F2 or right-click to select Edit Styles from the context menu open the Define Table Style dialog.
    3. Select Blank in the Regions area to define how the inserted blank lines will look. You can then change the background color, font, gridlines etc as you would for any other row.
    4. Select Highlight in the Regions area to define how the highlighted rows or columns will look. Note that any styling you apply to the Highlight region will overwrite any existing styling if a row or column is highlighted.

    Defining which rows/columns will be blank or highlighted

    1. Open the table to be changed.
    2. Click F2 or right-click and select Separators from the context menu to open the Separators dialog.
    Set the separators in an analysis table
    1. Select Rows in the Area dropdown list to set the row highlighting. Select None in the Highlighting dropdown list to clear any row highlighting.
    2. Choose By group to repeat the highlight pattern for each set of rows associated with a single variable; choose By item to use the highlight pattern across the whole table.
    3. Set the number of the first row you wish to highlight in the Start at field, set the number of rows you want highlighted in the For field, and how far along you want the next block of highlighting to start in the Repeat every field. For example:

    Start at

    For

    Repeat every

     

    1

    1

    2

    Highlights alternate rows

    1

    2

    3

    Highlights row 1 and 2, 4 and 5 etc

    3

    2

    5

    Highlight rows 3 and 4, rows 8 and 9, etc

    1. Select Columns in the Area dropdown list to set the column highlighting. Select None in the Highlighting dropdown list to clear any column highlighting.
    2. Set the column highlighting in the same way that you have set the row highlighting.
    3. Click OK to apply the highlighting to the table.

    The post Changing the highlighting and spacing of rows and columns appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Changing the lines between table rows and columns https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/changing-table-lines/ Mon, 12 Oct 2020 15:21:42 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2545 The default style of an analysis table has lines around each cell of the table to create a boxed effect. Each of the regions of a table can be defined to include or exclude any of these lines. This is done using the Define Table Style dialog. Open the table to be changed Click , […]

    The post Changing the lines between table rows and columns appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The default style of an analysis table has lines around each cell of the table to create a boxed effect. Each of the regions of a table can be defined to include or exclude any of these lines. This is done using the Define Table Style dialog.

    1. Open the table to be changed
    2. Click StyleModeIcon.png , click F2 or right-click to select Edit Styles from the context menu open the Define Table Style dialog.
    3. The Region field contains a list of all the areas of the table. Select one or more regions from the list.
    4. Change the color of the lines by clicking the Gridline button in the Colour section.
    5. To add or remove the lines of the selected regions click the lines in the Gridlines box.
    Set the gridlines in an analysis table
    • To remove all lines, select all the regions of the table and remove all the lines displayed in the Gridlines area by clicking on each line.
    • To only show lines between the data rows.
      • First remove all lines as described above
      • Select Body in the Regions pane
      • Click the centre and bottom horizontal lines in the Gridlines area.
    Set the gridlines in an analysis table
    1. Click Apply or OK to save the changes.

    The post Changing the lines between table rows and columns appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Using table styles https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-table-styles/ Mon, 12 Oct 2020 15:18:30 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2543 Editing table styles You can edit the way the table looks using the Table styles, Separators, Sizing and Options dialogs available from the context menu. Loading table styles You can load an existing style by The table style files have the extension .tsf . Styles provided with Snap XMP Desktop are stored in the Styles […]

    The post Using table styles appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Editing table styles

    You can edit the way the table looks using the Table styles, Separators, Sizing and Options dialogs available from the context menu.

    Loading table styles

    You can load an existing style by

    • selecting the style from the Style field of the Analysis Definition dialog
    • right-clicking or pressing F2 in a table window and selecting Load Style from the context menu.

    The table style files have the extension .tsf . Styles provided with Snap XMP Desktop are stored in the Styles sub-directory of the main Snap XMP Desktop folder.

    Saving table styles

    If you have altered the layout of a table and want to store this new design for future use, press F2 or click with the right-hand button of the mouse and select the Save Style option. This displays the file name of the style used to create the original table in the Save Style As dialog box.

    Change the name in the File Name field, leaving the .tsf extension. Click OK to save the style.

    The post Using table styles appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Table appearance https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/table-appearance/ Mon, 12 Oct 2020 15:16:30 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2539 You can control the appearance of an analysis table by changing fonts, colours, grids, highlights and sizing. You can save your style for later use. You make the changes from the table style menu: Edit Styles, Separators, Sizing, Options, Load Style and Save Style. There are two ways to open the menu from the Table […]

    The post Table appearance appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can control the appearance of an analysis table by changing fonts, colours, grids, highlights and sizing. You can save your style for later use. You make the changes from the table style menu: Edit Styles, Separators, Sizing, Options, Load Style and Save Style.

    There are two ways to open the menu from the Table window

    • right-click the table
    • press the F2 function key

    There are 11 different areas or regions in any table and any combination of these areas can be altered independently using the Edit Styles menu item. This allows you to change the way the contents of the rows and columns look. You can change the color of the text and background, the font used, and where the text appears. It is advisable to make consistent alterations to a table, such as all totals to be bold, all labels to be italics, etc. so that the table is easy to read.

    Elements of an analysis table
    • The Separators menu item allows you to specify highlighting of table rows and columns (for example, highlighting alternate columns so they are easier to read). You can also insert blank rows and columns to break up the table.
    • The Sizing menu item allows you to force the table cells to be a specified size.
    • The Options menu item allows you to decide whether the question label headings and totals rows and columns appear.

    Defining the table style

    Open the Define Table Styles dialog from an Analysis Display window displaying a table by

    • Click  StyleModeIcon.png  on the Analysis Display toolbar
    • click F2 or right-click the mouse and select Edit Styles from the list displayed.

    You can use this dialog to:

    TableStyleDlg.PNG

    Region

    Select item(s) you wish to change

    Colours

    Click button to change colours of those options for the selected regions

    Face

    Change the background colour of the cell

    Highlight

    Set the highlight colour on top and left of cell

    Shadow

    Set the shadow colour on bottom and right of cell

    Text

    Set the text colour

    Gridline

    Set the gridlines colour

    Row Label Size

    Set the maximum number of lines displayed in a row. This defines the length/width of the rows and columns and gives the point at which the text wraps.

    Column Label Size

    Set the maximum number of lines displayed in a column label. This defines the length/width of the rows and columns and gives the point at which the text wraps. If the value is set to 1, then all text will be placed on one row. This may result in very wide tables if the column label size is set to one.

    3D Shading

    Clear to remove highlights and shadows from cells

    Font

    Click to set the font type, size and style for the selected area

    Gridlines

    Click image to select or deselect which lines to display and whether crossing points are displayed

    Margins

    Specify the distance from text to the borders of the table cell

    Alignment

    The Alignment options are used to position text and decimals within a table cell. Click in the Alignment area to specify the position of the text. The default style aligns all text in cells as Centre Left. There are nine locations: Top Left; Centre Left; Bottom Left; Top Centre; Centre Centre; Bottom Centre; Top Right; Centre Right and Bottom Right.

    The post Table appearance appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Statistical significance in tables (z-test) https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/statistical-significance-z-test/ Mon, 12 Oct 2020 11:23:34 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2529 The z-test is used to compare two percentage scores to see if the difference between them is statistically significant. This means: Is the difference in percentage scores in the table purely a result of the sample used, or does it indicate a real difference in percentages in the target population? For each row in a […]

    The post Statistical significance in tables (z-test) appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The z-test is used to compare two percentage scores to see if the difference between them is statistically significant.

    This means: Is the difference in percentage scores in the table purely a result of the sample used, or does it indicate a real difference in percentages in the target population?

    For each row in a table it compares the Break Percent for each column with all other columns. If more than one variable is included in the Break specification, the comparison will be among columns for the same variable only. That is, if “Age” and “Gender” are specified as separate break variables, the individual columns within the age variable will only be compared with other columns for “Age” and not with the columns for “Gender”.

    Example of an analysis table using z-test

    Each cell of the table will contain the Break percent and a series of letters and hyphens. This is the output of the z-test and indicates which differences are significant and which are not significant, at the specified confidence levels.

    The three possible characters and their meanings are:

    • A hyphen, meaning the difference is not statistically significant
    • A lower case letter indicating that the difference is statistically significant at the lower level specified
    • An upper case letter indicating that the difference is significant at the higher level specified.

    The letters and hyphens refer, in order, to the other columns within the variable (A refers to the first column, B to the second column and so on).

    Example: Adding the z-test to a table in the Crocodile survey

    1. Click AnalysisTblIcon.png on the Snap toolbar to build a table
    2. Enter Q4 (Items ordered) in the Analysis field.
    3. Enter Q11 (Age) in the Break field.
    4. Check the Break Percents and z-test boxes on the right hand side. All other options should be clear.
    Analysis definition for a table using z-test
    1. Click the Base/Labels tab. Confirm that any missing values are excluded.
    Settings for the z-test
    1. Click the Cells tab.
    Settings for z-tests
    1. In the Body z-test section:
      • Set the Upper Level to 95% and the Lower Level to 90%
      • Select 2-Tail.
      • Select All in the Show box.
      • Check Hyphen and Index if these options are not already selected.
      • Clear the Apply Yates Correction box.
    1. Click OK to create the table.
    Example of an analysis table showing statistical significance (z-test)

    If you look at the cell for the row labelled “Coffee/Tea” and the column labelled “C. 25-34” the Z-Test output shows “Ab‑‑-”. This indicates that the differences between this column (C) and column A is significant at the upper level (upper case letters), the difference between this column and column B is significant at the lower level (lower case letters) but the differences between this column and the columns D,E and F are not significant (hyphens). Note that there must be at least one hyphen in the output as a column cannot be significantly different from itself.

    The post Statistical significance in tables (z-test) appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Creating a table using a scoring system https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/creating-table-scoring-system/ Mon, 12 Oct 2020 11:14:34 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2522 The example shows how to apply a score to calculate the mean value of a service. It is applied to a single rating question (with a Single Response) in a cross-tabulation. The different ratings are labelled as Very good (scored as +2) down to Very poor (scored as -2). This example assumes that you have […]

    The post Creating a table using a scoring system appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The example shows how to apply a score to calculate the mean value of a service. It is applied to a single rating question (with a Single Response) in a cross-tabulation. The different ratings are labelled as Very good (scored as +2) down to Very poor (scored as -2). This example assumes that you have already created the score via the Weights window.

    Weight details used for a scoring system
    1. Click AnalysisTblIcon.png to display the Analysis Definition dialog box.
    2. Type into the Analysis (and Break) field the names of the variables on which you want to measure confidence. For example, type Q6a in the Analysis field and Q11:Q12 in the Break field.
    3. Click on the Summary Statistics tab.
    4. Select Mean in the Available list and click > to move it to the Used column.
    5. Enter the name of the previously created Weight, Score5 in the Score field.
    Summary statistics using the weight Score5
    1. Click OK to display the table. Note that the score label has been added to the window title.
    Example of an analysis table showing the score

    To display the confidence level for these statistics, go to the Summary Statistics tab of the Analysis Definition dialog and move Confidence (mean) into the Used pane. By default the confidence level is set to 95%.

    The post Creating a table using a scoring system appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Confidence intervals in tables https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/confidence-intervals-in-tables/ Mon, 12 Oct 2020 11:11:46 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2516 You can display confidence statistics in tables. These show how confident you can be that a specified proportion of the population lie within a calculated range. The confidence intervals are available in the Summary Statistics tab of the Analysis Tailoring dialog. Confidence intervals on percentage values The most common use of confidence intervals is when […]

    The post Confidence intervals in tables appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can display confidence statistics in tables. These show how confident you can be that a specified proportion of the population lie within a calculated range. The confidence intervals are available in the Summary Statistics tab of the Analysis Tailoring dialog.

    Confidence intervals on percentage values

    The most common use of confidence intervals is when creating groups from a ratings scale. The table below shows a ratings scale for speed of service, broken down by age and gender.

    It includes a satisfied scale, which is the percentage of respondents who selected either “Very Good” or “Good”. For the Base column in the table below, you can be 95% confident that the percentage of respondents in the target population satisfied with “Speed of Service” is in the range (53 – 5)% and (53 + 5)%; that is, between 48% and 58%. The size of margins varies according to the sample size and will generally be reduced with larger samples.

    Example of an analysis table showing the satisfaction percentages including the confidence interval

    You have control over the following aspects:

    • whether to show the Confidence Interval statistics (as above)
    • the Level of Confidence
    • which categories of the row variable represent the required group

    How the confidence interval is calculated

    Using an example of a question which:

    • has 5 codes (“Very Good”, “Good”, “OK”, “Poor”, “Very Poor”)
    • with a base of 389 respondents
    • 53% of the respondents said that the service was “Very Good” or “Good” and the remaining 47% chose the other 3 categories

    You can then calculate the confidence interval as follows:

    Confidence level calculation

    The 95% confidence level has a constant of 1.96.

    In the example, this gives:

    i.e., a Confidence Interval of ± 5%

    You can be 95% confident that 53% (± 5%) of the population are “Very Satisfied” or “Fairly Satisfied” with the service provided.

    If tables are weighted then the calculation of the Confidence Interval will be based on the weighted results not the original cases.

    Confidence intervals on means with scoring systems

    The mean value is the value for the sample using a numerical scoring system for responses. The confidence interval is the likely range of mean values for the target population.

    Using an example of a question which has 5 codes (“Very Good”, “Good”, “OK”, “Poor”, “Very Poor”), with a base of 204 respondents which uses a scoring system of: +2 for Very Good to – 2 for Very Poor the mean value and standard deviation will be calculated using these scores. You can then calculate the confidence interval as follows:

    Confidence level calculation for mean values

    The post Confidence intervals in tables appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Creating a satisfaction scale (or other ratings scale) https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/creating-satisfaction-scale/ Mon, 12 Oct 2020 11:08:52 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2510 You can use the Confidence Top box and Confidence Bottom box statistics to group the responses at the top and bottom ends of the scales. For example, to show how many people were satisfied or dissatisfied with a particular service, or who used it in the first or last five months of a year. The […]

    The post Creating a satisfaction scale (or other ratings scale) appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can use the Confidence Top box and Confidence Bottom box statistics to group the responses at the top and bottom ends of the scales. For example, to show how many people were satisfied or dissatisfied with a particular service, or who used it in the first or last five months of a year.

    The example shows top and bottom boxes applied to a single rating question (with a Single Response) in a cross-tabulation.

    1. Click AnalysisTblIcon.png to display the Analysis Definition dialog box.
    2. Type into the Analysis (and Break) field the names of the variables on which you want to measure satisfaction. For example, type Q6a in the Analysis field and Q11:Q12 in the Break field.
    3. Click on the Summary Statistics tab.
    4. Select Confidence Top Box in the Available list and click > to move it to the Used column.
    Group the codes to create a % Satisfied group
    1. Check the details of the box. The example show the Confidence Top Box uses the first 2 out of 5 responses. This groups together the “Very Good” and “Good” codes.
    2. The figure will be displayed as %Satisfied. You can select different text to display from the dropdown list.
    3. For now, clear the Show confidence interval results
    4. Repeat for the Confidence Bottom box, using the last two codes out of five.
    5. Click Apply to display the table.
    Example of an analysis table showing the satisfaction percentages

    To display the confidence level for these statistics, check the Confidence interval results box. By default the confidence level is set to 95%. This means that 95 times out of a hundred the true percentage for the target population is within the specified range based on the result for the sample. This also assumes the sample you have is a truly random sample from the target population.

    In the table below, you would be 95% confident that the percentage of people in the target population satisfied with “Speed of Service” is in the range 53% +/ – 5%; that is, between 48% and 58%.

    Example of an analysis table showing the satisfaction percentages including the confidence interval

    The post Creating a satisfaction scale (or other ratings scale) appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Displaying statistics in a cross-tabulation or frequency table https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/display-stats-in-crosstab-or-frequency-table/ Mon, 12 Oct 2020 11:05:13 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2506 You can add a subset of the descriptive statistics to give more details about the statistical analysis of the figures in a table. These allow you to: identify a typical value (the mean, median or mode) display how much the figures are likely to vary depending on the sample (standard deviation, standard error, variance, confidence) […]

    The post Displaying statistics in a cross-tabulation or frequency table appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can add a subset of the descriptive statistics to give more details about the statistical analysis of the figures in a table.

    These allow you to:

    • identify a typical value (the mean, median or mode)
    • display how much the figures are likely to vary depending on the sample (standard deviation, standard error, variance, confidence)
    • incorporate significance tests in your table (z-test, significance(t-test), t-test, U-test)

    You can also use these statistics to group the responses to a single-response question (normally a ratings question), so you can immediately compare the high ratings to the low ratings. The high-ratings are known as the Top Box, and the low ratings are known as the Bottom Box. If you display these, you can also display how confident you are that the true population figure is within a specified range based on the sample results.

    1. Click the Summary statistics tab of the Analysis Definition dialog.
    Summary Statistics tab in the Analysis definition dialog
    1. Select the statistics you wish to add to your table in the Available pane. (Many of these will require you to apply a scoring system to the table.)
    2. Use the > button to move them into the Show pane to add them to your table.

    The post Displaying statistics in a cross-tabulation or frequency table appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Creating a descriptive statistics table https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/creating-descriptive-stats-table/ Mon, 12 Oct 2020 11:02:01 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2499 Descriptive Statistics tables are most meaningful when used on questions with a quantity response. Click to display the Analysis Definition dialog box. Type the required variables names for the statistics in the Analysis field, separated by commas. For example Q11, Q12. Select Statistics table from the dropdown list in the Break field (or type STATS […]

    The post Creating a descriptive statistics table appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Descriptive Statistics tables are most meaningful when used on questions with a quantity response.

    1. Click AnalysisTblIcon.png to display the Analysis Definition dialog box.
    2. Type the required variables names for the statistics in the Analysis field, separated by commas. For example Q11, Q12.
    3. Select Statistics table from the dropdown list in the Break field (or type STATS in lower or upper case).
    4. Click OK to build a table of descriptive statistics.
    Example of a descriptive statistics table

    This type of table will not work with Multiple Response, Literal Response, Time or Date variables.

    Selecting which statistics are displayed

    1. Click the Descriptive Statistics tab of the Analysis Definition dialog.
    Descriptive Statistics tab in the Analysis definition dialog
    1. Select items in the Available pane and use the > button to move them to the Used pane to add them to your table.
    2. Move them back to the Available pane to remove them from your table.
    3. You can change the order of the items in your table by selecting them and using the Move Up and Move Down buttons.

    The post Creating a descriptive statistics table appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Creating a holecount table https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/creating-holecount-table/ Mon, 12 Oct 2020 10:58:32 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2494 Holecount Tables are a way of viewing the counts of the variables, as the code labels are shown as generic values of Code 1, Code 2 etc. They are a useful and quick method of checking the accuracy of data entry and a simple way of highlighting areas with possible errors prior to full analysis […]

    The post Creating a holecount table appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Holecount Tables are a way of viewing the counts of the variables, as the code labels are shown as generic values of Code 1, Code 2 etc. They are a useful and quick method of checking the accuracy of data entry and a simple way of highlighting areas with possible errors prior to full analysis of the survey.

    1. Click AnalysisTblIcon.png to display the Analysis Definition dialog box.
    2. Type Q2 TO Q12 (the complete range of questions) into the Analysis field.
    3. Select Holecount table from the dropdown list in the Break field (or type HOLECOUNT or COUNT in the field, in upper or lower case).
    4. It is useful to display missing responses in the table. Click the Base/Labels tab to say what you do with responses of Errors, Not Asked and No Reply.
    5. Select Show for Errors, Not Asked and No Reply in both the Analysis and Break columns.
    Holecount table settings
    1. Click OK to build the Holecount Table.
    Example of a holecount table

    A number of the variables have zero values in all fields except Code 1. This is generally because the variables are open questions with a response of type literal, quantity, date or time and only 1 code is ever created. The Holecount Table will be built with as many codes as the question with the largest number of codes. Variables of the type Note are also included but will only show counts in the No Reply or Not Asked columns.

    The post Creating a holecount table appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Creating a grid table https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/creating-grid-table/ Mon, 12 Oct 2020 10:54:35 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2486 Many questionnaires contain groups of questions with an identical range of possible answers. These are generally attitude questions and the replies are typically “Very good” to “Very poor”, or “Strongly agree” to “Strongly disagree”. Such groups are called Grids. Each question is set up as a separate variable, but at the analysis stage, they are […]

    The post Creating a grid table appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Many questionnaires contain groups of questions with an identical range of possible answers. These are generally attitude questions and the replies are typically “Very good” to “Very poor”, or “Strongly agree” to “Strongly disagree”. Such groups are called Grids. Each question is set up as a separate variable, but at the analysis stage, they are grouped together.

    1. Click AnalysisTblIcon.png to display the Analysis Definition dialog box.
    2. Type into the Analysis field Q6a TO Q6e.
    3. Select Grid table from the dropdown list in the Break field (or type GRID in upper or lower case). If you leave the Break field blank, Snap assumes that you want a grid table because of the value you put in the Analysis field, but this can be confusing.
    Grid table analysis definition
    1. Click on Analysis Percents so that the percentages of the total of each row are included.
    2. Click OK to build a grid table.
    Grid table results shown with counts and percentages
    1. If you wish to alter the specification of the table, click VariablePropsIcon.png .
    2. If you specify the variables in the Break field and GRID in the Analysis field, the axes of the table will be reversed. Alternatively, select the option Transpose.
    3. Click SaveIcon.png to save the table. The name will be generated by Snap. If you then wish to work on the table again, it is stored in the Analyses Window AnalysesIcon.png .

    The post Creating a grid table appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Creating a cross-tabulation https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/create-crosstab/ Mon, 12 Oct 2020 10:49:38 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2476 An analysis table can be created to analyse one question against a number of other questions, producing cross-tabulations. Tabulations of up to five million cells are possible, with a maximum of either 2,000 rows or 2,000 columns. Each table can be made up of a number of variables, and, using commands such as WITH and PER, […]

    The post Creating a cross-tabulation appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    An analysis table can be created to analyse one question against a number of other questions, producing cross-tabulations. Tabulations of up to five million cells are possible, with a maximum of either 2,000 rows or 2,000 columns. Each table can be made up of a number of variables, and, using commands such as WITH and PER, you can generate complex tables.

    This example uses the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey supplied with Snap XMP Desktop.

    1. Click AnalysisTblIcon.png to display the Analysis Definition dialog box and type into the Analysis field Q6a. Type Q9 into the Break field.
    2. Check Break Percents, which shows each answer as a percentage of the column totals for the break variable (Q9).
    3. Press OK and a Cross-tabulation will be built, showing the values of Q6a as the row labels on the left-hand side of the table and the values of Q9 as the column labels across the top of the table.
    Cross tabulation showing Speed of service by Age group
    1. To add more variables to the table, click VariablePropsIcon.png to display the Analysis Definition dialog box, and use the word WITH to link the variables together. For example, Q9 WITH Q10. As an alternative to WITH use the : character.
    2. Click SaveIcon.png to save the table. The name will be generated by Snap. If you then wish to work on the table again, it is stored in the Analyses Window AnalysesIcon.png .

    The post Creating a cross-tabulation appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Creating a frequency table https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/creating-a-frequency-table/ Tue, 15 Sep 2020 10:07:15 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2389 Frequency tables show the response frequency for each available answer to a question. They are an easy method of analysing single questions in tabular form. The analysis table produces results by specifying the name of the question or questions. The data can be calculated as counts or percentages. The results can be filtered to look […]

    The post Creating a frequency table appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Frequency tables show the response frequency for each available answer to a question. They are an easy method of analysing single questions in tabular form. The analysis table produces results by specifying the name of the question or questions. The data can be calculated as counts or percentages. The results can be filtered to look at subsets of data.

    Creating a frequency table from a single variable

    The example below uses ‘Q4: Which of the following items did you order?’ in the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey supplied with Snap XMP Desktop.

    1. Click AnalysisTblIcon.png to display the Analysis Definition dialog box. Type Q4 in the Analysis field.
    2. Click OK to create a frequency table that shows counts only.
    Analysis Definition for a frequency table with a single analysis variable
    1. Check Base Percents to express all answers as a percentage of the total number of respondents.
    2. Select Analysis Base in the Order By drop-down list, so that the most frequently answered reply will be at the top of the table.
    3. Click the Cells tab and check Suppress zeroes to hide any answers where the response count has been zero. (This option is normally used when a long list of codes exists for a question).
    Cells tab of the Analysis Definition
    1. Click OK. This builds the frequency table.
    Frequency table showing items ordered
    1. Notice that the calculated percentages add up to a number greater than 100 because this question has a Multiple Response, so there are more responses than there are respondents.
    2. To calculate the percentages to add up to 100, click VariablePropsIcon.png and select the Base/Labels tab.
    3. Change the Base field from Respondents to Responses. Rebuild the table to alter the method of calculation.
    Select the base for the frequency table
    1. Click SaveIcon.png to save the table. The name will be generated by Snap. If you then wish to work on the table again, it is stored in the Analyses Window AnalysesIcon.png .
    Frequency table showing items ordered

    Creating a frequency table showing two variables

    If you use more than one variable in a frequency table, then you can:

    • display the details for the variables side by side (using the keyword WITH)
    • look at each permutation of the two variables using the key word PER

    The example uses the frequency of visit question (Q2) and the gender question (Q12) in the same table.

    Displaying the variables next to one another

    1. Click AnalysisTblIcon.png to display the Analysis Definition dialog.
    2. Type Q2:Q12 into the Analysis field. Note that : is the short form of the key word WITH, which means that Q2 is analysed with Q12 next to it.
    3. Check Base Percents to express all answers as a percentage of the Base figure.
    Analysis Definition for a frequency table with a two analysis variables
    1. Check Transpose to align the table horizontally rather than vertically.
    2. Click OK to build the table.
    Frequency table showing frequency of visit and gender

    Looking at each permutation of the variables

    1. Click on VariablePropsIcon.png to alter the specification of the table.
    2. Change the text in the analysis field to Q2 PER Q12.
    3. Click OK to build the amended table.
    Frequency table showing Frequency of visit for each gender

    Note that the table shows all the male variations of the frequency of visit, followed by all the female variation of the frequency of visit.

    1. Click SaveIcon.png to save the table. The name is generated automatically. The table can be edited using the Analyses Window AnalysesIcon.png .

    The post Creating a frequency table appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Adding variables to tables using drag and drop https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/adding-variables-to-tables-using-drag-and-drop/ Tue, 15 Sep 2020 10:02:16 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2378 You define a table by entering the variables that you want to display in a table in the Analysis Definition dialog. When you have created a table, you can also add extra variables to the table by dragging them in from the Variables window. This is equivalent to adding an extra variable to the Analysis […]

    The post Adding variables to tables using drag and drop appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You define a table by entering the variables that you want to display in a table in the Analysis Definition dialog.

    When you have created a table, you can also add extra variables to the table by dragging them in from the Variables window. This is equivalent to adding an extra variable to the Analysis field using the WITH keyword.

    Select the variable in the variable window drag it to the Analysis window.

    As you drag the cursor over the table it changes from https://www.snapsurveys.com/help/18741.bmp to one of these alternatives:

    https://www.snapsurveys.com/help/insert_above.png

    insert above this row variable

    https://www.snapsurveys.com/help/insert_below.png

    insert below this row variable

    https://www.snapsurveys.com/help/replace.png

    replace all row or column variables with the new one

    Cursor: Insert Leftinsert to the left of this column variable
    Cursor: Insert Rightinsert to the right of this column variable

    The post Adding variables to tables using drag and drop appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Types of table https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/types-of-table/ Fri, 04 Sep 2020 09:15:17 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2366 Frequency table A table of results for one or more variables entered in the Analysis field. A frequency table displays the number of cases for the variable(s). Use WITH or a semi-colon to link them together. The maximum number of rows or columns is 2000 values. No value should appear in the Break field. (You […]

    The post Types of table appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Frequency table

    A table of results for one or more variables entered in the Analysis field. A frequency table displays the number of cases for the variable(s). Use WITH or a semi-colon to link them together. The maximum number of rows or columns is 2000 values. No value should appear in the Break field. (You can also build a frequency table from an expression in the Break field with nothing in the Analysis field.)

    Example of a frequency table

    Cross-tabulation

    This is a table where two or more variables are mapped against each other. One set appears in the Analysis and the other in the Break field. Use WITH (:) or PER to link multiple variables. A cross-tabulation displays the data for cases that appear in both categories.

    Example of a cross-tabulation

    Grid table

    Used for tabulating grid questions. Enter the word TO or ~ between the first and last grid question numbers in the analysis field or list questions separated by commas. You can also enter the word GRID in the Break field or select Grid table from the dropdown list.

    Example of a grid table

    Holecount table

    Holecount tables display the counts in the variables, as the code labels do not appear: just Code 1, Code 2, etc. They are a useful method of checking the accuracy of data entry and a simple way of highlighting areas with possible errors prior to full analysis of the survey. Select Holecount table from the dropdown list in the break or analysis field.

    Example of a holecount table

    Descriptive statistics table

    Statistics tables display a selection of statistics about the variable. Enter the word STATS or select Statistics table from the dropdown list in either the Analysis or Break field. Statistics can be calculated on any variable or list of variables, although most benefit is achieved when analysing variables with a response of Quantity.

    Example of a Statistics table

    The post Types of table appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Printing analyses (tables, charts, lists or maps) https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/printing-analyses-tables-charts-lists-or-maps/ Mon, 20 Jul 2020 13:49:31 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2129 Fit this table to page Check to compress a table with a high number of columns or rows so that it fits on fewer pages. (Useful in cases where the table is just carries on to a second page.) Include notes Check to print notes that have been included with the definition Include full description […]

    The post Printing analyses (tables, charts, lists or maps) appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
  • Click AnalysesIcon.png on the Snap toolbar to open the Analyses window.
  • Find the entry for the analysis you wish to view in the Analyses window. Double-click the entry or select the entry and click VariablePropsIcon.png on the Analyses window toolbar.
  • The analysis opens in a new window.
  • Click PrintIcon.png on the window toolbar to display the Print Analysis Details dialog.
  • Select the options you want to include.
  • Fit this table to page

    Check to compress a table with a high number of columns or rows so that it fits on fewer pages. (Useful in cases where the table is just carries on to a second page.)

    Include notes

    Check to print notes that have been included with the definition

    Include full description

    Check to include information about the analysis definition: which variables are analysed, how they are broken down, whether all cases are visible, whether a weight has been used to balance out the population, whether a score has been used to perform calculations, and what data is included for each entry.

    1. Make the changes you want to the titles and headings, and click Print.
    2. If you want to change the page size, or headers or footers, click Setup….

    Printing a list of analyses

    1. Click AnalysesIcon.png on the toolbar to open the Analyses window.
    2. Click PrintIcon.png on the Analyses window toolbar to display the Analysis Details dialog box.
    3. Enter a title in the Title field. Select the Style required. Specify the selection criteria to print out details for selected analyses.
    4. Click Print to print the list.
    Print the analysis details

    This dialog has three different styles:

    • Detailed, single column produces a list showing the contents of the name, label, analysis and break fields of each analysis, as specified in the Analysis Definition dialog box, in a single column format.
    • Detailed, double column produces a list showing the contents of the name, label, analysis and break fields of each analysis, as specified in the Analysis Definition dialog box, in a double column format.
    • Summary produces a summary that matches the data in the Analyses Window.

    The report settings (headers, footers etc.) can be changed by selecting Setup.

    The post Printing analyses (tables, charts, lists or maps) appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Creating a top line analysis of your survey https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/creating-a-top-line-analysis-of-your-survey/ Mon, 20 Jul 2020 13:48:00 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2123 Snap can display the results of a survey in the form of a questionnaire. This is a clear and easy way of viewing a top-level summary of the survey and can easily be printed. More detailed analyses will then follow in the form of tables and charts. Click the button on the toolbar to open […]

    The post Creating a top line analysis of your survey appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Snap can display the results of a survey in the form of a questionnaire. This is a clear and easy way of viewing a top-level summary of the survey and can easily be printed. More detailed analyses will then follow in the form of tables and charts.

    1. Click the SurveyOverviewIcon.png button on the toolbar to open the Survey Overview window. Double-click the survey, or select the survey and click P:\Snap Online Help Latest Version\Screenshots\8.Synchronizing Snap Desktop and Snap Online\10.EditSurveyIcon.png , to open the survey. The Survey Details dialog box will appear.
    2. Click OK to open the survey and display the Questionnaire window.
    3. Click the DataModeIcon.png button in the Questionnaire window to switch to Data View Mode.
    4. Click the drop down showing Case Data, and change to Counts. The number of respondents giving each answer will be shown. For example, 35 respondents visited the restaurant daily.
    5. Select the Percentage box. The questionnaire will now be presented with the percentage value shown for each of the questions. You’ll now see that the 35 daily visitors represent 9% of our total. Use the vertical scroll bar to view more of the questionnaire.
    Example of a top line analysis showing counts and percentages

    The post Creating a top line analysis of your survey appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Setting up default values for analysis https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/setting-up-default-values-for-analysis/ Mon, 20 Jul 2020 13:41:43 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2121 Analysis tailoring allows you to specify default options for your analysis. The settings in the analysis tailoring dialog will be loaded when you create an analysis, and you can change them as needed. You tailor analyses by selecting the menu option Tailor | Analysis to open the Tailor Analysis dialog. This looks the same as […]

    The post Setting up default values for analysis appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Analysis tailoring allows you to specify default options for your analysis. The settings in the analysis tailoring dialog will be loaded when you create an analysis, and you can change them as needed.

    You tailor analyses by selecting the menu option Tailor | Analysis to open the Tailor Analysis dialog. This looks the same as the Analysis definition dialog but does not include a Definition or Notes/Titles tab. Your settings in the Tailor Analysis dialog will be used as defaults for all your surveys.

    The post Setting up default values for analysis appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Saving and retrieving analyses https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/saving-and-retrieving-analyses/ Mon, 20 Jul 2020 13:34:55 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2115 When you have created your analysis, click on the toolbar of the display window. If you haven’t given your analysis a name in the Analysis Definition dialog, it will automatically be given a name by Snap. You can change the name by clicking and editing the Name field. Names must be sixteen characters or fewer. […]

    The post Saving and retrieving analyses appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
  • When you have created your analysis, click SaveIcon.png on the toolbar of the display window.
  • If you haven’t given your analysis a name in the Analysis Definition dialog, it will automatically be given a name by Snap. You can change the name by clicking VariablePropsIcon.png and editing the Name field. Names must be sixteen characters or fewer.
  • If you do not wish to save the table or chart you have created, click CancelIcon.PNG .
  • To view your saved tables and charts, click AnalysesIcon.png on the Snap toolbar or select View | Analyses. The Analyses window displays the list of saved analyses. Select the one you wish to look at and double click on it to open it.
  • The post Saving and retrieving analyses appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Using the Analysis Display Dialog https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-the-analysis-display-dialog/ Mon, 20 Jul 2020 13:30:34 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2103 The Analysis Display dialog shows a graphical representation of the analysis containing the data responses from the survey. The window containing a table, chart, cloud, map or list consists of: a toolbar a pane containing the analysis as described by the Results definition dialog an optional Notes pane (You can display this by toggling the […]

    The post Using the Analysis Display Dialog appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Analysis Display dialog shows a graphical representation of the analysis containing the data responses from the survey.

    The window containing a table, chart, cloud, map or list consists of:

    • a toolbar
    • a pane containing the analysis as described by the Results definition dialog
    • an optional Notes pane (You can display this by toggling the Notes button toolbar button)

    Right-clicking the analysis produces a context menu. The menu is different according to the type of analysis.

    Table Chart Cloud List Map Control Editor

    Edit Styles

    Chart Designer

    Edit Styles

    Edit Styles

    Edit Styles

    Separators

    Chart wizard

      

     

    Sizing

     

     

    Sizing

     

    Options

     

     

    Options

     

    Copy Cell Reference

    Copy

      

    Copy

     

    Print

      

    Print

    Load Style

    Load Style

    Load Style

    Load Style

    Load Style

    Save Style

    Save Style

    Load Style

    Save Style

    Save Style

    Button

    Menu Option

    Alternative

    Description

    VariablePropsIcon.png

    Edit | Modify

    Ctrl + M

    Edit the analysis specification by displaying the Analysis Definition dialog.

    StyleModeIcon.png

     

     

    Show the Edit Styles dialog for the analysis type

    Notes button

     

     

    Display or hide the notes associated with the analysis.

    1 2 3  button

    Edit | Run

     

    Recalculate the results in the event of a change having been made to the variable definition or the raw data. The button will only be available if changes have been made.

    SaveIcon.png

     

     

    Save the results.

    CancelIcon.png

     

     

    Restore results to its last saved position, or close the window if the analysis has not been saved.

    CopyIcon.png

    Edit | Copy

    Ctrl + C

    Copy the analysis (text or image) to the clipboard.

    PrintIcon.png

    File | Print Report

    Ctrl + Shift + F12

    Open the Results Report dialog to print the window contents

    Chi-squared button

    View | Statistics

     

    Show the Chi-square statistics on a cross-tabulation displayed as a table or chart.

    The post Using the Analysis Display Dialog appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Using the Analysis Definition Dialog https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-the-analysis-definition-dialog/ Mon, 20 Jul 2020 13:25:30 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2087 The Analysis Definition dialog contains all the information and settings used to create the analysis. There are seven tabs that are available in the Analysis Definition dialog. The tabs that are displayed depend on the settings. Definition tab Area Description Type Specifies the analysis as a table, chart, list, cloud or map. Style Selects the […]

    The post Using the Analysis Definition Dialog appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Analysis Definition dialog contains all the information and settings used to create the analysis.

    There are seven tabs that are available in the Analysis Definition dialog.

    • Definition defines the name and style of the analysis (table, chart, cloud, list or map) and the data analysed.
    • Notes/Titles define the titles and notes that appear on the analysis.
    • Base/Labels define the base used for the analysis and set templates for the labels.
    • Report Styles defines the titles and descriptions that are included in the report and select the horizontal alignment.
    • Cells define how the data appears in the table cells.
    • Auto Coding defines how to automatically generate variables for analyses that are built from open response questions.
    • Summary Statistics define the advanced statistics that are displayed in the analysis.
    • Descriptive Statistics define the descriptive statistics for numeric and quantity data that are displayed in the analysis.

    The tabs that are displayed depend on the settings.

    Definition tab

    Definition tab in the Analysis definition dialog
    Area Description
    Type Specifies the analysis as a table, chart, list, cloud or map.
    Style Selects the style template appropriate to the defined type.
    Content  

    Analysis

    Specifies one axis for the data to be analysed (normally the rows of a table).

    This can contain:

    • A list or range, consisting of comma separated variable names or TO ( ~)
    • A survey expression, consisting of variable names separated by keywords WITH (:), AND(&), PER (%), NOT(!))
    • Pre-defined tables such as Statistics table, Grid table, Holecount table

    Break

    Specifies the other axis used to split the data into subgroups.

    This can contain:

    • A list or range, consisting of comma separated variable names or TO ( ~)
    • A survey expression, consisting of variable names separated by keywords WITH (:), AND (&), PER (%), NOT (!))

    Pre-defined tables such as Statistics table, Grid table, Holecount table

    Transpose

    Switch the positions of Analysis and Break

    Calculate

    Specifies the type of analysis together with a field specifying the analysis data. There are six Calculate values.

    • Counts & Percents (default option)
    • Means & Significances
    • Means & Differences
    • Sum & Percents
    • Means & Percents
    • Means & %Differences

    The variable entered in the Calculate box adjacent to the Calculate list box is used to calculate the means and sums.

    Base If no Base is specified then all respondents in the survey will be included in the analysis.
    Filter Defines the subset of data to analyse given as a logical expression.

    Weight

    Defines how to alter the calculation to represent a different group of respondents. This can be
    • the name of a variable
    • the name of a weight matrix and the variable to which it refers (e.g. WT1(Q10))
    • a numeric value

    Allow additional filters

    Permits other filters to be applied to this analysis when used in reports. Clear this option if you always want this analysis to appear exactly as defined.

    Show Options

    The options available depend on the type of analysis selected in Content and Calculate.

    All

    Show all rows or columns in table or equivalent in chart

    Top rows (or columns)

    Display following number of rows (or columns) from start of table

    Bottom rows (or columns)

    Display following number of rows (or columns) to end of table

    Rows (or columns) above

    Display number of rows (or columns) above a specified value

    Rows (or columns) below

    Display number of rows (or columns) below a specified value

    Retain ‘Other’ row (or column)

    Creates ”Other’ category if rows (or columns) are limited

    Order by

    Defines the order in which the analysis data appears

    • Default where items appear in the order they appear in the questionnaire
    • Analysis Label sorts in alphabetical order by label
    • Analysis Base sorts with the most popular reply first, based on the number of counts for each of the codes in the analysis variable.
    • Score sorts on the statistics that have been added to the table, e.g. mean. If multiple statistics are selected, the one used will be the highest statistic in the list that can be sorted.
    Reverse Order Select the check box to reverse the selected order
    Hide Table Select the check box to hide the analysis display in a report so that only the notes are visible
    Name A name by which each analysis can be saved for later recall/reference
    Display Name The name that will be used for the analysis when displayed in Snap Online.
    Available Enter a condition under which the analysis is visible in Snap Online. Set to No to make the analysis unavailable and leave blank for it to be available.

    Notes/Titles tab

    Notes and Titles tab in the Analysis definition dialog
    Area Description
    Title Defines the title for table window and text report. This defaults to a summary of the analysis.
    Insert Insert an Image, Variable field, Survey field, Date/Time field, HTML field, Analysis field or Cell value field at the current cursor position.
    Chart Axis titles Specify the titles for the chart axes
    Analysis Defaults to the analysis definition as title
    Break Title for the x-axis (not for pies or doughnuts) Defaults to the break definition
    Value Title for the y-axis (not for pies or doughnuts)
     Use Defaults Set the chart axis titles back to the default values.
    Text style area Specifies the font typeface, size, colour and formatting used in notes.
    Insert Insert an Image, Variable field, Survey field, Date/Time field, HTML field, Analysis field or Cell value field at the current cursor position.the note
    Notes panel Enter text for more information about the current analysis. Text entered here can be viewed and edited in a text panel below the window displaying the result (visible by clicking Notes button in the display window toolbar). It will be included in exports and printed results.

    Base/Labels tab

    Base and Labels tab in the Analysis definition dialog
    Area Description
    Base
    • Responses include all valid replies which may be greater than respondents in a multi-response survey.
    • Respondents include all respondents

    Update Display

    Define when the analysis view is updated

    • On request: update when 1 2 3  button is pressed
    • On text change only: update if variable labels change
    • On any change: update whenever respondent data changes
    Show  
    Language Select the survey language for any labels and analysis fields. This defaults to the system language. When there is no text defined in survey for that language, text will not be displayed.
    Analysis base as Enter text for label in field.
    Break base as Enter text for label for base section in field
    Unweighted as Select or clear the check box to display the unweighted and weighted break bases separately. This is only available if a weight is applied. Enter text for label in field.
    Weighted as Enter text for label in field.
    Missing as Title for the group of No Reply, Not Asked and Errors. Automatically included if any of these included
    Other as Group heading for quantity variables
    Errors
    Not asked
    No reply
    You can choose whether non-valid responses are included in the calculations for the analysis and break values. You can also choose whether to display a line of information about these responses
    • Show to include the responses in analysis or/and break and display information on them. Enter text for label in field
    • Hide to include the responses in analysis or/and break but do not show the information.
    • Exclude to remove the responses from the analysis or/and break

    Templates

    Use Insert to insert one of

    • base Current base value
    • label The label of the analysis variable (grid or code)
    • name The number or ID of the question used for analysis (headings only)
    • score The weights placed on the different responses to a multi-choice question (labels only)
    • unweighted unweighted base values (only useful if the base is weighted).
    • You may also include free text, either on its own or to separate inserted fields.

    Analysis Heading

    Title for analysis group of rows. Defaults to the variable label (analysis question grid label).

    Analysis Label

    Title for analysis rows. Defaults to the analysis question code label.

    Break Heading

    Title for break group of columns. Defaults to the variable label (break question grid label)

    Break Label

    Title for break columns. Defaults to the break question code label.

    Expand axis labels

    If multiple variables are used, provide separate labels for each of the variables that appear on one axis. (Charts only). You can define the content of these labels in the Analysis and Break Heading and Label template fields.

    Report Styles

    Report styles tab in the Analysis definition dialog

    Area

    Description

    Reports Include

    Description

    Include the detailed description defined in the Results Report dialog when you print an analysis from an analysis window

    Notes

    Include the notes entered in the Notes tab

    Analysis text

    Include the question text of the Analysis expression

    Title

    Include the title text entered in the Notes tab

    Cells

    Area

    Description

    Decimal places

    Specify the number of decimal places shown on the following values

    Counts

    Defaults to 0

    Means

    Defaults to 0

    Percentages

    Defaults to 0

    Sums

    Defaults to 0

    Show % sign

    Select or clear the check box to display percentage sign. Defaults to on

    Accuracy

    Significant figures

    Maximm number of significant figures. Defaults to 13 (including decimal places). If calculations exceed this number, the word OVERFLOW is shown.

    Calculations d.p

    The number of decimal places used in the calculations. Defaults to 2.

    Suppress zeroes on specified axis

    Remove rows and/or columns (as specified) in a table or chart where all responses are 0. (If you still wish to use them in confidence calculations, you will need to clear the Ordered values box on the Summary statistics tab)

    Thresholds

    Body cells appear as when is

    Check box to specify the conditions under which an entire row or column is suppressed and the character to be used to replace the values field

    Any cell appears as
    when is

    Check box to specify the conditions under which any individual cell in the table is suppressed. The default setting is to replace all zero (or less) values with a hyphen (-)

    Body t-test/Body z-test

    Displays t-test for Means and Significances analysis selected on the Definition tab and z-test if z-test is checked on the Definition tab for Counts and Percents.

    Upper Level

    Upper significance level

    Lower Level

    Lower significance level

    Labels

    Select Grouped or Continuous to choose how multiple break variables will be labelled

    Show

    Select which column the significance levels will be displayed in:

    All: All columns where they apply
    Upper: Only show the columns with the upper significance level


    Lower: Only show the columns with the lower significance level
    Left: Only show the left-most column showing the significance level


    Right: Only show the right-most column containing the significance level

    Apply Tukeys correction Check to apply correction to the t-test formula which takes account of carrying out multiple t-tests (t-test only)
    Apply Yates correction Check to apply correction to the z-test formula which increases the precision of the test (z-test only)
    Tail Select two-tailed test when looking for a difference between two mean scores

    Select one-tailed test when looking for an increase or a decrease between results

    Hyphen Check to display hyphens for non-significant results
    Index Check to label columns with the letter used as an index

    Auto Coding

    Auto coding tab in the Analysis definition dialog
    Area Description
    Auto Coding  
    Quantity

    Set to None for no auto coding


    Set to Clusters to auto categorise the data using a k-means cluster analysis


    Set to Values to sort the quantity responses into code bands with one code per unique value

    Literal

    Set to None for no auto coding

    Set to Values to create a code for each unique response (so “I like apples” and “I love apples” would have different codes.)

    Set to Words to create a code for each unique word in a response (so “I like apples” and “I love apples” would have four codes, one each for “I”, “like”, “love” and “apples”)

    Date

    Set to None for no auto coding

    Set to Values to sort date responses into code bands with one code per unique value

    Time

    Set to None for no auto coding

    Set to Values to sort time responses into code bands with one code per unique value

    Words and Values

     

    Case sensitive

    Create separate codes if responses use different cases.

    Stop default words

    Do not code words that are included in the stop list

    Stop default values

    Do not code values that are included in the stop list

    Modify case

    Change the case of words or phrases to the selected style

    Limit codes

    Set the maximum number of codes to be used (maximum number of 2000)

    Clusters

    Specify how open-response quantities will be coded into clusters

    Clusters

    Set the number of clusters to create

    Iterations

    Set how often the algorithm is repeated (higher numbers give greater accuracy but are slower)

    Running means

    Check to calculate the cluster centres every time a data case is allocated to a new cluster, rather than waiting until all cases have been evaluated.

    Initial Centres

    Specify the starting point of the calculations

     

    Set to Zero (default) to start at 0 (in the n-dimensional space). Since the data has been standardised, this should be the centre point of all the variable data

     

    Set to First case to use the data in the first respondent case as the starting point

     

    Set to Evenly spread to spread the start points evenly across the n-dimensional space

    Summary Statistics

    Summary Statistics tab in the Analysis definition dialog

    Area

    Description

    Available

    List of statistical data you can add to your chart/table

    Used

    List of statistical data you have added to your chart/table

    Statistical data

     

    <Body>

    The analysis/break information given in definition

    Confidence (mean)

    Specify the confidence level and display the confidence interval level for the mean (using the defined scoring system)

    Confidence Bottom Box

    Specify a low-end group of values to be calculated and displayed. If confidence interval selected as an option, display the level of confidence that sample matches target population.

    Confidence Difference

    Display (top box percentage total) – (bottom box percentage total)

    Confidence Top Box

    Specify a high-end group of values to be calculated and displayed. If confidence interval selected as an option, display the level of confidence that sample matches target population.

    Mean

    Average value of the analysis variable(total divided by base) using the defined scoring system

    Median

    Central value (equal number of cases to each side

    Significance (t-test)

    Compare mean scores of columns with mean scores of the base to distinguish whether or not the difference between the groups’ averages would most likely reflect a “real” difference in the population from which the groups were sampled. The significance is shown as a percentage.

    Standard Deviation

    Display standard deviation (measure of dispersal of values and hence deviation from mean)

    Standard Error

    Display standard error (indication of how far individual scores deviate from the mean score)

    t-test

    Compare mean scores of axis-defined groups to see if difference is significant. Display significance letters by column values

    U test

    Compare median scores of axis-defined groups to see if difference is significant. Display significance letters by column values

    Variance

    Display variance (measure of dispersion of values in a distribution)

    This table shows the meaning of the options which appear when a given statistic is selected. These options specify how the statistic is calculated and displayed. The default options are set in the Analysis tailoring dialog.

    Statistic

    Option

    Meaning

    Mean

    Standard Error

    Standard Deviation

    Variance

    Median

    Score

    Name of weight matrix, calculation, or name of variable to apply

     

    Decimal places

    Number of decimal places used in calculation

    Confidence (mean)

    Confidence Level

    The level of certainty that the answer lies within the range given

    Confidence Top Box

    Confidence Bottom Box

    Use the x y responses out of z to calculate q

    Select the range of responses used to calculate the confidence top or bottom box. These will be the high-end responses for the top box and the low-end responses for the bottom box

     

    Ordered values

    Check to only use displayed (ordered) values in calculation and omit any suppressed zero values

     

    at a confidence level of

    (gap between sample and population) at the specified confidence level

     

    Show confidence intervals

    Check to display the confidence interval results

     

    z-test

    Check to display the z-test results with the confidence intervals

     

    Multiplier

    Allows you to modify the confidence interval if the sample is weighted or drawn from a small (or finite ) population. Set to sqrt(1-n/N) where n = sample size and N = population

    Significance (t-test)

    Comparison

    Base used when comparing the mean of base to the mean of each category on your table. Either use:

    Base: the mean for all respondents

    Base less current: the mean for respondents that are not included in the category being compared.

     

    Score

    Name of weight matrix, calculation, or name of variable to apply (same as that used for Mean, Standard Error, Standard Deviation, Variance, Median)

     

    Decimal places

    Number of decimal places used in calculation

    t-test

    U test

    Upper Level

    Set the upper significance level

     

    Lower Level

    Set the lower significance level

     

    Labels: Grouped
    Labels: Continuous

    Specify how the figures are shown for tables with more than one break variable

     

    Show:

    All
    Higher
    Lower
    Left
    Right

     

    Select whether result is shown in both columns it affects, or whether it is only shown in one column. The column it is shown in may be:

    column with the higher/lower value

    column in the left-most/right-most position

     

    Show:

    Hyphen
    Index

     

    Check to show hyphens for non-significant results

    Check to label columns with the letter used as index

     

    1-Tail
    2-Tail

    Select type of test (crudely, 1-tailed when looking for increase/decrease between results;2-tailed when looking for difference between two mean scores)

     

    Apply Tukey’s Correction (t-test only)

    Apply Tukey’s Honestly Significant Difference (HSD) correction to take account of carrying out multiple t-tests

     

    Results exclude the x y codes (U test only)

    Enables you to exclude codes (eg, Don’t Know ) from the calculation

    Descriptive Statistics

    Descriptive Statistics tab in the Analysis definition dialog

    Statistic

    Description

    Count

    The number of data cases

    Mean

    This is often called the average. It is defined as the sum of the items divided by the number of items. For example, for ten responses

    Mean = (1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 3 + 4 + 5 + 4 + 6 + 2) = 34 10 = 3.4

    Mode

    The mode of a distribution is the most frequent or most popular item. If two values tie for the mode, Snap chooses the lower. With the same ten responses: 1, 2, 2, 3, 3, 4, 4, 4, 5, 6

    Mode = 4, since 4 is the most frequently occurring value (three occurrences).

    Quartile 1

    25% through a range of values

    Median

    The midpoint or 50% through a range of values. To calculate the median, the items of the distribution are arranged in order of magnitude starting with either the smallest or the largest, then:

    if the number of items is odd, the median is the value of the middle item.

    if the number of items is even, the median is the mean of the two middle items.

    1, 2, 2, 3, 3, 4, 4, 4, 5, 6

    Median = (3 + 4) ÷ 2 = 3.5

    Quartile 3

    75% through a range of values.

    Sum

    The sum is calculated by adding all the values of a distribution.

    Sum = 1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 3 + 4 + 5 + 4 + 6 + 2 = 34

    Minimum

    The minimum is the smallest value of the distribution.

    Minimum = 1

    Maximum

    The maximum is the largest value of the distribution.

    Maximum = 6

    Range

    The range shows the spread of the distribution and is calculated by subtracting the smallest value (minimum) from the largest value (maximum).

    Range = 6 – 1 = 5

    Standard Deviation

    The standard deviation is a measure of dispersion of values in a distribution. It gives an indication of how much the values deviate from the mean. Thus, a distribution with a large range would have a larger standard deviation than one with a small range. The standard deviation is calculated as:

    https://www.snapsurveys.com/help/15530.bmp

    where xi is each value in the distribution, https://www.snapsurveys.com/help/15531.bmp is the mean of the values and n is the number of cases. For the sample in question:

    Standard Deviation = 1.428286

    Variance

    The variance is another measure of dispersion of values in a distribution and is used in the calculation of the standard deviation:

    Snap calculates the standard deviation and variance by assuming the data represents a sample rather than an entire population.

    Standard Error of the Mean

    The standard error of the mean is calculated by dividing the standard deviation by the square root of the number of items in the sample. It is defined as the standard deviation of the distribution of the sample mean and gives an indication of how far individual scores deviate from the mean score shown. The larger the sample, and/or the closer the individual scores are to the mean score, the smaller the standard error.

    Standard Error of the Mean = 1.428286 ÷ √10 = 0.451664

    Skewness

    A distribution that is not symmetrical but has more cases toward one end of the distribution than the other is called skewed.

    The measures of central tendency (mean, mode and median) can vary considerably. If the mean is larger than the mid point of the range (the median) and the most frequently occurring value (the mode), the sample is said to be positively skewed.

    If the mean is smaller than the mid point of the range (the median) and the most frequently occurring value (the mode), the sample is said to be negatively skewed.

    A small skewness value (close to 0) indicates that the data is evenly distributed about the mean. With this type of distribution it would be expected that the values for mean, mode and median be similar. The skewness of the example is 0.098843 indicating a small positive skewness.

    Kurtosis

    Kurtosis also gives an indication of the shape of a distribution in the form of the extent to which, for a given standard deviation, the data clusters around a central point.

    A positive value for kurtosis indicates a distribution that is more peaked than usual. A distribution of this type would typically have most of the values clustered around a central point.

    A negative value for kurtosis indicates a flatter or more widely dispersed distribution. The kurtosis for the example is -0.75202

    Average Absolute Deviation

    The average of the absolute deviations. It is a and tends to ignore distant outliers. It is a summary statistic of statistical dispersion and would normally only be displayed if specifically requested

    Sample Standard Deviation

    An estimate of the population standard deviation based on the sample.

    Sample Variance

    An estimate of the population variance based on the sample.

    The post Using the Analysis Definition Dialog appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Defining an analysis (table, chart, list, cloud or map) https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/defining-an-analysis-table-chart-list-cloud-or-map/ Mon, 20 Jul 2020 13:11:21 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2079 Select the toolbar button for the type of analysis you wish to create: table chart cloud list map The Analysis Definition dialog will be displayed. The Analysis Definition dialog has several tabs, allowing you to set the analysis you are using, and precisely what is displayed and in which style. The main items you are […]

    The post Defining an analysis (table, chart, list, cloud or map) appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
  • Select the toolbar button for the type of analysis you wish to create:
    • AnalysisTblIcon.png table
    • AnalysisChartIcon.png chart
    • AnalysisCloudIcon.png cloud
    • AnalysisListIcon.png list
    • AnalysisMapIcon.png map
  • The Analysis Definition dialog will be displayed.
  • Definition tab in the Analysis definition dialog
    1. The Analysis Definition dialog has several tabs, allowing you to set the analysis you are using, and precisely what is displayed and in which style.
    2. The main items you are likely to use are on the Definition tab. Other options will be enabled according to the type of analysis you are carrying out.

    Area

    Description

    Type and Style

    The Type specifies whether it is a table, chart, list or map, and the Style references a list of predefined presentation formats. These can be altered and saved for use in future surveys.

    Content (Analysis, Break & Calculate)

    You enter the names of the variables you wish to display in the Analysis field. If you wish to relate them to a different set of variables, (cross-tabulation) you enter the second set in the Break field. The Analysis field normally specifies the rows of a table and the Break normally specifies the columns. The Calculate field provides six alternative forms of analysis, with Counts & Percents as the default. You can use lists and ranges of variables in the content field modified by expressions.

    Base

    You can change whether the analysis is calculated from all respondents or all responses (eg all codes selected for a single question, or the one respondent who selected them) in the Base/Labels tab

    Transpose

    Present the analysis as columns and the break as rows

    Base
    (Filter and
    Weight)

    You can select which cases you wish to use by applying a filter.You can make some cases count more than others (to match the cases more closely to a population) by applying a weight.

    Show Options

    The default value is Counts (number of cases), but means, percentages, significances and differences can be incorporated.

    Name

    A unique name to identify each analysis

    Title

    You can change the default title for your analysis using the Notes/Titles tab

    You can add informative text around your analysis using the Notes/Titles tab.

    You can change the text labelling the analysis items on the Base/Labels tab

    The post Defining an analysis (table, chart, list, cloud or map) appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Analysing data https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/snap-analyses/ Mon, 20 Jul 2020 13:06:19 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=2077 Snap XMP Desktop provides analyses to analyze your response data. The analyses provided are There are pre-defined analyses styles supplied with Snap XMP Desktop. The styles can be used as provided as well as being used to define your own styles. Analyses are split into three parts: Data analysis You can limit and vary the […]

    The post Analysing data appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Snap XMP Desktop provides analyses to analyze your response data. The analyses provided are

    • Tables
    • Charts
    • Word clouds
    • Lists
    • Maps

    There are pre-defined analyses styles supplied with Snap XMP Desktop. The styles can be used as provided as well as being used to define your own styles.

    Analyses are split into three parts:

    • The data that is analysed
    • The data that you choose to display
    • The way it looks

    Data analysis

    You can limit and vary the responses you use

    • Create derived variables in which you can present responses in different ways
    • Set up filters so you only use subsets of the data
    • Set up contexts variables to see data in different contexts (e.g., how results for an individual compare to the average of all results)

    You can analyse the data and display the results in many different ways within Snap XMP Desktop:

    • see a quick summary of totals in the questionnaire summary
    • set up tables, charts, maps, clouds and lists
    • produce statistical analyses
    • set up smart reports
    • Tabular analysis includes holecounts, cross-tabulations, frequency and grid tables.
    • Graphical analysis includes bar, pie, line, area, scatter, doughnut, Gantt, hi-lo charts, word clouds and graphical maps.
    • Descriptive statistics available include: Mean, Mode, Median, Quartiles, Sum, Min, Max, Range, Standard Deviation, Variance, Standard Error, Skewness and Kurtosis.
    • Chi-Square tests, means and medians, standard deviation, standard error, confidence indicators, t-test, U-test and variance available for cross-tabulations.

    The results can be expressed as row, column or total percentages or as expected or index values. Results can be ordered and zero suppressed

    When you have created your analyses you can:

    • Print the results
    • Include the results in a report
    • Save the results within the survey
    • Export the results to HTML pages for display on the Web
    • Export the results to other software packages for further manipulation

    The post Analysing data appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>